P. 1
DCS centum 3000.pdf

DCS centum 3000.pdf

|Views: 119|Likes:
Published by Christopher Ramirez

More info:

Published by: Christopher Ramirez on Jun 25, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

12/11/2013

pdf

text

original

Technical Information

TI 33Q01B10-01E

CENTUM CS 3000 Integrated Production Control System System Overview

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan Tel.: 81-422-52-5634 Fax.: 81-422-52-9802

TI 33Q01B10-01E ©Copyright May 1998 12th Edition Dec. 2007

Blank Page

i

Introduction
CENTUM CS 3000 is an integrated production control system used to manage and control the operation of plants in a wide variety of industries: petroleum refineries, petrochemical, chemical, pharmaceutical, food and beverages, paper and pulp, steel and non-ferrous metals, cement, power, gas, water and wastewater. ProSafe-RS can be used as safety instrumented system for these plants.

Structure of This Manual
This manual provides a simple overview of the CENTUM CS 3000 system. After reading this manual, see the other documents, such as General Specifications, Instruction Manuals, and so forth, for more detailed coverage of various topics. This manual consists of 16 chapters. The first introduces Yokogawa’s “Enterprise Technology Solutions” concept, CENTUM CS 3000 System Concepts, Yokogawa solutions, and related software packages. Chapters 2 through 16 introduce CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration, Operation and Monitoring Functions, Control Functions, Subsystem Communication Functions, Engineering Functions, ProSafe-RS Safety Instrumented System, Advanced Control Functions, Batch Management Functions, Plant Resource Manager, FDA:21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Function, Online Manual, Sequence of Events Manager Function, and CENTUM CS 3000 related software packages. There’s an index at the back of the manual.

Target Readership for This Manual
This manual is mainly intended for: • Managers who are planning to purchase a new control system. • Instrumentation, Power and Computer Engineers who are evaluating CENTUM CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS for purchase or who will be in charge of installation.

Representation of Panels in This Manual
• Panels are represented in this manual as illustrations; some features may be emphasized, and some simplified or omitted. • The panel illustrations are to help you understand the functions; dimensions, labels and visible features may differ slightly from those of actual panels.

All Rights Reserved Copyright © 1998, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.27,2006-00

ii Trademarks
• CENTUM, Exaopc, Exaquantum, BEST2, ProSafe, and DARWIN are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. • Microsoft, ActiveX, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in United States and/or other countries. • Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. • MELSEC-A is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. • Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric and/or such related companies. • Memocon-SC is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Electric Corporation. • PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation, inc. • SYSMAC is a registered trademark of Omron Corporation. • SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS Corporation. • “FOUNDATION” in “FOUNDATION Fieldbus” is a registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation. • SmartPlant is a registered trademark of Intergraph Corporation. • Other product and company names may be registered trademarks of their respective companies (the TM or ® mark is not displayed).

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.27,2006-00

Toc-1

CENTUM CS 3000 Integrated Production Control System System Overview
TI 33Q01B10-01E 12th Edition

CONTENTS
1. System Overview...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 Yokogawa’s Enterprise Technology Solutions Concept .............................. 1-1 System Concepts .............................................................................................. 1-2 Solutions Incorporating CENTUM CS 3000 .................................................. 1-3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 Open Environment for Optimizing the Whole Enterprise .....................1-3 Optimal Operating Environment, Hardware Upgradeable to the Latest Technology ........................................................................... 1-4 Flexible, Durable System that can be Optimized for Your Plant ........ 1-5 Minimize Total Cost of Ownership, Increase Profits .......................... 1-6 Powerful Engineering Functions ........................................................ 1-7 Improved Security and Safety for Plants ........................................... 1-8

2.

System Configuration .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1 2.2 2.3 System Configuration – CENTUM CS 3000 Equipment ............................... 2-3 System Specifications...................................................................................... 2-6 Human Interface Station (HIS) ......................................................................... 2-8 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.7 Console Type HIS .............................................................................. 2-8 Desktop Type HIS ............................................................................ 2-10 Operation Keyboard......................................................................... 2-10 FCS for FIO (KFCS, KFCS2, FFCS) ............................................... 2-13 FCS for RIO (LFCS, LFCS2) ........................................................... 2-19 Compact FCS for RIO (PFC-H/-S/-E)........................................... 2-25 Fieldnetwork I/O (FIO) ..................................................................... 2-27 Remote I/O (RIO) ............................................................................. 2-32 V net ................................................................................................. 2-40 Ethernet............................................................................................ 2-40

Field Control Station (FCS) ............................................................................ 2-12

I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules ................................................................ 2-27

Networks .......................................................................................................... 2-39

Fieldbus ........................................................................................................... 2-41

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.14,2007-00

...5 3...............................................................2......................................................4 3......................................................................................3 3. 2-44 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for FIO .......... 3-6 Window Sizing ...2 2...3.............8.................................5 3..........3. FCS for RIO ....................................1 2...11 3......11 Redundancy and Reliability of the FCS for FIO....................11............. 3-4 System Message Window ...........2....1 3.... 3-28 Operator Guide Window ........................ 2-53 Cautions ...............................11............10 2....7 3................ 3-12 Dynamic Window Set..............................................................................................2 3.......... 3-7 Window Hierarchy............11............ 2-52 2......3 2................2...... 3-3 3........... 2-52 System Clock and VEHICLE Clock ............10 3. 2-54 3.................................... 2-54 Time Synchronization in Different Domains ..................................... 2-50 Time Management...11............2...............2.......11.........................Toc-2 2................................. 3-17 Graphic Windows........................................7 Time Synchronization Scheme ................................................4 2............3..... 3-18 Tuning Window .....3 3.......2................6 3..... 2-53 Time Synchronization of the Stations Not Connected on V net ... 2-48 CPU Failure .. 3-29 Message Monitoring Window .......9 2......................................................... 2-52 Time Adjustment .4 3..........................8.......8.......................................................................................................2......3.....................8 Redundancy and Reliability .......................... 3-14 Alarm Processing Functions ................2 Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions ...................... 2-44 2. 3-8 Navigator Window......... 3-30 Operation and Monitoring Windows ................................. 3-26 Trend Point Window.........................................8 3......................................................................................... 3-3 Operating Screen Mode......................11............. Operation and Monitoring Functions ............................3..................3 3......................................3........2 3............................................................................... 3-18 TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30...................2...............5 2......................3 2..1 3....... 3-27 Process Alarm Window ..7 Window Call-up ................................ 3-25 Trend Window .........................................6 3........................ 3-1 3.........................9 3...... 2-49 Compliance with Various Standards ... 2-53 Time Discrepancy .................. 3-11 Panel Set.......................2............2 2........................................................................................................................... 3-13 Circulate Functions ....................................... 3-15 Print Screen Functions ......................................11.................... 3-2 Common Operation and Monitoring Functions ...............3.............................2...............................................................................................2006-00 ......................................2-46 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for RIO ............................2....6 2...................1 2.....................1 3...

....7...........6...........5............................................ 3-65 TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30...........11 3...6....................... 3-38 Multi-monitor Functions ................5...............................8 3....................5....... 3-59 Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function (Option) ...................... 3-44 SCS Status Display Window .......................4 3..................4......................................4 Operation and Monitoring Support Functions ..............................................................................4..........................................................................................................................13 3......... 3-42 System Alarm Window .... 3-41 System Status Overview Window ..4 3..........................................3 3.......6 3..............................................................4 3................................. 3-63 Consolidated Historical Message Viewer Meeting FDA Regulations (Option) ....................................5.....................................................Toc-3 3.9 3....................................4... 3-43 FCS Status Display Window ..........5 3...................................7................ 3-55 Expert Trend Viewer Function (Option) ......................14 Process Reports ......5........... 3-49 Logic Chart Window (Option)..............................................1 3...........4 3.. 3-47 Control Drawing Window (Option) .................................... 3-52 Tuning Trend ................7............6......... 3-51 Trends .....................6 3.10 3.................................... 3-39 Advanced Alarm Filter Function ...................1 3..... 3-56 System Maintenance Functions ................................... 3-31 Security Functions ...6 3..... 3-64 System Integration OPC Station (SIOS) (Option) ........4...... 3-53 Long-term Data Archive Functions (Option) ...................................5 3............................7 3.....4... 3-54 External Recorder Output Functions (Option) ................... 3-45 HIS Setting Window ...................7..............................1 3....................7.........................5 3...........12 3................4... 3-50 SEBOL Window ................................ 3-62 Configured Information Reference Function (Option) ......3 3.................... 3-48 Sequence Table Window .........7 3..... 3-42 Control Status Display Window .... 3-31 Historical Message Reports ..............4.....10 3............6............8 3.. 3-48 Trend Functions ............. 3-32 Report Functions (Option) ................................2 3....................................................2 3....................2 3............... 3-52 Open Interfaces (Option) .. 3-40 Remote Desktop Function .......................................................................................4..........6 3..............................3 3...............................................................5.....................................................7.......................... 3-61 Web Monitoring Functions (Option) ............................ 3-38 Voice Messaging Functions .................5. 3-37 CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization ....... 3-53 Displaying Trends from Other Stations ................... 3-57 FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Functions (PICOT) (Option)............................... 3-31 3.................3 3........................................9 3............. 3-46 Time Setting Dialog Box ...... 3-47 Help Dialog Box .............................................. 3-51 SFC Window .................. 3-34 Connecting an ITV Camera ..............................................4..........................................5 3............................................2 3....................................1 3....2006-00 ..........4.................................................5 3.............6........................................7 3....................................

....................................................................... 4-5 Sequence Control Functions ..................2 5...... 5-1 5........................................1 6.................6 6.... 4-3 Regulatory Control Functions ............4.......... 4-6 Calculation Functions ..........................1 5.. 5-1 Supported Subsystem Communication Packages..4 6......................................................... 5-1 5. 6-20 DevicePanel Functions ...................... 4-11 Valve Pattern Monitors (Option)....................1...1................................................................ 4-10 Faceplate Block Functions....................................................... 4-3 Control Drawings (Option) ............................................................ 4-1 4.............................................................................................10 4.7 4....................................Toc-4 3................2006-00 ...........................................................................4.....8 4............................................................9 4..................................2........ 3-67 Consolidated Alarm Management Software for Human Interface Station (CAMS for HIS) (Option) .................1............. 6-2 Engineering Environment ........1 Concurrent Engineering ...................................... 5-4 Redundant Communication Functions ...... 4-20 4..1..............1............1.....27... 4-14 Process Input/Output and Software Input/Output ...........1.......................................................... 6-19 Remote Maintenance (Option).........................................................3 4............4 4...1 4.........16 Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal (VTSPortal) ............................................1................. 6-19 Coordination with SmartPlant Instrumentation ...... 5-6 Configuration of Engineering Functions .......7 6..... 4-13 Offsite Block Functions (Option) ..........2 4.................1.6 4.........8 6......................... 6-7 6.............................1........................1.. 6-10 Utility Functions ..... 6-7 Builder ....................................................1.........................................................1 6......................................5 6............................... 5-4 Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (Option) ..... 6-8 6................................................................................................... Engineering Functions ....... 3-69 Configuration of FCS Control Functions ................................................................................................... 6-1 6....................................................1.....................................3 6.........................2 System View .......2 Connecting Subsystems .......... Subsystem Communication Functions ...................11 Function Blocks................................................................................. 6-15 Online Maintenance Functions ...............................9 6...... 6-21 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec... 5-2 Data Flow between Function Blocks and Subsystems ............. 6-5 Engineering Procedure ........10 Test Functions (Option)..........2 6......................................15 3........1 Communications with Subsystems Through an FCS (Option) ............................ 4-2 4.......5 4.........1 5................. 4-13 List of Function Blocks ..............................1...... 6-6 Standard Engineering Functions .......................................... 6-3 6.....................1...........3 5............... 4-10 Unit Management Functions.................................................... Field Control Station Control Functions ...........4 5.........

............................ 11-1 11..... 8-6 8.................................... 8-5 8....1 10...............................................1 8...................... 7-13 Test Functions ....................................................................... 10-4 Data Security ..........................3......................3...3..........................................................................................3........................................................................ FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Function (including option).......2 Requirements for a DCS for Batch Processes ................................. 7-13 Dual-redundant SCS and Reliability of SCS . 7-25 Safety Control Station (SCS) ........................... 7-26 Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring.........2 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec...............................1 7..............................................................................3 8........... 7-24 Virtual Tests ............4 7....... 7-23 Operation at SCS Errors ................................ 8-4 8................................... 7-19 SOER ......................................................... 7-8 Hardware Configuration Devices.................................................................................................................................5 APCS Operation and Monitoring............2 8...... 7-4 System Configuration of ProSafe-RS ..............5 7................................................. 7-5 System Scale and Hardware Implementation Requirements .............2007-00 ..................... 7-25 ProSafe-RS Related Packages ..4 7..............6 System Overview ....................................................... 7-17 States and Operations of SCS.. 7-22 Subsystem Connection (Modbus) ......2 10................2 7............... 11-4 10......................................2 Features of ProSafe-RS ...........2................................... 8-5 APCS Engineering .................................1 9..... 8-1 8...........................................................3...............3 7......3 Scan Period ......... Plant Resource Manager (PRM)...............................Toc-5 7................. 8-7 9.....................................1 7..... 7-25 Target Tests .......... 7-5 7....... 11-3 Data Integrity ...................... 10-1 10................................ Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) ........................6 7.... 7-27 APCS Overview ..................... Advanced Control Functions ..........1 11..................... 10-2 Device Navigation Function.....................................................................3.................1 APCS Simulation Testing ........2 8.................1 8.....................14..........5 7.....................................................................3 7............................5.............................4 8. 7-9 Hardware Configuration of SCS ...........................3........................................................9-1 Main Functions of CS Batch 3000 Package ..3............................................. Batch Management Functions (Option)............2 7......... 8-4 Function Blocks...............................2......3 11.................................................. 7-1 7............................................................3........................ 8-2 Features of the APCS .......2 7...............................4.................................... 9-2 Maintenance Information Managed by PRM ................................................................................................................................................1 7...1 7...............4....3 7......................... 9-1 9............. 8-3 APCS Control Functions .............................................2....................................................... 10-3 Support of Maintenance Inspection Works ................. 8-4 Input and Output of APCS........................................

................................. 13-1 13............................... 15...................................................................................3 13. Online Manual .. 16-2 Appendix Correspondence of Abbreviations and Product Models ..................... 12-1 12...................... 13-4 System Monitoring and Maintenance Functions....Toc-6 12.................... 16-1 16....... 13-6 13.... 15-1 CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages ........... App.................................-1 TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30... 13-3 Basic SEM Configuration Equipment and Software Packages ....................2 13............... 12-1 Convenient Ways to Use Online Manual .........4 14........... 16............................................................2 Running Online Manual Viewer ...................... 14-1 Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH)...............2 Exapilot: Operation Efficiency Increase Package ........................................... 16-1 Exaopc: OPC Interface Package .......................... Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) ......1 12................. Event Viewer Package ...2006-00 .....................................................1 16............ 12-2 System Configuration ......................1 13................................... 13-2 Functional Configuration ...............................................................................................................

the latest field instrumentation – complete packages of the latest equipment and software technology. This new system has the functionality. Yokogawa can provide complete solutions: sophisticated information and control systems.1999-00 . 1. and is also based on the V net control bus.1. installation and startup through maintenance. This system is a synthesis of the latest technology with Yokogawa’s experience and specialist know-how. System Overview CENTUM CS 3000 is an integrated production control system for medium and large process control applications.1 This section introduces Yokogawa’s Enterprise Technology Solutions concept. flexibility and reliability of our CENTUM CS. allowing management to improve profits. plus a complete range of services: from plant design. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. and can provide optimum solutions which satisfy customer requirements. plant-simulation production support systems. System Overview 1-1 1.ai Figure Enterprise Technology Solutions Logo Enterprise Technology Solutions • Enterprise: • Technology: • Solutions: Enterprise viewpoint Latest technology Optimum solutions Yokogawa’s “Enterprise Technology Solutions” provide management with systems that integrate control of both factory and business. Yokogawa’s Enterprise Technology Solutions Concept F010101. We use the latest technology.18.

Its open interfaces facilitate data access from supervisory systems such as Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems and Manufacturing Execution Systems (MES). System Overview 1-2 1.18.ai Figure Positioning of CENTUM CS 3000 TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Analyzers.1. compatible system-designed to work with your existing systems. CENTUM CS 3000 is a scalable. and grow with your business.1999-00 . … Subsystems F010102.2 CENTUM CS 3000 is Yokogawa’s flagship control-system platform for launching Enterprise Technology Solutions. Actuators. and make it easy to create a strategic management information system for your enterprise. reducing total cost of ownership (TCO). ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) System Concepts Production Planning Asset Management MES (Manufacturing Execution System) BUSINESS DOMAIN Scheduling Maintenance Management Simulation Operation Assistance CONTROL DOMAIN Optimization Modeling Advanced Control Safety Management Control Execution CENTUM CS 3000 Field Communication Sensors.

stock management and the like. Solutions Incorporating CENTUM CS 3000 1. MES systems) Links to Factory Automation (FA) Systems In a manufacturing environment. • Optimal operating environment. • Minimize total cost of ownership. now there are requests to optimize the plant operation from an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) or Manufacturing Execution System (MES) viewpoint. There are packages for creating optimum systems which integrate CENTUM CS 3000 and many types of subsystems. In addition to OPC for communicating between PCs. and features: • Open environment for optimizing the whole enterprise. The Human Machine Interface (HMI) of CENTUM CS 3000 is general-purpose PCs (IBM PC/AT compatibles).1. Easy Links to Information Systems (ERP.3 CENTUM CS 3000 is a key part of most of Yokogawa’s Enterprise Technology Solutions. increase profits. • Flexible. we used the DCS to optimize the plant on a standalone basis. we can also provide communication with UNIX machines and the like. • Powerful engineering functions.3. the process control system needs to be synchronized with subsystems including FA systems and Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) which control packaging. hardware upgradeable to the latest technology. durable system that can be optimized for your plant. Windows 2000 and Windows XP have superb networking functions. running Windows 2000 and Windows XP. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. System Overview 1-3 1.2006-00 . and you can optimize your company at the enterprise level.1 Open Environment for Optimizing the Whole Enterprise In the past. and OPC for interfacing with supervisory computers are standard – so supervisory computers can easily access the process. • Improved Security and Safety for Plants.

The Operating Environment can incorporate the Latest Technology Synthesis of DCS and Personal Computers CENTUM CS 3000 is operated by a mouse. CENTUM CS 3000 can support up to 4. like general-purpose Windows software. and operate the system with a mouse like an office PC. so you can use the latest PC hardware. Windows includes network functions.2002-00 .1. You can also use a dedicated operator keyboard and touch screen functions.000 user-defined windows. and third-party resources such as ActiveX controls can be used. System Overview 1-4 1. operation and operator keyboard – is designed to resemble conventional DCSes. the same as conventional DCSes. the operating environment – control-specific screens. However. Integrating PCs and DCS provides a user-friendly operation environment.3. Hardware Upgradeable to the Latest Technology Over the last few years. Operation Environment Customizable to match Plant Configuration and Operating Procedures Different plants require different operating environments. so you can customize the operation environment. quickly obsoleting existing HMI hardware. and future enhancements to Windows will also result in an enhanced HMI. CENTUM CS 3000 uses general-purpose PCs running Windows 2000 and Windows XP as the HMI.2 Optimal Operating Environment. computer technology and networking technology have continued to progress at an astonishing rate. User applications written in Visual Basic. TI 33Q01B10-01E Sep. so you can create various GUI operating environments.24.

productivity. Support for Intelligent Field Instruments Not only Yokogawa but also many other field instrument vendors are releasing field instruments based on the new open standard. and also maintenance and status information which can be read by the DCS. Durable System that can be Optimized for Your Plant Controller reliability decides plant reliability. valves – may incorporate internal control functions. 01. to effectively use the control-station resources and meet the needs of a wide range of applications. Up to 256 control stations can be used in a system. System Overview 1-5 1. allowing control stations to be dedicated to performing more complex control tasks.3 Flexible. High-Reliability Controllers to Safeguard Your Plant Choose the Type of Control Station Based on Plant Scale You can select the control station hardware and software based on the size and requirements of your plant. Control Functions Support a Wide Range of Applications The control functions include the wide range of proven CENTUM CS control functions.3. so can handle anything from multiproduct variable-volume production to large volume production. the Foundation Fieldbus. and business viability. Some such instruments – for example. You can use standard control stations which handle a large number of I/O points. which have been proven in CENTUM CS. TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb. CENTUM CS 3000 supports basic PID and sequence control.1. others – such as sensors – may support multiple process variables. as well as batch control and process management functions based on the ISA S88 specification. CENTUM CS 3000 can use high-reliability “pair and spare” dual-redundant controllers. The easy-to-wire compact I/O modules – proven in CENTUM CS – can support direct thermocouple and RTD input signals. parameters. you can distribute the control load.2001-00 . By using intelligent Foundation Fieldbus devices in the field. and compact control stations with I/O which can be distributed throughout the plant and can handle high-speed communications with subsystems. The control station is available in several versions with databases preconfigured for different mixes of continuous and sequence control. so CENTUM CS 3000 is ideal for medium to large plants.

The PRM tool is designed to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of the plant by fully utilizing the capacity of highly-functionalized field communication and devices and realizing efficient device management and maintenance – all in line with modern device management in field-bus era.3. Hardware CENTUM CS 3000 is designed to reduce total installation costs. CENTUM CS. Compatible with Other Yokogawa Systems CENTUM CS 3000 systems can be linked by bus converter to CENTUM CS 3000. System Overview 1-6 1. reducing cabling and installation costs. Software. CENTUM CS 3000 components are designed to be the same size as CENTUM CS and CENTUM-XL components. Knowhow) Replacement System CENTUM CS 3000 is designed to be the optimum replacement for existing systems – it is inexpensive.1. CENTUM-XL.15. Management Cost Reduction Yokogawa offers an integrated device management tool called Plant Resource Manager (PRM). Increase Profits Continue to Use Existing User Resources (Hardware.4 Minimize Total Cost of Ownership. Also CENTUM CS 3000 and CENTUM CS can be linked to the same bus without bus converter.2003-00 . TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. CENTUM V. CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL Migration to CENTUM CS 3000 CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL can be migrated to CENTUM CS 3000 without changing field devices and wiring connected to I/O cards in existing FCSes. CENTUM CS 1000 and µXL. so will improve competitiveness of your business. This makes expansion easy. Enhance and Integrate Existing Systems You can enhance and integrate existing DCS systems. Maintenance Service Yokogawa’s Maintenance Service will keep your CENTUM CS 3000 running smoothly. Remote I/O Remote I/O units can be mounted near the plant. “BEST2” Maintenance System You can choose the optimum maintenance support plan for your needs by combining various maintenance packages – with different types of maintenance checks and different maintenance check intervals – depending on your environment and needs.

or search and print necessary parts of these electronic documents “on demand” during engineering. System Overview 1-7 1. TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.01.3.1. Easy Function Configuration Online Documentation All the manuals are provided as electronic documents on CD-ROM. • Interactive builder running on general-purpose PC. • You can reuse existing Engineering Data. it cannot succeed if system configuration is extremely timeconsuming and difficult.2001-00 . You can read them sequentially like conventional documents. mean higher quality engineering and much faster completion. The file format is Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). for example. which is the de facto standard for portable documents on the Internet. test functions are provided. CENTUM CS 3000 engineering functions are designed for efficient engineering – they are designed for ease of use. You do not need control station hardware to perform such standalone tests. and the ability for many people to proceed with work in parallel. and edit it using general-purpose Windows software.5 Powerful Engineering Functions No matter how good a system is. Consistent engineering screens (“standardization”). and software reusability. • You can test the operation of a created control station database on a “virtual system” using test functions which emulate (simulate) control stations running on a PC together with Human Interface Station software. few settings required to generate a working system.

To respond to such demand. on which this standard is formulated. facilities and environments. ProSafe-RS employs the same architecture as of CS 3000 in its basic architecture. Improvement of Plant Safety IEC 61508 defines a quantitative target for risk reduction in the context of industrial safety. considering emergency measures not only in plant but in cooperation with local society. It has been certified by TÜV Rheinland (TÜV). Safety Instrumented System Safety instrumented system acts to prevent damage to plants in case of accidents (emergency shutdown) and to prevent aggravation of damage (fire and gas protection). It is required to introduce the concept of “protection layers” to achieve allowable safety. sets guidelines for achieving the goals by specific means and stipulates to manage safety related systems based on safety lifecycles. it realizes the integrated operational environment.2006-00 .27.3. ProSafe-RS is a safety instrumented system providing “prevention layer” and “mitigation layer” in “protection layers. achieving both safety and high availability. is based on the idea that safety should be regarded as “Safety. and by connecting directly to CS 3000.” The concept of “protection layers. Achievement of both Safety and High Availability ProSafe-RS ensures shutting down of plants (safety) as well as reducing the probability of stopping plant operation due to internal failures (low false trip rate or high availability). in the actual applications. a German certification organization.” is required as a safety measure to materialize this allowable safety. safety instrumented system contributes to the overall protection of personnel.6 Improved Security and Safety for Plants ProSafe-RS realizes the integrated safety solution with control system. As a result of these functions which provide improved plant safety. Integrated Safety Instrumented System for Processes Integration with Control System IEC 61508 standard for functional safety sets the guidelines for separation of functions of control system and safety system. However. operators often desire to use the same operational environments for both the control and the safety instrumented system. System Overview 1-8 1.” TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.” in which independent safety measures are in layer structure from outside (local area) to the subject “plant (factory). freedom from unacceptable risk. Acquisition of Certification Conforming to International Standard ProSafe-RS is a safety instrumented system conforming to the safety integrity level SIL3 as defined by IEC 61508.1. The concept of safety.

15. and the main equipment that CENTUM CS 3000 consists of. The system configuration diagram below shows representative devices in a basic CENTUM CS 3000 system. System Configuration This chapter introduces the CENTUM CS 3000 system configuration.2003-00 . Ethernet Enclosed display style console type HIS Open display style console type HIS Desktop type HIS ENG V net Compact FCS for RIO Compact FCS for FIO Subsystems Node Unit Standard FCS for FIO Standard FCS for RIO Process inputs and outputs F020001.ai Figure CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration (Basic) TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.2. System Configuration 2-1 2.

2.2006-00 . expandable system.ai Figure CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. NT supervisory computer Network General purpose PC Business information PC UNIX supervisory computer Ethernet ProSafe-RS ENG HIS CGW ENG ENG HIS HIS Exaopc PC for engineering SENG Public switched network CGW ICS V net SCS CENTUM CS APCS GSGW Compact FCS for RIO Compact FCS for FIO Standard Standard FCS FCS for FIO for RIO Migrated FCS Standard Standard FCS FCS for FIO for RIO Modbus CS FCS External Systems BCV V net CENTUM CS BCV HF bus CENTUM-XL BCV RL bus µXL BCV VL net CENTUM CS 1000 F020002. System Configuration 2-2 The figure below shows a large system linked to supervisory computers and previous CENTUM and μXL systems – illustrating that CENTUM CS 3000 is an open.

the configuration of which is selectable. System Configuration 2-3 2. and is ideal for communicating with subsystems.1 System Configuration – CENTUM CS 3000 Equipment The HIS is mainly used for operation and monitoring – it displays process variables. By having HIS operation and monitoring functions on the same PC. at which a general purpose PC is installed. By the difference of used I/O modules.2. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. messages. there are the standard model and the enhanced model. there are two models of the FCS. control parameters. Bus Converter (BCV) This links the V net system bus to another CENTUM CS 3000 domain or to an existing CENTUM or µXL system. There are two types of console type HISs: one is enclosed display style.15. • Desktop Type HIS This HIS uses a general purpose PC. Human Interface Station (HIS) Field Control Station (FCS) The FCS controls the plant. • Compact FCS for RIO This controller is usually installed near the equipment or process it controls. Engineering PC (ENG) This is the PC with engineering functions used to perform CENTUM CS 3000 system generation and maintenance management.2003-00 . In addition to the above models. you can use the test (control station emulation) functions to provide an efficient and easy-to-use engineering environment. which are compact and consist of various lineup such as the connector types and so forth. It also incorporates open interfaces so that supervisory computers can access trend data. and alarms necessary for users to quickly grasp the operating status of the plant. • Console Type HIS This is a new console type human interface station. • FCS for RIO This FCS uses the Remote I/O (RIO) modules. there is the Compact type FCS. and can even be the same PC as the HIS. According to the application capacity. which have many installation bases and M4 screw terminals to connect signal cables. namely the FCS for FIO and the FCS for RIO. • Compact FCS for FIO This is a compact FCS with I/O modules integrated into the Field Control Unit. and process data. It can be the same type of general-purpose PC as the HIS. the appearance of which is usual style. and another is open display style. According to the application capacity. there are the standard model and the enhanced model. • FCS for FIO This FCS uses the Fieldnetwork I/O (FIO) modules.

Exaopc This provides OPC Server functions to enable applications in a supervisory PC to access CENTUM CS 3000 data. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) ProSafe-RS is a dedicated system to prevent probability and spread of accidents when it is used as an interlock device. They can access the DCS via Exaopc or CGW. HIS. Safety Control Station (SCS) This is a safety controller that executes logics for systems including interlock. It uses OPC servers for subsystems. you can also link two CENTUM CS 3000 V nets in different places using a dedicated telephone line. SI bus is used as a (dual-redundant) bus connecting existing FCS I/O units to new FCS CPU. which can be connected to the V net just like a CENTUM CS 3000 system FCS. and replace the CPU nest with an KFCS.2006-00 . facilitating subsystem data acquisition and setting without creating specific communications programs. Business Information PCs and Supervisory Computers These can run MES and ERP integrated business management software. Migrated Field Control Station (RFCS2) You can leave the I/O cards and field wiring of a CENTUM-XL or CENTUM V system “as is”.27. test and maintenance functions to generate system and manage maintenance for safety control station (SCS). It provides a link between control layer and business data processing layer.2. Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (GSGW) GSGW is a PC connected to V net. Dual-redundant V net support is standard. System Configuration 2-4 Communications Gateway Unit (CGW) This links the V net control system bus to an Ethernet bus (to a supervisory computer system or general purpose personal computer). By CGW wide area communication function. Advanced Process Control Station (APCS) The Advanced Process Control Station (APCS) is a personal computer (PC) connected to the V net and applied to advanced process control and efficiency improvement. Safety Engineering PC (SENG) This is a component equipped with engineering. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. BCV and CGW. emergency shutdown system and fire and gas protection. V net The V net real-time control system bus links stations such as FCS. emergency shutdown and fire and gas protection.

Fieldbus The FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a multidrop digital communications bus for field instruments. It is also used for transferring data files to supervisory computers. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. and is expected to replace the conventional 4 to 20 mA analog interface.2006-00 . and for HIS data equalization.2. System Configuration 2-5 Ethernet Ethernet is used to link HIS. ENG and supervisory systems.

of stations that can be connected: 256 stations (max. System Configuration 2-6 2. You can use a Bus Converter to link CENTUM CS 3000 domains. 16 domains. HIS is limited to a maximum of 16 stations/domain. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.).000 tags (expansible up to 1.2006-00 .000. 64 stations per domain) – however. Ethernet HIS HIS HIS HIS with engineering functions CGW V net BCV BCV BCV V net KFCS KFCS FFCS V net LFCS LFCS SFCS HF bus XLFCS XLFCS HIS: KFCS: LFCS: FFCS: SFCS: BCV: CGW: XLFCS: Human Interface Station Standard FCS for FIO Standard FCS for RIO Compact FCS for FIO Compact FCS for RIO Bus Converter Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM-XL FCS F020201.2. When you reach the maximum of 64 stations in a domain. or link to previous systems (CENTUM CS. of tags that can be monitored: 100. CENTUM-XL. you can start a new domain and link the two domains using a Bus Converter. Support will be provided for integrating CS 3000 with previous systems.2 CENTUM CS 3000 is a flexible system that can handle everything from small to quite large systems. System Specifications System Scale The CENTUM CS 3000 system specifications are as shown below: • No. CENTUM CS 1000.ai Figure Example of Large System Configuration Domain A domain is a logical V net bus segment.000 tags) • No. µXL etc.

System Configuration 2-7 Migration from CENTUM CS 1000 to CS 3000 Easy engineering operation can migrate the existing CENTUM CS 1000 system to the CENTUM CS 3000 system. In that case.2006-00 . Single control bus is available when the CENTUM CS 3000 Entry class system is migrated from the CENTUM CS 1000 system.2. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Ethernet is not required. SEE ALSO Please refer to GS 33Q01B10-31E for whether the single control bus is allowed and whether Ethernet is required.

2. There are two types of console type HISes: one is enclosed display style console type HIS. The appearance of the console type HIS is shown below: Upper LCD (option) Touch panel (option) LCD General purpose PC Drawer Operation keyboard Engineering keyboard (general purpose PC keyboard) Mouse (general purpose PC mouse) Enclosed display style console assembly F020301. and a number of console type HISes can be installed in a row. It is a new type of human interface station that can utilize the latest PC technology while succeeding the operability and functionality of the DCS. System Configuration 2-8 2. eight-control-key operation keyboard. and auxiliary contact I/O. refer to GS 33Q02C10-31E.3 SEE Human Interface Station (HIS) HIS Function Specifications ALSO For the specifications of HIS functions.3. touch panel function.2006-00 .1 Console Type HIS The console type HIS is composed of a console assembly and a general purpose PC. It can be composed of dual stacked LCD. and another is open display style console type HIS. which is composed of LCD and the configuration of which is selectable.ai Figure Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. 2. the appearance of which is usual style.

Not available for HIS without LCD.2.2006-00 . RAS functions provided in connection with the incorporated PC. and RAS functions provided in connection with the incorporated PC. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.27. System Configuration Upper LCD (option) 2-9 Touch panel (option) LCD Operation keyboard (option) Drawer Engineering keyboard (general purpose PC keyboard) Mouse (general purpose PC mouse) General purpose PC Open Display Style Console Assembly F020303.ai Figure Open Display Style Console Type HIS with LCD Table Functions of Console Type HIS Enclosed Display Style Console Assembly Single LCD Display unit Dual stacked LCD Without LCD Touch panel RAS/Contact I/O For lower display unit For upper display unit RAS Contact I/O Eight-control-key operation keyboard (*3) One-control-key operation keyboard Without operation keyboard Drawer *1: *2: *3: Open Display Style Console Assembly Standard Option Standard Option No available Standard(*2) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Option No available Option Option Standard(*1) Standard Standard No available No available Standard Operation keyboard Monitoring functions of ventilation fan operations and temperatures of the enclosure.

Tuning keys System maintenance panel Operation confirmation keys Function keys (64) Mouse Data entry keys F020304. The keyboard is available in two types: one is designed for eight-control-key operation for use with console type HISes.3.2.2006-00 . which enables one-touch operation.3.3 Desktop Type HIS The Desktop Type HIS uses a general purpose IBM PC/AT compatible.ai Figure Eight-control-key Operation Keyboard TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.and drip-proof operation keyboard has functionally arranged flat keys. and another for one-control-key operation for use with both console type HISes and desktop type HISes.2 2. System Configuration 2-10 2. Operation Keyboard The dust.

2006-00 .ai Figure Operation Keys TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. System Configuration 2-11 F020305.ai Figure One-control-key Operation Keyboard Process Alarm window call Key Process overview call Key Tuning window call Key Graphic window call Key Trend window call Key Process Report window call Key Window erase Key Operator guide window call Key Control window call Key Help dialogue call Key Cursor Key Display Key System Key (calls System Status Overview Window) Navigator window call Key AUX Key Upper sibling window call Key Print screen Key Buzzer Stop Key Circulate Key Parent window Lower sibling window call Key call Key Alarmacknowledgment Key F020306.2.

the Standard Type Field Control Station for RIO (LFCS). V net Field Control Station (FCS) ESB bus Node interface unit I/O module Node Node I/O unit RIO bus Subsystem ER bus Subsystem FCS for FIO (KFCS. KFCS. KFCS2: FFCS: LFCS.ai Figure Field Control Station Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The FCU and the node are connected using RIO bus. the Enhanced Type Field Control Station for FIO (KFCS2).4 The hardware architecture of the Standard Type Field Control Station for FIO (KFCS). KFCS2) FCS for RIO (LFCS. System Configuration 2-12 2. and the Compact FCS (SFCS) is described below. The FCU and the I/O units are connected to the same backplate. An FCS in which the FCU and a node unit are combined.2006-00 . LFCS2: PFC-H/-S/-E: The Field Control Unit (FCU) and the node are connected using ESB(Extended Serial Backboard) or ER(Enhanced Remote) bus.2. LFCS2) I/O module I/O unit ER bus ESB bus Subsystem Subsystem Compact FCS for FIO (FFCS) Compact FCS for RIO (PFC-H/-S/-E) F020401. the Enhanced Type Field Control Station for RIO (LFCS2).

Single or dual redundant. cabinet mounting or rack mounting. Field Control Unit (FCU) The FCU consists of cards and units and executes control computation for the FCS. CPU architecture and mounting combinations are available for optimum selection. refer to GS 33Q03K30-31E.1 FCS for FIO (KFCS.2. Each FCS is configured as shown in the figure below. FFCS’s are rack-mounted only. refer to GS 33Q03K40-31E. FCS for FIO Application Capacities SEE ALSO • • • For the application capacity of Standard FCS for FIO. Power unit ESB bus master interface card Processor card V net coupler unit Battery unit ESB Bus MODEL AIP532 STYLE1 SI YOKOGAWA Battery unit CN1 MODEL AIP532 STYLE1 SI YOKOGAWA ESB Bus CN1 RCV SND-L SND-R RCV SND-L SND-R External interface unit Power distribution panel REVISION U H1 H2 REVISION U H1 H2 ESB bus coupler unit Fan unit Air filter Power input terminals F020402. System Configuration 2-13 2. KFCS2. Single or dual redundant. ER bus and node units. refer to GS 33Q03K31-31E. FFCS) The FCS for FIO is composed of an FCU.ai Figure Example of Rack Mounting Type FCU for FIO TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.2006-00 . battery units and ESB bus interface cards are dual redundant.4. ESB bus. and power units. For the application capacity of Compact FCS for FIO. the processor cards are duplexed. For the application capacity of Enhanced FCS for FIO. CPU architecture: Mounting: ESB bus: ER bus: Single or duplexed. FCU Configuration in KFCS and KFCS2 For the duplexed FCU. Note: One node unit is integrated into an FFCS.

power modules. System Configuration 2-14 FCU Configuration in FFCS For a duplexed FCU. If node units are added. and I/O modules are all dualredundant.2006-00 . install a bus interface module in an I/O module slot. Use two modules for dual-redundant use. I/O module Processor module Power module Base unit CN1 CN2 (CPU-L) CN3 (CPU-R) ENBL DSBL CN1 CN2 (CPU-L) CN3 (CPU-R) TM1 READY ENBL DSBL FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L) CN2 (PSU-R) Utility unit Cable tray V net coupler unit External interface unit F020416.2.ai Figure Example of Compact FCU Configuration for FIO TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. the processor modules.

ai Figure Example of Distributed Node Units (KFCS. The ER bus (Enhanced Remote bus) is a communication bus used in connecting the remote nodes with the FCU by way of the ER bus interface module installed on the local node (*1). Its maximum transmission distance is 185 meters using a Ethernet-compatible 10BASE-2 coaxial cable or 500 meters using a 10BASE-5 coaxial cable. the nodes can be installed in the same cabinet for FCU or at locations away from the cabinet. Maximum transmission distance is 10 meters. or up to 2 kilometers using general-purpose optical bus repeaters. System Configuration 2-15 ESB Bus and ER Bus The ESB bus (Extended Serial Backboard bus) is a communication bus used in connecting the local nodes. Using this bus.2. This bus can be dualredundant.2006-00 . ESB bus FCU Local node (ESB bus node unit) ER bus Central instrument room Optical bus repeater Remote node (ER bus node unit) Remote node (ER bus node unit) F020403. with the FCU. *1: A compact FCS for FIO allows the installation of an ER bus interface module in a node unit integrated into the FCU. which are installed in the same cabinet for FCU. KFCS2) TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. This bus can also be dual-redundant.

2006-00 . a compact FCS for FIO includes one node unit integrated into the FIO. and output analog and digital field signals. which is installed on the remote node. ER Bus Interface Module This module has an interface master module. System Configuration 2-16 Node Units (NU) for FIO The node units (NU) for FIO are signal processing units which convert and transmit analog or digital process I/O signals received from the field devices to the FCU for FIO. Note: A compact FCS for FIO allows the installation of an ER bus interface master module in a node unit integrated into the FCU. ER bus interface module is installed.ai Figure Local Node Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The node unit is composed of an ESB bus slave interface module or ER bus slave interface module and I/O modules. F020404. which is installed on the local node. and an interface slave module. In addition. on the plant-site.2. convert. Both modules can be dualredundant. The node units (NU) for FIO have ESB bus node units (local nodes) installed at the FCS station and ER bus node units (remote nodes) installed in cabinets and etc. ESB Bus Slave Interface Module This module is installed in the local node to enable communication with the FCU. I/O Module These modules input. The module can be duplexed. I/O module ESB bus interface master module Power module Cable tray Note: For remote node.

ai Figure Example of Mounting FCU and Node Unit using Dedicated Cabinet TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Up to 10 node units for FIO can be connected to the FCU of each standard FCS for FIO (up to 15 for each enhanced FCS for FIO). the FCU and some node units are mounted in a dedicated cabinet and the remaining node units are mounted in general-purpose racks on the plant-site. general-purpose racks or general-purpose cabinets.2006-00 . and up to 8 I/O modules can be installed in each node unit. Mounting and combinations of FCU and nodes are user definable. • FCU for FIO Dedicated Cabinet Front: Rear: Front: Rear: Front 1 FCU. 5 node units 4 node units 4 node units 4 node units Dedicated cabinet Rear General-purpose rack • I/O Expansion Cabinet F020405.2. System Configuration 2-17 Mounting of FCS for FIO Mounting of KFCS and KFCS2 The FCU and node units (NU) for FIO are mounted in a dedicated cabinet. For example.

adding to additional node units for FIO. *1: If node units (NUs) are added. Up to eight I/O modules (*1) can be mounted on a node unit integrated into the FCU. Up to 30 I/O modules can be mounted on an FCS. up to six I/O modules can be mounted on node units integrated into the FCU for installing communication modules for NU connection. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.2. Up to three node units (NUs) for FIO can be connected to an FCS. System Configuration 2-18 Mounting of FFCS An FCS on which FCUs and I/O modules are mounted can be mounted in a rack.2006-00 .

For the application capacity of Enhanced FCS for RIO. power unit.2. single or dual redundant. and cabinet or rack mounting options. LFCS2) For the FCS for RIO. cabinet mounting or rack mounting.4.ai Figure Example of Rack Mounting Type FCU for RIO Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. CPU redundancy: Mounting: RIO bus: single or duplexed (dual redundant). with the FCU connected by RIO bus to nodes. battery unit and RIO bus interface card are all dual redundant. there are FCU CPU redundancy and RIO bus redundancy options. the processor card. Field Control Unit (FCU) for RIO The FCU for RIO consists of processor. System Configuration 2-19 2. refer to GS 33Q03K11-31E.2006-00 . cards and units. Power supply unit RIO bus interface card Processor card V net coupler unit Battery unit Battery unit External interface unit Power distribution panel RIO bus coupler unit Fan unit Air filter Power I/O terminals F020406. refer to GS 33Q03K10-31E. FCS for RIO Application Capacity SEE ALSO • • For the application capacity of Standard FCS for RIO.2 FCS for RIO (LFCS. For the duplexed (dual-redundant) FCU.

2. System Configuration

2-20

RIO Bus
The Remote I/O bus (RIO bus) connects the FCU to I/O nodes, and can be dual redundant. I/O nodes do not need to be in the FCU cabinet, they can be mounted remotely. Shielded twisted pair cable is used for distances up to 750 m, and bus repeaters or optical fiber links can be used for longer distances – up to 20 km. Bus repeaters and optical fiber links can be mixed, up to four in total.

FCU Nodes mounted in cabinet Central instrument room 19-inch rack-mounting nodes RIO bus

Optical bus repeater 19-inch rack-mounting nodes

Bus repeater

19-inch rack-mounting nodes

19-inch rack-mounting nodes

F020407.ai

Figure Example of Distributed Nodes – Extending the RIO Bus

TI 33Q01B10-01E

June 30,2006-00

2. System Configuration

2-21

Nodes
Nodes consist of I/O Units, which interface with analog and digital field signals, and Node Interface Units which communicate via the RIO Bus with Field Control Units (FCU).

Node Interface Units (NIU)
Node Interface Units consist of RIO bus communication cards and power cards, both of which can be dual redundant.

I/O Units (IOU)
I/O Units consist of I/O Module Nests containing I/O Modules, which connect to the process.

Backplate RIO bus interface unit Power supply unit Node Interface Unit Mounted in Cabinet

I/O Module Nest I/O Unit I/O Module

I/O Module Nest I/O Unit I/O Module

F020408.ai

Figure Cabinet Mounting

TI 33Q01B10-01E

June 30,2006-00

2. System Configuration

2-22

I/O Module Nest I/O Module

I/O Unit

RIO Bus Interface Card Power Supply Unit Backplate

Rack Mounting Node Interface Unit

I/O Module Nest I/O Unit I/O Module

F020409.ai

Figure Example of Rack Mounting

TI 33Q01B10-01E

June 30,2006-00

2. System Configuration

2-23

Mounting of LFCS FCUs and Nodes
FCUs and nodes can be mounted in dedicated cabinets or in general-purpose 19-inch racks. FCUs and nodes can be mounted together or separate – you can mount some nodes in the same cabinet (or on the same rack) as the associated FCU, and some in racks in the field, if you wish. Each FCU can connect to up to eight nodes, and each Node Interface Unit (NIU) can connect to up to five I/O units.

Dedicated Cabinets
• Cabinets which contain FCUs Front: Back: Front: Back: One FCU, three nodes (with up to four I/O units in each node). Up to three nodes (with up to five I/O units in each node). Up to three nodes (with up to five I/O units in each node). Up to three nodes (with up to five I/O units in each node).
FCU NIU NIU

• I/O Expansion Cabinets

IOU

Nodes

IOU

NIU: Node Interface Unit IOU: I/O Unit [Front] [Rear]
F020410.ai

Figure Example of Cabinet with FCU
Nodes Nodes Mounted in 19-inch rack

[Front]

[Rear]

[Front]

[Rear]

[Front]

[Rear]
F020411.ai

Figure Examples of I/O Expansion Cabinets

TI 33Q01B10-01E

June 30,2006-00

2. System Configuration

2-24

Rack Mountable Node
Up to five I/O Units may be connected to one node; they may be mounted in the same generalpurpose 19-inch rack.

Rack-Mountable Node

F020412.ai

Figure Example of Rack-Mountable Node

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.27,2006-00

ai Figure Example of Compact FCS Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. refer to GS 33Q03K90-31E. refer to GS 33Q03K20-31E. Application Capacity of Compact FCS for RIO SEE ALSO For the Application Capacity of Compact FCS (PFC-H) for RIO.4.2. Configuration and Mounting of Compact FCS for RIO V net coupler units Processor units Battery units Power units Contact output unit Power distribution board I/O modules F020413. For the Application Capacity of Compact FCS (PFC-S/-E) for RIO. System Configuration 2-25 2.27.3 Compact FCS for RIO (PFC-H/-S/-E) Duplexed (dual redundancy) CPU is supported.2006-00 . Dual redundant power supplies are also available.

ai Figure Compact FCS with Two I/O Units Up to 5 I/O Units I/O Expansion Rack F020415.2006-00 . System Configuration 2-26 Mounting of I/O Units The compact FCS mounts in a general-purpose 19-inch rack.2. One FCS is connected to up to five I/O Units.ai Figure Compact FCS with Five I/O Units TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. I/O Module Nest Up to 2 I/O Units F020414.

Isolated) Analog Output Module (-10 V to +10 V. and the Remote I/O (RIO). Non-Isolated) Pulse Input/Analog Output Module for compatible PAC (Pulse Count Input. J. K.1 Fieldnetwork I/O (FIO) The FIO modules are used in the FCS for FIO. which convert the digital data to analog or contact signals. Non-Isolated) – – x – – x – – – – TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. the isolation types. K. T. Non-Isolated) Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA. HART protocol) AAV141 AAV142 Analog Input Module (1 to 5 V.5 This section describes input modules. Non-Isolated. to correspond flexibly to the applications. They are compact and consist of the lineup of abundant variety. Isolated Channels. Isolated) Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA. HART protocol) TC/mV Input Module (TC: JIS R. which have many installation bases. E. S. B. Isolated) Analog Input Module (-10 V to +10 V. Non-Isolated) Analog I/O Module (1 to 5 V Input. Isolated) TC/mV Input Module (TC: JIS R. Table List of KFCS I/O Modules (1/2) Connection Signal Name I/O channels per Module Pressure Clamp Terminal x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Yokogawaspecific Cable (*1) x x x x x x x x x x x x Model Analog I/O Modules MIL Cable AAI141-S Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA. HART protocol) AAI835-S Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA. 4 to 20 mA Output. 0 to 10 kHz. Non-Isolated) 16 16 16 16 8 input/8 output x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Analog I/O Module AAI841-S (4 to 20 mA Input.2. N /mV: -100 to 150 mV. which convert process signals to digital data format used in the FCS. Isolated Channels) AAI835-H AAT145 AAR145 AAP135 AAP149 AAP849 Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA. I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules 2. Non-Isolated) Analog Output Module (-10 V to +10 V. Isolated) RTD Input Module (RTD: JIS Pt100 ohm.5. For I/O modules. and so forth. N /mV: -100 to 150 mV. 4 to 20 mA Output. there are the Fieldnetwork I/O (FIO).2006-00 . 0 to 6 kHz. T. Isolated Channels. HART protocol) 8 input/8 output AAB841 AAV542 AAI143 AAI543 AAV144 AAV544 AAT141 AAR181 8 input/8 output 16 16 16 16 16 16 12 8 8 4 input/4 output 4 input/4 output 16 16 8 16 8 input/8 output – – x x x x x(*2) x(*2) x x(*2) x(*2) AAI135-S Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA. Isolated Channels) RTD/POT Input Module (RTD: JIS Pt100 ohm /POT: 0 to 10 kohm. Isolated Channels) Pulse Input Module for compatible PM1 (Pulse Count. Isolated) AAI841-H Analog I/O Module (4 to 20 mA. E. 4 to 20mA Output. such as the connector types. Non-Isolated) Analog Input Module (-10 V to +10 V. Isolated Channels) Analog Input Module AAI135-H (4 to 20 mA. System Configuration 2-27 2. Isolated Channels) Pulse Input Module (Pulse Count. which are compact and consist of various lineup. Non-Isolated. J. B. Non-Isolated) Analog Input Module AAI141-H (4 to 20 mA. and output modules. S.

Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only) Digital Input Module (24 V DC) Digital Output Module (24 V DC) Digital I/O Module for Compatible ST2 (Isolated Channels) Digital Input Module for Compatible ST3 (Isolated Channels) Digital Output Module for Compatible ST4 (Isolated Channels) Digital I/O Module for Compatible ST5 (Common Minus Side Every 16-Channel) Digital Input Module for Compatible ST6 (Common Minus Side Every 16-Channel) Digital Output Module for Compatible ST7 (Common Minus Side Every 16-Channel) RS-232C Communication Module (1200 bps to 115.2 kbps) RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module (1200 bps to 115. Cannot be connected.2006-00 . Pressure Clamp Terminal Support Only) Digital Output Module (24 V DC. without a terminal block.25 kbps) PROFIBUS-DPV1 Communication Module x: –: *1: *2: 2-28 List of KFCS I/O Modules (2/2) Connection Signal Name I/O channels Pressure per Module Clamp Terminal 32 32 16 16 32 32 64 64 16 16 input /16 output 32 32 32 input /32 output 64 64 x x x x x x – – x – – – – – – Yokogawaspecific Cable (*1) x x x(*2) x(*2) – – x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(*2) x(D-sub9 pin) (*2) x(M4 terminal block 5-pole) (*2) x(RJ-45) (*2) x(*2) x(*2) MIL Cable x x – – – – x x – – – – – – – ADR541 Relay Output Module (24 to 110 V DC/100 to 240 V AC) ADV859 ADV159 ADV559 ADV869 ADV169 ADV569 Communication Modules ALR111 ALR121 ALE111 ALF111 ALP111 2 port 2 port 1 port 4 port 1 port – – – x – – – – – – Can be connected. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Yokogawa-specific cable that connects I/O Module and a terminal board or the like.2 kbps) Ethernet Communication Module (10 Mbps) Foundation Fieldbus (FF-H1) Communication Module (31. System Configuration Table Mode Digital I/O Module ADV151 ADV551 ADV141 ADV142 ADV157 ADV557 ADV161 ADV561 Digital Input Module (24 V DC) Digital Output Module (24 V DC) Digital Input Module (100 V to 120 V AC) Digital Input Module (220 V to 240 V AC) Digital Input Module (24 V DC. Can be connected directly with Yokogawa-specific cable.2.

Pt1000. Pt100.2. N.2006-00 . T /mV: -100 V to 150 mV. Cannot be connected. J. Isolated) TC/mV Input Module (TC: B. -50 to 75 mV. Isolated) x: –: Can be connected. R. Pt500. K. E. 2-29 List of KFCS I/O Modules with Built-in Barrier Connection Signal Name I/O channels Pressure per Module Clamp Terminal 8 8 16 8 x x x x Yokogawaspecific Cable (*1) – – – – MIL Cable – – – – Digital I/O Modules ASD143 ASD533 16 8 x x – – – – TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Isolated) Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA. Isolated) Digital Output Module (U>12 V at I=45 mA. Pt200. System Configuration Table Model Analog I/O Modules ASI133 ASI533 AST143 ASR133 Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA. Ni120 /POT: 0 to 10 K ohm. Isolated) Digital Input Module (NAMUR compatible. Isolated) RTD/POT Input Module (RTD: Pt50. Ni100. Ni200. S.

refer to GS 33Q06Q50-31E Field Connection Specifications (for FIO).ai Figure Combination of I/O Modules and Terminal Blocks TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. terminal blocks and pin arrangement of MIL connector for I/O modules. MIL cable. System Configuration 2-30 Combination of I/O Modules and Terminal Blocks For connection between field devices and I/O modules. which is provided by user. SEE ALSO For pressure clamp terminals.2006-00 .2. Terminal block I/O module MIL connector Pressure clamp terminal KS cable interface adapter F020501. Combination of I/O modules and terminal blocks is shown below. is also available for the connection. KS cable interface adapter and pressure clamp terminal block can be used.

TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.2. can be connected directly to an analog or digital I/O module equipped with the pressure clamp terminal block. ATA4S-00 S1 F020502.2006-00 .ai Figure Field Wiring Using Pressure Clamp Terminals Field Wiring Using KS Cable Interface Adapter An analog or digital I/O module equipped with the KS cable interface adapter can be connected with the terminal board using the KS cable and field signal cables are connected to the terminal board with M4 screws. System Configuration 2-31 Field Wiring Using Pressure Clamp Terminals A field signal cable. with its end uncovered. Two to three signal cables can be connected for every I/O channel.

I/O Module Nests I/O Modules Nests are available in the following types: • AMN11: • AMN12: • AMN21: • AMN31: • AMN32: • AMN33: • AMN34: • AMN51: • AMN52: Nest for Analog I/O Modules (AMN11. and designed basically by the isolated channels and M4 screw connections.2006-00 . AMN12) Nest for Analog I/O Modules High-Speed Nest for Analog I/O Modules (for LFCS only) Nest for Relay I/O Modules Nest for Terminal-type I/O Modules Nest for Connector-type I/O Modules Nest for Communication Modules Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules Nest for Communication Cards and Ethernet Communication Modules (for Compact FCS only) Nest for Profibus Communication Module (in Compact FCS only) Nest for Relay I/O Modules (AMN21) Nest for Terminal-type I/O Modules (AMN31) Nest for Connector-type I/O Modules (AMN32) Analog I/O Module Relay I/O Module Multiplexer Modules or Digital I/O Modules (Terminal Type) Nest for Communication Cards and Ethernet Communication Modules (AMN51) Multiplexer Modules or Digital I/O Modules (Connector Type) Nest for Profibus Communication Modules (AMN52) Nest for Communication Modules (AMN33) Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules (AMN34) Communication Modules Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules Communication Cards Profibus Communication Modules F020503.2. The RIO modules are installed in the I/O module nests.ai Figure I/O Module Nest Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. System Configuration 2-32 2. They are field-proven by the many installation bases.5.2 Remote I/O (RIO) The RIO modules are used in the FCS for RIO and Compact FCS.

Terminal Type. Connector Type) RS-232C Communication Module RS-422/RS-485 Communication Module Fieldbus Communication Module RS-232C General-purpose Communication Card RS-422/RS-485 General-purpose Communication Card Ethernet Communication Module (for PFC) Profibus Communication Module I/O Points Per Module 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 input/8 output 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 15 16 16 16 15 16 16 16 32 16 32 16 32 16 32 1ch 1ch 1ch 1ch 1ch 1ch 1ch Terminals Connector Terminals RJ-45 (10BASE-T) Connector D-Sub 9 pin Connector June 30. Terminal Type) Contact Input Module (16 Points. Connector Type) Contact Input Module (32 Points. conforms to IEC584-1995) RTD Input Multiplexer Module (16 Points. Thermocouple and RTD Input Module (conforms to IEC584-1995. A list of I/O Modules is shown below: Table Signal Type List of I/O Modules Model AAM10 AAM11 AAM11B AAM21 Module Type Current/Voltage Input Module (Simplified Type) Current/Voltage Input Module Current/Voltage Input Module (supports BRAIN) mV. Connector Type) Contact Output Module (32 Points. Connector Type) mV Input Multiplexer Module with Thermocouple Interface (15 Points. Terminal Type) Contact Output Module (16 Points. Connector Type) Contact Output Module (16 Points.2. Terminal Type) Contact Input Module (32 Points. Output modules convert the digital data format used in the FCS to analog or contact signals. conforms to IEC751-1995) Contact Input Module (16 Points. RJC Input port added) RTD Input Multiplexer Module (16 Points. Terminal Type) Contact Output Module (32 Points. conforms to IEC751-1995) mV Input Multiplexer Module Voltage Input Multiplexer Module mV Input Multiplexer Module (16 Points. Connector Type. Terminal Type. Thermocouple.2006-00 Signal Connection Analog I/O Modules AAM21J APM11 AAM50 AAM51 AMC80 Terminals Connector Relay I/O Modules ADM15R ADM55R AMM12T AMM22T AMM32T AMM42T AMM52T AMM22TJ Terminals Multiplexer Modules AMM32TJ AMM22M AMM12C AMM22C AMM25C AMM32C AMM32CJ ADM11T ADM12T ADM51T Connector Terminals Digital I/O Modules ADM52T ADM11C ADM12C ADM51C ADM52C Connector ACM11 Communication ACM12 Modules ACF11 ACM21 ACM22 Communication ACM71 Cards ACP71 TI 33Q01B10-01E . and RTD Input Module mV. Connector Type) RTD Input Multiplexer Module (16 Points. IEC751-1995) Pulse Input Module Current Output Module Current/Voltage Output Module Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module Relay Input Module Relay Output Module Voltage Input Multiplexer Module Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module RTD Input Multiplexer Module 2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Module Current Output Multiplexer Module Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module (16 Points. System Configuration 2-33 I/O Modules Input modules convert process signals to the digital data format used in the FCS. Connector Type.

System Configuration 2-34 Analog I/O Module An analog I/O module is installed in Model AMN11. two signal cables or three (for RTD) are connected.2. AMN11 Signal cables Analog I/O modules (Slots 1 to 16) Temperature compensating module slots I/O channels 1 2 A B C 1 2 I/O channels 16 16 Terminals Analog I/O modules Terminals Temperature compensating module slots AMN11 Recorder output connector CN1 F020504. Signal cables are connected by M4 screws to the terminals of analog I/O module nest. For each I/O channel.2006-00 . Up to 16 I/O modules are installed in one nest.ai Figure Analog I/O Module Nest Analog I/O Modules Module Terminals Current/voltage input Current/voltage output F020508. Nest for Analog I/O modules.ai Figure Analog I/O Module and Nest TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

AMN31 Digital I/O Module Signal cables I/O channels Not used 1 + 2 + - B A B A Not used 1 2 16 + - 16 I/O contact points Terminals F020505.2.2006-00 .ai Figure Digital I/O Module (16-terminal type) TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. System Configuration 2-35 Terminal Type Digital I/O Module Up to two terminal type digital I/O modules can be installed in one Model AMN31 Nest for Terminal-type I/O Modules. one or two signal cables are connected. For each I/O channel. Signal cables are connected by M4 screws to the terminals of modules.

Up to four modules are installable in one nest.2. a KS2 cable is used for ADM11C and ADM51C 16-point modules and a KS9 cable for ADM12C and ADM52C 32-point modules. To connect to the MUB/MUD Terminal Board or TE16/TE32 Terminal Block.2006-00 . One or two signal cables are connected to each I/O channel.ai Figure Connector Type Digital I/O Module TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. AMN32 Digital I/O Module Shield 1 2 3 4 Connector KS2 cable (16 points) KS9 cable (32 points) MUB or TE16 CN1 CN1 13 15 17 9 19 7 1 3 5 11 2 14 16 18 4 8 6 12 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 MUD or TE32 1A 3 1B 2A 3 2B 3A 3 3B 4A 3 4B 5A 3 5B 6A 3 6B 7A 3 7B 8A 3 8B 9A 3 10A 9B 10B 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 F020506. System Configuration 2-36 Connector Type Digital I/O Module The Connector Type Digital I/O Module is installed in the Nest for Connector-type I/O Modules (AMN32). Signal cables from field devices are connected by M4 screws to the terminal board or terminal block.

ai Figure Multipoint Analog Control I/O Module TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. cost per point is less these for multipoint modules. Up to two modules are installable in one nest. AMN34 KS1 cable KS1 cable MHM Signal Conditioner Nest F020507. A KS1 cable connects the module to the MHM Signal Conditioner Nest. One module can process 8 inputs and outputs for control.2. Compared with analog I/O modules. System Configuration 2-37 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module AMC80 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module is installed in the Nest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Modules (AMN34). Two modules installed in one nest may separately process different inputs and outputs or be dual-redundant.2006-00 .

Using a KS2 cable (or a KU2 cable). MUB/MUD Terminal Board or TE16/TE32 Terminal Block. Relay I/O Module The relay I/O module is installed in the Nest for Relay I/O Modules (AMN21). connect it to Signal Conditioner Nest. Two or three signal cables are connected for each I/O channel. Connector Type Multiplexer Module The connector type multiplexer module is installed in the Nest for Connector-type I/O Modules (AMN32).2006-00 . Only one module is installable in one nest. Connect signal wiring from the field to the terminals of the terminal board or the terminal block with M4 screws. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Signal cables are connected by M4 screws to the terminals of the module. Two or three signal cables are connected for each I/O channel.2. Up to two modules can be installed in one nest. System Configuration 2-38 Terminal Type Multiplexer Module The terminal type multiplexer module is installed in the Nest for Terminal-type I/O Modules (AMN31). Up to four modules can be installed in one nest. Signal cables are connected to the terminals of the module with M4 screws.

2006-00 . Ethernet HIS ENG/ HIS Networks HIS V net FCS FCS FCS F020601.2. System Configuration 2-39 2.6 CENTUM CS 3000 can be connected to V net and Ethernet networks.ai Figure Two Types of Networks TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

0. YCB111 cable and YCB141 cable can be connected by cable converter unit or bus repeater. FCS other than FFCS.5 km F020602. then the above equation becomes: Effective length = 5 m (YCB141 cable length) + 450 m (YCB111 cable length) x 0. 0.4 = 5 m + 180 m = 185 m So the condition that the total length of YCB141 should not exceed 185 m is satisfied. When these cable types are combined.g. Bus repeaters and optical repeater pairs can be mixed.4 ≤ 185 m For example. It can be dual redundant. CGW). Length up to 500 m. HIS Optical fiber Bus repeater V net Optical bus repeater Optical bus repeater Cable converter unit Optical fiber link FCS FCS Calculated as described above (for mixed cable types) FCS Max. eliminating the load on the V net.2. HIS. The Ethernet can also be used for sending trend data files from the HIS to supervisory computers. Extending the V net When the V net is extended. Length up to 185 m. maximum length is computed as follows: YCB141 cable length + YCB111 cable length x 0. Field Control Stations distributed around a large plant can be monitored from HIS in a central control room.6. to extend the V net up to 20 km. with engineering functions installed.2006-00 . 15 km Max. BCV and CGW. up to four sets in total. for equalizing HIS databases and for acquiring trend date for other stations. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. A system with only a single HIS. supervisory computers CENTUM and personal computers on the Ethernet LAN can access messages and trend data in the CENTUM CS 3000 system. Connects HIS and FFCS.2 Ethernet HIS and ENG.6. if YCB141 = 5 m and YCB111 = 450 m. does not need Ethernet – but in general Ethernet (and corresponding network engineering) is required.5 km Max. System Configuration 2-40 2.ai Figure Extending the V net 2. HIS and supervisory systems can be connected by an Ethernet LAN.1 V net V net is a 10 Mbps real-time control bus which links stations such as FCS. There are two types of cable: • YCB111 cable: • YCB141 cable: Connects station other than HIS and FFCS (e.

Office Automation (OA) systems. • Interoperability enables devices from different manufacturers to be combined. and analyzers can be integrated.2006-00 . • Various systems such as instrumentation. electrical. • Some adjustments and inspections of field devices can be performed from a remote location. so that function block parameters of field devices can be also transmitted. Fieldbus is a big innovation in process control systems technology and is expected to replace the standard 4 to 20 mA analog communication protocol that most current field devices employ. • A digital transmission protocol is used. System Configuration 2-41 2. • High-accuracy information processing allows strict quality control. refer to the Fieldbus Technical Information (TI 38K03A01-01E).7 Fieldbus is a bidirectional digital communication protocol for field devices. Factory Automation (FA). Business Automation (BA). like the instrument room. Fieldbus has the following features.2. Fieldbus SEE ALSO For more details on the fieldbus. ensuring high-accuracy information processing. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. • Multiplex transmission is supported. • Communication between field devices allows autonomous distributed control by the field devices. • A broad choice of devices from many manufacturers allows you to configure the optimum system for your needs.

ai Figure Example of System Configuration with Fieldbus (FCS for FIO) Note: The ESB bus interface module model for a compact FCS for FIO is EC401.2006-00 .2. Only the module model is different. System Configuration 2-42 Fieldbus Connection (FCS for FIO) HIS Operation and monitoring functions Engineering functions (system generation) V net HIS FCU SB401 EB401 EB501 ALF111 ACB41 : Human Interface Station : Field Control Unit : ESB Bus Interface (I/O nest side) : ER Bus Interface (FCS side) : ER Bus Interface (remote node side) : Fieldbus Communication Module for FIO : I/O Expansion Cabinet ALF111 ALF111 (active) (standby) H1 Fieldbus Intrinsic safety barrier / arrester (option) Fieldbus power supply FCS for FIO FCU ESB bus EB401 SB401 dual dual redundant redundant Terminator option or integrated Local node Terminator (option) ER bus ACB41 ALF111 ALF111 (active) (standby) H1 Fieldbus Intrinsic safety barrier / arrester (option) Fieldbus power supply EB501 dual redundant Terminator option or integrated Remote node Terminator (option) F020701. and a Fieldbus connection is made in the same way. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

2006-00 .2. Compact FCS for RIO) TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.ai Figure Example of System Configuration with Fieldbus (FCS for RIO. System Configuration 2-43 Fieldbus Connection (FCS for RIO. Compact FCS for RIO) Ethernet HIS Operation and monitoring functions Engineering functions (system generation) Fieldbus tools: Engineering Tool. Device Management Tool V net FCS for RIO Compact FCS RIO bus NIU ACF11 External power supply (optional) ACF11 Fieldbus Intrinsic safety barrier / arrester (optional) Terminator Terminator (optional) HIS: RIO bus: NIU: ACF11: Coupler Fieldbus Coupler Human Interface Station Remote I/O bus Node Interface Unit Fieldbus Communication Module Field devices F020702.

8 The FCS connects directly to the process.1 Redundancy and Reliability of the FCS for FIO. FCS for RIO and compact FCS for RIO. FCS for RIO For the FCS for FIO and FCS for RIO.ai Figure Duplexed (Dual-redundant) Processor Card in Standard FCS (FCS for FIO. bus interface cards.2006-00 . the processor cards are duplexed (dual redundant) and V net couplers. so it needs to have particularly high reliability (high availability). bus couplers and node internal buses are dual redundant. The duplexed (dual-redundant) processor cards (one active. power supply cards. the other standby) can switch from active to standby card without any interruption to control when active card breaking down. FCS for RIO) Note: In the case of the FCS for RIO. System Configuration 2-44 2. This section describes the redundancy and reliability of the FCS for FIO.2. compact FCS for FIO. V net 1 V net 2 < Left processor card > V net interface CPU1 Comparator CPU2 EN bus interface CPU2 EN bus interface V net interface CPU1 Comparator < Right processor card > Main memory (with ECC) Main memory (with ECC) ESB bus I/F ESB bus I/F ESB bus ECC : Error-Correcting Code F020801. the dual redundant models are available. A model with dual (redundant) power supplies is also available. The FCS for FIO is equipped with ESB bus interface cards and couplers for its nodes. Redundancy and Reliability 2. RIO bus interface and RIO bus are used in place of ESB bus interface and ESB bus shown above. In these dual redundant FCS. and data accuracy and reliability need to be assured. and the FCS for RIO with RIO bus interface cards and couplers. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.8.

if an abnormality is detected in one bus then the other is used. The I/O module bus from the Node Interface Module to each I/O Module can also be dual redundant. and performs only diagnostic communications. The main memory uses ECC (error-correcting code) which can correct transient reversed-bit errors. The SB301 in the active status. • A Watch Dog Timer is used to detect if the active processor card is abnormal. The I/O module bus from the Node Interface Unit to each I/O unit can also be dual redundant. if the hardware is not abnormal. The standby side “sleeps”. if an abnormality is detected in one bus then the other is used. CPU • There are two processors on each processor card. System Configuration 2-45 Dual-redundancy methodology is described below. the active (on-line) CPU card controls which is active (normally the one on the same side as the active CPU). ESB Bus Two ESB bus interface cards (SB301) can be installed in the FCU to form dual redundant system. which is the ESB bus master. and the results are compared each calculation. The abnormal bus is tested periodically to see if it has returned to normal.2006-00 . and when it is switched to active status then the results it has just computed are transferred to the bus interface there is no interruption in control. Normally the card on the active CPU side is given the active status and the other card the standby status. Each CPU performs the same control computations. The abnormal bus is tested periodically to see if it has returned to normal. • The V net and V net interface are dual redundant.2. RIO Buses Dual-redundant (RB301) RIO bus interface cards can be installed in the FCU. communicates with node units. then the comparator takes this as “CPU abnormal”. Dual-redundant RIO buses are used alternately. which results in a switch from active to standby processor card. • The standby processor card is performing the same computations as the active card. the Node Interface Card and the Node Power Supply can be dual redundant. The dual redundant ESB buses are used alternately. then the card is assumed to be normal and the results are transmitted to memory and bus interface card. • If a “CPU abnormal” error is detected in a CPU card. If the results agree. the Node Interface Module and Node Power Module can be dual redundant. then the error is treated as a transient error and the card reverts from “abnormal” to “standby” status. • If the results from CPU1 and CPU2 do not agree. The two cards are controlled by software residing in the active CPU to determine their active and standby status. and switches to the standby processor card. RIO Nodes In nodes. FIO Nodes In nodes. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. a self-diagnostic check is performed on the card.

the control right can be switched without any interruption in control. install an ESB-bus coupler module or an ER bus interface module.2. a duplexed (dual-redundant) FCS is provided. V net < Left processor module > V net interface CPU1 Comparator CPU2 SEN bus interface CPU2 V net interface CPU1 < Right processor module > Main memory (with ECC) Comparator Main memory (with ECC) SEN bus interface ESB bus interface ESB bus interface ECC: Error-Correcting Code F020803. and power module are all dual-redundant. (For a duplexed FCS. the processor module.2006-00 . If an FIO node unit is added.2 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for FIO For a compact FCS for FIO. the ESB bus interface modules need to be dual-redundant. Dual-redundant use in either module is also possible. V net coupler. System Configuration 2-46 2.ai Figure Example of Duplexed (Dual-redundant) Processor Module Configuration (in Compact FCS for FIO) TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.8.) Even if one side of the module becomes defective. For this FCS.

2. and when it is switched to active status then the results it has just computed are transferred to the bus interface there is no interruption in control. then the comparator takes this as “CPU abnormal”. System Configuration 2-47 Dual-redundancy methodology is described below. the ESB-bus interface functions on the active CPU side are given the active status and on the other side. The abnormal bus is tested periodically to see if it reverts to normal. • If a “CPU abnormal” error is detected in a CPU module. An active ESB-bus interface function. and switches to the standby processor module. refer to Section 2. then the error is treated as a transient error and the module reverts from “abnormal” to “standby” status. The main memory uses ECC (error-correcting code) which can correct transient reversed-bit errors. • The V net and V net interface are dual redundant. which results in a switch from active to standby processor module. Each CPU performs the same control computations. FIO Nodes For FIO nodes. the other bus will then be used for communication. if an abnormality is found in one bus. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. and the results are compared each calculation. The dual-redundant ESB buses are used alternately. ESB Bus Each processor module incorporates ESB-bus interface functions and can be dual-redundant. if the hardware is not abnormal.8. • The standby processor module is performing the same computations as the active module. then the module is assumed to be normal and the results are transmitted to memory and bus interface module. the standby CPU side is switched into use. • A Watch Dog Timer is used to detect if the active processor module is abnormal. If the results agree. CPU • There are two processors on each processor module. • If the results from CPU1 and CPU2 do not agree. the standby status.2006-00 . a self-diagnostic check is performed on the module. which is an ESB bus master.1. Normally. If an abnormality is found in the ESB functions on the active CPU side. communicates with node units.

and switchover from active to standby causes no interruption in control. V net 1 V net 2 < Left processor card > < Right processor card > Main memory (with ECC) V net interface CPU V net interface CPU Main memory (with ECC) EN bus interface EN bus interface PIO bus interface PIO bus interface ECC: Error-Correcting Code F020802. System Configuration 2-48 2. and the corresponding CPU is stopped.2.8. V net coupler. the other standby) can switch from active to standby card without any interruption to control. • Each CPU performs I/O via a PIO (Process I/O) interface card. power supply card. switchover from active to standby causes no interruption in control. the standby side is switched into use. Both the active and standby sides check that the PIO bus interface is normal.2006-00 . for automatic correction of transient bit errors. the invalid data is not used. and dual-redundant V net buses.3 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for RIO For the Compact FCS. and process I/O interface are all dual redundant. the processor card. • A Watch Dog Timer is used to detect if the active processor card is abnormal. • If an invalid (active or standby) CPU memory access is detected. ECC main memory is used.ai Figure Compact FCS Duplexed (Dual-redundant) Processor Card Configuration • The duplexed (dual-redundant) processor cards (active and standby) perform control computations in sync. which results in a switch from active to standby processor card. The duplexed (dual-redundant) processor cards (one active. If the error occurs in the active CPU. • There are dual-redundant V net interfaces. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. If an abnormality is detected in the active side.

or the value changes to a preset value (as set in the builder). It resumes to output the real output value upon recovery from CPU operation termination.2. When “Retain current value” is set for output fallback condition.2006-00 .ai Figure I/O Module Fallback TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. then after four seconds the output of the I/O module falls back: the current value is held.9 If the CPU fails and access to the I/O module stops. F020901. System Configuration 2-49 2. Module output signal level When “Output value” is set for output fallback condition. or if the WatchDog Timer (WDT) times out. This fallback action is illustrated below: CPU fail or WDT time up CPU operating status CPU Failure 4 sec.

C-Tick Mark Compliance (Electrical and electronic equipment without C-Tick mark can’t be sold in Australia and New Zealand) The C-Tick mark indicates EMC compliance in Australia and New Zealand. • EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive All electrical and electronic equipment must satisfy this directive.e. JIS C 0508).10 Compliance with Various Standards • For 100 to 120 V: CSA standard C22.1 • For 220 to 240 V: EN standard EN 61010-1 Safety Standard Compliance CENTUM CS 3000 complys with the following international safety standards: CE Mark Compliance (Electrical and electronic equipment without CE mark approval can’t be sold in Europe) CE mark compliance requires that EMC and LVD directives be satisfied. and immunity (ability to function under electromagnetic fields without deteriorating quality) is specified in EN 61000-6-2. it corresponds the CE mark used in Europe. (*2) *1: *2: Chapter 7 of this manual (Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS)) uses IEC 61508 to represent all applicable functional safety standards. Application Standards ProSafe-RS conforms to EN 298. • LVD (Low Voltage Directive (General Safety)) This applies to equipment that operates from an AC voltage source in the range 50 to 1000 V or a DC voltage source in the range 75 to 1500 V.00..2007-00 . TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. System Configuration 2-50 2. NFPA 85.2. i. Restrictions are specified in EN 61010-1. The C-Tick mark EMC specifications are equivalent to the CE mark specifications. IEC 61508.14. Restrictions on electromagnetic interference (electromagnetic fields which affect the functions of the electrical or electronic equipment) are specified in EN 55011 Group 1 Class A. (*1) Programmable Controller Standards ProSafe-RS conforms to IEC 61131-2 and EN 61131-2.2 No. EN 54-2. NSPA 72 and IEC 61511 (EN 61511). EN 61000-3-2 and EN 61000-3-3. 1010. IEC 61511 is equivalent to the US functional safety standard ISA S84. Functional Safety Standards ProSafe-RS conforms to IEC 61508 (EN 61508. EN 50156-1. EN 61508 and JIS C 0508.01. and is intended to insure operator safety.

refer to General Specification for ProSafe-RS. refer to General Specification for ProSafe-RS.14.03.2. Standards for Hazardous Location Equipment For ProSafe-RS Standards for Hazardous Location Equipment FM Non-Incendive and devices complying with Type “n”. Marine Standards (*2) ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) BV (Bureau Veritas) Lloyd’s Register *2: Supported by ProSafe-RS R1. For details. Overview • FBD: Function Block Diagram • LD: Ladder Diagram • ST: Structured Text • SFC: Sequential Function Chart *1: Supported by ProSafe-RS R1.00 or later. LD. System Configuration 2-51 Programming Language Standard ProSafe-RS conforms to FBD. SIL3 Certification Acquired from TÜV ProSafe-RS has acquired certifications from the independent German certification body TÜV (Technische Üeberwachungs Verein) as a safety instrumented system which can be applied up to SIL3 (SIL: Safety Integrity Level) as defined by IEC 61508.2007-00 . ST (*1) and SFC (*1) of IEC61131-3. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.01 or later.

11.2 System Clock and VEHICLE Clock For the stations in a domain. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Since the time master station is automatically assigned. In one domain. All the VEHICLE clocks in other stations will correct the time based on the reference time sent from the time master. System Configuration 2-52 2.1 Time Synchronization Scheme Besides the system clocks. Time Management 2. there is a time master station.11. user does not need to know the whereabouts of the time master station.2. Ethernet ENG System Clock HIS(Time Master Station) System Clock HIS System Clock VEHICLE Clock VEHICLE Clock VEHICLE Clock Time Synchronization Service V net FCS Time Synchronization BCV System Clock Time Notification V net VEHICLE Clock F021101.2006-00 . the time of the VEHICLE clock takes higher priority.ai Figure Time Synchronization Scheme 2. the stations on V net also have VEHICLE clock which is a V net firmware clock.27.11 CENTUM CS 3000 has a capability to synchronize the time of stations within a domain. All stations check the discrepancies of the system clocks and VEHICLE clocks. The reference time is broadcasted from the time master station periodically on the network (per 10 seconds). The accuracy of the VEHICLE clock is ±240 seconds per month. All the VEHICLE clocks in the same domain are managed together so as to keep the same clock time. and adjust the clock in accordance with the time of VEHICLE clocks.

• The time synchronization service adjusts the time discrepancy of the HIS’s system clock and its VEHICLE clock so that the time discrepancy is no greater than 500 milliseconds. the station adjusts its VEHICLE clock. if the time master station fails.11. 2. this HIS will become the time master station. the time discrepancy between stations is as shown below: Between HISs: 1010 milliseconds maximum Between HIS and FCS: 560 milliseconds maximum Between FCSs: 110 milliseconds maximum 2. System Configuration 2-53 2. It is necessary to adjust the VEHICLE time on the Time Setting dialog box. the clock will not be adjusted at once but smoothly tuned only in 0. See Section 3. User does not need to know which one had become the time master station.005 ms (0. If a VEHICLE clock in a HIS is manually adjusted. the clock will be adjusted drastically to the reference time. Smoothly Synchronize When a station receives the time synchronization signal and the time discrepancy is less than one second. another HIS will automatically take over.27.5 for details of the Time Setting dialog box.4 Time Discrepancy It takes the times shown below for the time master station to generate the time notification signal.5 Cautions In a control system. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.11.3 Time Adjustment When a station receives the time synchronization signal.2. ENG or FCS) and the other.5. depending on the degree of discrepancy.11. thereby causing a time discrepancy between one station (HIS. the first HIS that completed startup will automatically become the time master station. Using the Control panel to change the system time will be meaningless. • It takes maximum 50 milliseconds for synchronization of dual-redundant FCSs. • A maximum of a 5-millisecond discrepancy in the time of the VEHICLE clock is generated between stations. Drastically Synchronize When a station receives the time synchronization signal and the time discrepancy is greater than one second. The time of VEHICLE clock in a HIS is the reference time of the HIS. and for the slave stations to receive that signal.05%) at 10 ms interval. in order to adjust the time to that of the time maser station. In a steady-state manner.2006-00 . In any case.

time notification and time synchronization. Time Notification BCV passes the time adjustment information from one domain to the other. 2. The time of one domain is used as reference time. Thus manually adjust the system clock.ai Figure BCV Time Synchronization Scheme TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.2006-00 . Time Synchronization Between Domains BCV periodically scans the time differences between the linked domains per two minutes. System Configuration 2-54 2. the bus converter (BCV) placed to link the domains has time synchronization capability to synchronize the clocks of the multiple domains. when the time difference of the other domain is greater than 5 seconds and continued for consecutive two scans.7 Time Synchronization in Different Domains In a CENTUM CS 3000 control system that contains multiple domains.2. The time synchronization performed by BCV consists of the two actions.27. When a clock of a HIS in a domain is adjusted on time setting dialog box. HIS Reference Time HIS Reference Time V net BCV Time Notification BCV V net Time Synchronization V net Adjusted Time Time Notification V net Adjusted Time HIS HIS Time Notification Time Synchronization F021102. BCV synchronizes the clocks of the domains according to the reference time.11. BCV will notify the new time to all the other domains.6 Time Synchronization of the Stations Not Connected on V net Time synchronization of the stations not connected on V net cannot be performed automatically.11.

2006-00 . [Transfer Upper] is checked Lower domain has reference time. System Configuration 2-55 BCV Settings With two option boxes on BCV builder. Lower domain clock should be adjusted. However. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 No option is checked No time synchronization between domains.2. which domain’s time is reference time and which direction the time notification to be performed can be defined for 4 patterns of BCV behavior. Upper domain clock should adjusted. Both [Transfer Upper] and [Transfer Lower] are checked Pattern 4 Time notification is sent in both directions when either an upper domain clock or lower domain clock is manually adjusted. [Transfer Lower] is checked Upper domain has reference time. upper domain time is the reference time for time synchronization.

Multi-monitor Function The multi-monitor function enables one general purpose PC to use two monitors. Open Display Style Console Type HIS The Open Display Style Console Type HIS is composed of a console assembly and a general purpose PC. Since a general purpose PC (IBM PC/AT Compatible) is used. open software interface OPC (OLE for Process Control) is supported. and auxiliary contact I/O while succeeding the operability of the existing humanmachine interface. touch panel function. As the options.2003-00 . but can also run office applications on it to write reports and memos. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. CPU and memory prices are falling. It is composed of LCD. One-touch Multi-window Display Functions Multiple windows (related windows) can be displayed simultaneously. eight-controlkey operation keyboard. CPU and network speeds are increasing. eight-control-key operation keyboard. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-1 3. and to analyze process data. you can incorporate the latest hardware in your system. It is a new type of human interface station. touch panel function. High-speed Data Update Data acquisition functions allow display updating as fast as 1 sec. It is a new type of human interface station. Not only CENTUM CS 3000 HIS software but also general Windows application software (such as Microsoft Excel) can be run on the machine. Operation and Monitoring Functions The HIS software runs on a Windows based general purpose PC. Windows-Based Open Interface Support for Latest PC Hardware Personal computer (PC) technology is progressing very quickly. It can be composed of dual stacked LCD.3. You can use the operator station not just for operating. dynamic window set functions allow you to register a group of windows and display them with the touch of a key.15. and auxiliary contact I/O can be selected. dual stacked LCD. In addition. Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS The Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS is composed of a console assembly and a general purpose PC. so that its configuration is selectable. permitting to display more information. This level of performance is required for manual control of pressure and flow.

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-2 3.1 The configuration of operation and monitoring functions is shown below Operation and Monitoring Functions Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions System Maintenance Functions System Status Overview Window System Alarm Window FCS Status Display Window BCV Status Display Window HIS Setup Window Time Setting Dialog Help Dialog Common Functions Calling up Windows Operation Screen Mode System Message Window Window Hierarchy Navigator Window Panel Set Dynamic Window Set Circulate Function Alarm-Processing Functions Print Screen Functions Operation and Monitoring Windows Control Status Display Windows Control Drawing Window Sequence Table Window Logic Chart Window SEBOL Window SFC Window Graphic Window Tuning Window Trend Window Process Alarm Window Operator Guide Window Message Monitoring Window Graphic Objects Control Objects Overview Objects Trend Function Trends Tuning Trend Displaying Trends from Other Stations Long-term Data Archive Functions External Recorder Output Functions Expert Trend Viewer Function Operation and Monitoring Support Functions Process Report Functions Historical Message Report Functions Security Functions Report Functions Connecting ITV Cameras CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization Voice Messaging Functions Multi-monitor Functions Advanced Alarm Filter Functions Remote Desktop Function Open Interfaces FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Functions Serve for Remote Operation and Monitoring Functions Web Monitoring Functions Configured Information Reference Functions Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA) System Integration OPC Station (SIOS) Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal (VTSPortal) Consolidated Alarm Management Software for Human Interface Station (CAMS for HIS) F030101.2006-00 .ai Figure Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.27.

Using Operator Keyboard to Call up Windows You can call various types of windows using the dedicate window-call keys on the operation keyboard. Window call keys F030201.2003-00 . or the operator keyboard to call up windows. Using a Mouse or Similar Pointing Device to Call up Windows You can call various types of windows using the window menu in the system message window.2. (The same icons are used on the dedicated window-call keys as in the toolbox).2 This section describes the following common Operating and Monitoring functions: • Window call-up • Screen mode (“Window” or “Full screen”) • System message window • Window sizing • Window hierarchy • Navigator window • Panel set • Dynamic window set • Circulate key function • Alarm processing functions • Print screen functions Common Operation and Monitoring Functions 3. or similar pointing device. You can also call up the toolbox in the system message window and click the appropriate button in the toolbox.ai Figure One-control-key Operation Keyboard TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.15. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-3 3. The figure below shows the operator keyboard.3. You can also use pull-down menus.1 Window Call-up You can use a mouse.

0 Main window 0. If you call up another (main) window. System message window ? FIC100 Inlet flow LO 1/19/98 1:51 PM NAME COPY GRLEVELCONTROL A1 B1 C1 LIC301 LIC302 AUT NR Level control A2 B2 AUT NR 10.PRB3 C2 D1 Def LIC303 LIC304 Flow tank B 85. This window cannot be obscured by other windows.OG Processing tank 0.2.0 10.0 10. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-4 3.6M3/H %PR . You can use a dedicated operation keyboard to provide essentially the same environment as in a conventional operator station. so there is no possibility of overlooking alarm messages. Auxiliary Windows Auxiliary windows are called up from the main window or from the system message window.15. and are displayed on top of the main window. The following three types of windows are displayed: System Message Window Always displayed at the top of the screen.3M3/H CW Navigator \SYSTEM\.3. this displays the latest alarms and a variety of buttons.0 Flow tank A 56. An example of a full-screen-mode screen is displayed below.0 Flow tank C 72.ai Figure Full-screen Mode TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.2 Operating Screen Mode You may choose Multi-Window or Full-Screen modes. it overwrites this window.2003-00 .0 0.AL .0 0. Main Window The rest of the screen (apart from the system message window) displays the main window. Full-Screen Mode This mode provides the dedicated full-screen operation and monitoring windows – which resemble CENTUM and µXL screens – found in control rooms.0 Auxiliary window F030202.7M3/H USER PLANTOVERVIEW WASHINGOVERVIEW HW GRTANK SYSTEM ? AUT NR AUT NR 10.

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-5

Multi-window Mode
This resembles the multi-window mode seen in an office PC. The operation and monitoring windows representing current plant status are updated in real time even in an office environment, and data can be easily analyzed, so this mode is ideal for research labs. This multi-window mode allows you to run general office applications as well as perform HIS operation and monitoring functions.

System Message Window
This is normally displayed at the top of the screen, but can be dragged to another position (floating window display). This window is always displayed as the front window, and cannot be obscured by other windows.

Multi-window Display
In multi-window mode, there’s no distinction between “main” and auxiliary windows, and these windows may be overlapped. Up to five operation and monitoring windows may be displayed simultaneously. (In addition to these five operation and monitoring windows, general-purpose Windows applications can be displayed at the same time.) An example of multi-window mode is displayed below.
Popular Microsoft Windows application
?
FIC100 Inlet flow LO
LIC300 Chemical tank

NAME

COPY

1/19/98

2:56

PM

TRREACTOR Reactor Trend
1 2

LIC300 Chemical tank
7 8 1/19/98 2:56:00 PM

1 10.0

2 100.0 3 100.0 4

5

6

100.0

(100.0%)

80.0

Book 1

60.0

1 LIC300. PV Chemical tank 5.8 M 2 TIC300. PV Chemical tank 75.3 DEGC 3 AIC300. PV Chemical tank 28.7 % 4 5 6 7

AUT NR PV SV MV

M 5.5 M 5.0 % 67.1 10.0

40.0
A1 1 2 3 4 5 12:00 6 12.03 7 8 9 3 0.010 11 12 13 14 A B C D E

20.0

F

13:00

14:00

0.0
( 0.0%)

8

1

0.0 2

0.0 4

5

6

7

8

Ready

Gathering

04:00

100%

Sheet1

Sheet2

Sheet3

Sheet4

Sheet5

Sheet6

Sheet7

Sheet8

0.0

Command

Operation and monitoring window

Operation and monitoring window
F030203.ai

Figure Multi-window Mode

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-6

3.2.3

System Message Window
The system message window displays the latest alarms, and allows you to call up various operation and monitoring windows. The system message window is always displayed at top, so can not be obscured by other CENTUM CS 3000 windows or by general-purpose Windows applications.
Monitor all Tank A Tank B Flow list Call up system alarm window Tank trend Call up menu for calling windows pre-defined by user

Call up process alarm window

Call up operator guide window

?

NAME

COPY

05/07/2000 01:49 PM

PIC100

System inlet A pressure

LO

Call up menu for calling various operation and monitoring windows Overview Process Alarm Operator Guide Control Tuning Trend Graphic
SYS

Call up the toolbox for executing various operations

Tool Box
SYS HELP

?

System Status Display Process Report Historical Report Image Archive/Retrieve Logging Report Package Recipe View Activate System View
F030204.ai

Figure System Message Window

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-7

3.2.4

Window Sizing
The operation and monitoring windows come in three sizes: “full-size”, “half-size”, and “special”. Half-size windows have the same display information as full-size windows; up to four can be displayed simultaneously, so a single HIS can display the equivalent of four operator station screens of data simultaneously. The display size of these window types in full-screen mode and in multi-window mode is shown below. The percentage expresses the ratio of height and width to full-screen mode “full-size”. Some types of windows come in only some sizes: For example, Faceplate windows: come only in special sizes (see below), Historical message report windows: come in full-size and half-size only, System message windows: can’t specify display size.
Table Display Size of Operation and Monitoring Windows Window size Full size 100 % 80 % Half size 50 % 50 % Special Same size as when created Same size as when created

Operating Screen Mode Full-Screen Mode Multi-Window Mode

Special Size
Special size means the same size as when the window was originally created in the builder. If the whole window does not fit in the display, then a scroll bar appears on the window. Some system windows such as Process Alarm Window can be displayed as dialogs, and some you can display in compact format, with fewer lines displayed.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.18,1999-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-8

3.2.5

Window Hierarchy
By organizing several (types of) operating and monitoring windows in a hierarchy, it makes it easy to zoom from a graphic or overview to an individual instrument. Previous systems organized screens by type (graphic, overview, control group etc.) but now you can create separate hierarchies (containing different types of windows) for separate units or processes, for more intuitive operation. You can maintain the same window-type hierarchy as before, with the alarm status of graphic and overview windows at the top of the hierarchy reflecting the status of lower-level windows. You can also use windows shortcuts to enable a particular window to be accessed from several different window hierarchies.

An Example of Window Hierarchies
An example of a window hierarchy is illustrated below. You can proceed from higher-level supervisory windows to lower-level windows, and proceed from lower-level windows to higherlevel windows. You can also move between sibling windows at the same level in a hierarchy.
PLANTA PLANT OVERVIEW
TRAIN-C

1st level (Plant Overview)

To lower-level window
TRAIN-A

TRAIN-B

To higher-level window
Between windows at the same level

TRAIN-A

TRAIN-B

TRAIN-C

2nd level (Train)

REACTOR-A1

REACTOR-B4

REACTOR-B5

3rd level (Reactor)

F030205.ai

Figure Hierarchical Windows

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.18,1999-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-9

Alarm Status Transfer up Window Hierarchy
The figure below shows an example of how an alarm status can be transferred up the window hierarchy. For example, if an alarm occurs in the window REACTOR-A1, you can have the alarm status transmitted to the supervisory window TRAIN-A. You can also have the alarm status transferred to its supervisory window, PLANTA. The system would normally be designed so that when alarms occur in a lower-level window, the alarm status is transferred to (visible in) higher level windows in the hierarchy.
PLANTA PLANT OVERVIEW
TRAIN-C

1st level

TRAIN-A

TRAIN-B

Alarm occurring in lower-level window is notified to higherlevel windows.
TRAIN-A
TRAIN-B

Alarm occurring in lower-level window is notified to higher-level windows.

TRAIN-C

2nd level

Alarm is notified to higher-level windows.

Alarm is notified to higher-level windows.

REACTOR-A1

REACTOR-B4

REACTOR-B5

3rd level

Alarm occurs.

Alarm occurs.
F030206.ai

Figure Alarm Status Transfer up Window Hierarchy

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.18,1999-00

Viewed by the user. PLANTA PLANT OVERVIEW TRAIN-C TRAIN-A TRAIN-B TRAIN-A TRAIN-B TRAIN-C Shortcut REACTOR-A1 COMM-TANK B-C PROCESS COMM-TANK Viewed by user B-C PROCESS F030207.15. See the next section for more information about the Navigator window. The operator cannot necessarily memorize the whole window hierarchy. the same window appears in several window hierarchies – but in fact there is only one original of the window. The Navigator window resembles Windows Explorer.ai Figure Shortcut Functions Navigator Function The user can freely determine the configuration of the window hierarchy.3.2003-00 . the window COMMTANK appears below both TRAIN-B and TRAIN-C windows (the original is actually under TRAINB). without navigating the hierarchy. in the figure below. and may want to call up a specific window directly. For example. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-10 Shortcut Functions You can use Windows shortcut functions to include a window in more than one window hierarchies. and enables you to directly call a particular window.

OG . the corresponding windows will change color.SF FCS 0105 Double-click Window-hierarchy display area . Upper or lower sibling window keys on the operation keyboard or in the Toolbox (accessed from the System Message window) move from the currently-displayed window to the next one of the same type at the same level (above or below it in the Navigator display) in the current window hierarchy.AL ? Name TRWASHING GRREACTORA CGWASHING Comments Washing trend Reactor control Washing control Type Trend Graphics Control .0 /min FIS2013A Shipping :98.3. Toolbar Navigator\USER\PLANTOVERVIEW\GRWASHING Def Selected window name USER PLANTOVERVIEW WASHINGOVERVIEW GRTANK SYSTEM . for example. If an alarm occurs.SH .SF FCS 0102 . Control windows.SO .6 /min Reactor A SW F030208. 55. Icons next to window names represent the type of window – graphic.2 °C Product Recipe Lot No. Simply select the name of the window you want to view.SF FCS 0104 .15.PR Monitor entire plant GRREACTORA Reactor control FIS2001A Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp.SF FCS 0101 . Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes FIS2003A Steam Coolant Reactor internal pressure Material system 147 kPa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180.0 /min FIS2012A Shipping :180. and call it up.2 ºC TIC2002A Outer temp.SA . 98. Trend windows.ai Figure Navigator Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.6 Navigator Window The Navigator window is a Windows Explorer-like hierarchical view of the operation and monitoring windows. The diagram below illustrates the operation of the Navigator window.2003-00 .2. The separate “same type” window groupings are: Graphic and Overview windows. control or trend window. making it easy to call up a detailed display.SF FCS 0103 . Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-11 3.

g.18. and up to 200 different panel sets may be defined in each HIS.7 Panel Set You can display a set of windows on different (e. adjacent) HIS at the touch of a key.1999-00 . Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-12 3.3.ai Figure Displaying Several Windows in a Panel Set TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.2. you might display a set of related panels such as graphic window. The panel set functions allow you to register such frequently-used panel sets in the builder. In normal operation. trend display and instrument faceplates. Each panel set can consist of up to five windows. OV0001 GR0001 CG0001 TG0001 To call panel set Simultaneously display windows related to GR0001 on several HIS F030209.

the other windows in the set are displayed automatically. S1.18. Next time the representative window is displayed. Window T1 displayed Windows S1 and S2 displayed WindowT1 WindowT1 WindowS1 Window S2 Representative window selected (Window T1 made active) Windows T1. The operator defines a representative window and simply clicks the dynamic window set function icon to register and save the window set. dynamic window sets are defined by the operator during online operation.8 Dynamic Window Set While panel sets are defined in the builder. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-13 3. S2 displayed as saved Window T1 called WindowS1 WindowT2 WindowT1 Window S2 WindowS1 Window T2 displayed WindowT1 Window S2 WindowT2 Saved F030210. Up to 30 window sets can be defined.2.3. The figure below illustrates the operation of the dynamic window set functions.ai Figure Dynamic Window Set TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.1999-00 .

6 /min Reactor A SW Circulate Operation Coolant Completion Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180. The circulate key (button) allows you to alternatively switch the HIS-related group of windows or the Windows general-purpose application related group of windows to the front.3. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 FIS2001A FIS2002A Production process Standby Charge Heating Reaction Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes FIS2002A FIS2003A Steam Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 Command Coolant Sheet4 Sheet5 Cooling Shipping Sheet6 Sheet7 minutes minutes minutes Sheet8 FIS2003A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A B C D E F Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping :98. SF205A Start Mixing.2 °C TIC2002A Outer temp.15. 98. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-14 3. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 Phase Standby Charge Heating Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet4 Sheet3 Steam Sheet5 Reaction Cooling Shipping Sheet6 Sheet7 minutes minutes minutes minutes Sheet8 Completion Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180.2 8C TIC2002A Outer cylinder temperature 55.2.9 Circulate Functions The operation and monitoring functions can execute concurrently with general-purpose Windows application software (Microsoft Excel.0 /min FIS2012A Shipping :180.2 8C Product Recipe Lot No. the HIS-related windows and the Windows general-purpose application related windows may both be displayed at the same time. 55.2 °C Product Recipe Lot No.6 /min Reactor A SW Ready NUM Ready NUM Using Windows Software Using CENTUM CS 3000 Operation and Monitoring Window F030211.ai Figure Circulate Operation TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Tank A File Edit View $$$ $$$ Tool Window Help A1 File Edit View $$$ $$$ Tool Window Help A1 A GRREACTORA Reactor control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B C D E F GRREACTORA Reactor control FIS2001A Reactor control TIC2001A Reactor inside temperature 98.). Tank A SF205A Start Mixing. In this case. etc.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping :98.0 /min FIS2012A Shipping :180.2003-00 .

6 /min Reactor A SW Ready Range: All Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge End (10/10) Totalized Call related window F030212.2 °C TIC2002A Outer temp. recording level to reference level can be specified to each tag. and directly call up related windows from there – so the system is designed for fast.ai Figure Opening Related Window when Alarm Occurs To notify the operator of process alarms.3.10 Alarm Processing Functions The alarm processing functions display alarms and annunciator messages. the HIS displays alarm marks in the system message area. 98. efficient alarm processing. .0M3/H HH 12.0M3/H LO 33.0M3/H FIS2001A NR NR Select process alarm message Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes FIS2003A Steam Coolant Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa FIS2011A Shipping :180.2003-00 . Repeating Alarms You can specify that an alarm will repeat at a preset interval if the alarm status has not recovered (regardless of whether the alarm has been acknowledged).0 /min FIS2013A Shipping :98.0 m3/s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 12/12 10:18:15 10:18:15 10:18:15 10:17:45 10:17:45 10:17:45 10:17:15 10:17:15 10:17:05 10:16:45 AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM FIC005 Flowrate control 5 FIC005 Flowrate control 5 Transfer tank level error FIC005 Flowrate control 5 Transfer tank level error Purification tank level error Caution: High temperature in Processing tank A Caution: High temperature in Processing tank A FIC004 Flowrate control 4 FIC003 Flowrate control 3 NR 33. and can flash a keyboard lamp and output a voice message. sounds an electronic tone. You can specify “repeat alarm if status has not recovered” for high-priority alarms. You can distinguish between system alarms (such as hardware and system abnormality alarms) and process alarms. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.AL Process Alarm 1.2 °C DV+ HH Product Recipe Lot No. This allows high-priority alarms to be displayed on top and low-priority alarms display to be controlled. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-15 3. An example is shown below.2. medium-priority.0 /min FIS2012A Shipping :180. 55. Alarm details can be displayed on the alarm window.0M3/H NR LO ALM ALM NR ALM GRREACTORA Reactor control DV+ 50. Alarm Priority Levels Any of five alarm priority levels ranging from high-priority. low-priority.15. and status display window. and you can call up the corresponding process alarm window. A new alarm is displayed in the system message window. and sound distinctive audible alarms. in the order they occur. graphic window.

3.1999-00 .18. the page is automatically printed. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-16 Opening Windows and Acknowledging Process Alarms Occurrence of a process alarm System message window Flashing of the LED Calling of the process alarm window Calling of the process overview Graphic window (overview objects) Calling of the navigator window Navigator window Process alarm window Lit Flashing Lit Related window # Color change LED flashing of operation keyboard Printout (*1) Saving to a file Resetting of the buzzer Buzzer Sound Stops Buzzer sound *1: When enough messages to fill a printer page have been generated. Immediate message printing functions can be assigned to a function key. so you can printout at any time by pressing the key. A dot impact printer (ESC/P command set) can be used to print individual messages as they occur. (option) F030213.ai Figure Opening Process Alarm Window to Acknowledge Alarm TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.

24. for later printing. TI 33Q01B10-01E Sep. A dot impact printer (ESC/P command set) can be used to print individual messages as they occur.ai Figure Opening System Alarm Window to Acknowledge Alarm 3. (option) F030214.3. You can save a window image as a file. the page is automatically printed.2002-00 .2. Click the print screen button in the system message window or press the print screen key on the operation keyboard to print out the window on your color printer or laser printer. Immediate message printing functions can be assigned to a function key.11 Print Screen Functions Graphic and trend windows may be printed using the print screen functions. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-17 Opening Windows and Acknowledging System Alarms An example of how system alarms are notified to the operator is illustrated below. Occurrence of a system alarm System message window Flashing of the “SYSTEM” LED Calling of the system alarm window Lit System alarm window Deleted Blinking Flashing of the “SYSTEM” LED Calling of the system status overview window System status overview window FCS status display window Printout (*1) Saving to a file Resetting of the buzzer Buzzer sound stops Buzzer sound *1: When enough messages to fill a printer page have been generated. You can reverse black and white. so you can printout at any time by pressing the key.

6 /min F030301.2003-00 . 55. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes FIS2003A Steam Coolant Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180.1 Graphic Windows Graphic windows use graphic objects to provide an intuitive view of the plant. You can also call up various windows from a graphic window. or a combination of these types of objects.3 This section describes the use of the following windows for process monitoring and operation: • Graphic windows • Tuning windows • Trend windows • Process alarm windows • Operator guide windows • Message monitoring windows Operation and Monitoring Windows 3. control objects.ai Figure Graphic Window (Graphic Objects) TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.2 DEGC TIC2002A Outer temp.3.2 DEGC Product Recipe Lot No.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping : 98. 98. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-18 3.15.3. overview objects.0 /min Reactor A SW FIS2012A Shipping :180. GRREACTORA Reactor control FIS2001A Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp. Graphic windows can display graphic objects. An example of graphic objects is shown below. providing an intuitive operating and monitoring environment. Graphic Objects These display a graphical representation of the plant status.

0 LIC301 AUT NR 10.1 % 63.0 0. Instrument faceplate (half height) CGAGITATORA process LIC100 Tank A AIC100 Agitator A LIC101 Tank B AJC100 Agitator B LIC201 AUT NR 10. the mode of function blocks.0 0.0 0.ai Figure Graphic Window (Control Objects) Instrument Faceplates Instrument faceplates are compact graphical display elements that represent data values.0 AUT NR PV SV MV 10. status of contact inputs.2003-00 .0 0. Different size faceplates may be mixed.3.0 0.0 AUT NR PV SV MV % 72. and can be used to monitor and operate the function blocks.0 0.0 100.1 % 63.0 0. and faceplates can be called up individually.0 % 40.0 LIC203 AUT NR 10.0 100.0 AUT NR PV SV MV % 72. Some representative instrument faceplates are shown below. They can be displayed on graphic (control) windows and faceplate windows.0 % 65. they can be displayed as full-size or compact faceplates.0 100. An example of control objects is displayed below.0 % 40.0 % 72.3 M 5.0 AUT NR LIC204 AUT NR 10.1 % 63.0 0.0 0. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-19 Control Objects Instrument faceplates can display the status of function blocks. Faceplates come in two sizes.0 0.0 LIC202 AUT NR 10. eight full-size faceplates or 16 halfheight faceplates may be displayed in a window.0 AUT NR LIC302 AUT NR PV SV MV M 7.15. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. and the like.0 Ready Instrument faceplate (full size) F030302.0 0.0 % 40.0 0.0 LIC303 AUT NR 10.0 LIC304 10.1 10. On graphic windows.

ai TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.1 Engineering Unit Symbol Open/close mark Output value index Manipulated output value limit bar Process Variable (PV) bar Manipulated output value (MV) pointer OPN 100.15.0 0.0 20.ai Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status 1LI-1001 Tank liquid level AUT NR PV Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status % 40.0 80.0 Instrument faceplate scale Output value index 100. control S T 3-20 Cascade mark CMP (computer) mark Self-tuning mark Block status Calibration status Alarm OFF status Process Variable (PV) value Setpoint value (SV) Manipulated Variable (MV) value Instrument faceplate scale high limit High-high limit alarm setting (red) High limit alarm setting (green) 60.0 80.0 20.0 Manipulated Variable (MV) value Instrument faceplate scale 100.0 60.1 % 33.0 AUT NR PV SV MV IMAN CAL Data item names AOF DEGC 33.MARK Operation mark/comment Figure PVI Input Indicator Block Figure MLD Manual Loader Block F030304.0 1MLD-100 Flow control valve MAN NR Process Variable (PV) value MV % 30.1 DEGC 33.0 Setpoint value (SV) pointer Low limit alarm setting (green) Low-low limit alarm setting (red) Instrument faceplate scale low limit Operation mark/comment Output value index Open/close mark CLS 0. Operation and Monitoring Functions Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode Alarm status 1TIC-1301 T301 Jacket temp.0 0.0 60.0 Run Figure PID Controller Block F030303.3.0 40.0 20.0 80.0 Process Variable (PV) bar 40.2003-00 .0 40.0 Manipulated output value (MV) pointer Output value index OPE.

0 Operation mark/comment OPE.0 SV 100.0 3-21 Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Feedback input value (FV) Setpoint value (SV) Manipulated Variable (MV) value Feedback input scale Setpoint (SV) pointer DIRECT 1AL-1102 Tank 102 abnormal AUT NR SV Alarm status 1 Representative alarm processing enabled Manipulated output value (MV) Instrument faceplate label Answerback value STOP Feedback input high limit alarm setting Operation inhibit frame REVERS Feedback input low limit alarm setting 0. Operation and Monitoring Functions Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status 1MC-1201 P201 RUN/STOP MAN IMAN NR OOP FV % 0.ai TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. 2 Outputs F030306.ai Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status Timer setting Timer elapsed time MV 2 2XV-0921 V102 openshut command MAN NR PV NR 2 Answerback value Manipulated output value (MV) Answerback value (PV) Manipulated output value (MV) START PAUSE Instrument faceplate label STOP Operation inhibit frame Figure TM Timer Block Figure SIO-12 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input.0 MV 2 100.3.2003-00 .MARK Feedback input value (FV) Figure MC-2 Two-Position Motor Control Block Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status 1TM-1311 T311 reaction time AUT NR TIME RUN S 1000 300 Figure ALM-R Representative Alarm Block F030305 .15.

0 PAUSE Process Variable (PV) bar Manipulated output bar (MV) pointer 60.2003-00 .0 0 END Instrument faceplate label Operation inhibit frame 0.0 SUSPEND 20.ai TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.15.MARK Figure SW-33 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status Phase name 2BSI-1001 Phase display Figure HAS3C Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block F030307.3. Operation and Monitoring Functions Tag name Tag comment Tag mark 1SW-1001 Flow switch Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status Switch position SW 3-22 1FC-1102 F102 flow ctl valve MAN NR PV SV MV 2 % 60.0 RESTART 1 40.ai Tag name Tag comment Tag mark Block mode/ block status Alarm status 2P-1200 P200 Lo-p Pump MAN NR MAN NR Load(reactor) Heat(phase) Scale high limit 16 START Instrument faceplate label START Phase switch HALT PAUSE Status display RESTART SUSPEND STOP Instrument faceplate label Operation inhibit frame Operation inhibit frame END Scale low limit Operation mark/comment 1 OPE.MARK Figure BSI Batch Status Indicator Block Figure PBS5C Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block F030308.0 % 60.0 % 50.0 Process Variable (PV) value Setpoint value (SV) Manipulated Variable (MV) value Instrument faceplate label 3 Instrument faceplate scale 100.0 START END Setpoint (SV) pointer Switch position (SW) 2 80.0 Operation mark/comment OPE.

Overview object OV Distillation Column Control Monitoring Control Monitoring CG0001 50. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-23 Overview Objects These allow you to display a group of alarm statuses.ai Figure Graphic Window (Overview Objects) TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0M3/H CG0002 Flow Control 2 TG0001 Flow Trend TP0001 50.0M3/H MAN NR AN0010 12. and allow you to call up related windows.0% TG0011 Flow Trend TG0012 Flow Trend TG0013 Flow Trend Level Low 50.2003-00 . An example of overview objects is shown below.0M3/H Ready F030309.0M3/H AUT DV+ Flow Control 2 50.0M3/H GR0010 12.3. so can be used as menus providing access to the whole plant.0M3/H Press: Line Low 0 Process Alarm STATION STATUS 0 50.0M3/H 02FIC001 50.0M3/H GR0001 50. They provide a top-level overview of the plant as a whole.0M3/H MAN LL 02FIC003 12.15.0% AN11 0 Overview 50.

Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-24 Multi-function Graphics You can create a graphic window which contains graphic objects.0 0. Data Binding Functions Data binding functions allow you to associate data with a generic name in a graphic window.15.5 10.3.6 DEGC AUT NR AUT NR 0.0 LIC301 LIC302 AUT NR PV SV MV M 7. instrument faceplates.0 % 40. An example of a multi-function graphic is shown below.0 Chemical A Reactant 1 Reactant 2 M Chemical B TIC 100 0. ActiveX controls are each treated as a single graphic object.0 AUT NR 10. but generic names can be assigned. and overview objects.0 100. Instrument faceplate (half height) CGAGITATOR A type agitation process LIC100 Tank level AIC100 Agitator A system agitation process % 72.ai Figure Multi-function Graphics Container Functions Container functions allow you to attach ActiveX controls.3 M 5.0 To cooling process Ready Instrument faceplate (full size) F030310.2003-00 .0 Reactant 3 Reactant 4 50. This allows you to use one graphic to supervise several identical pieces of equipment simply by switching the data tables associated with the generic name.0 AUT NR PV SV MV AUT NR 10. to windows.1 % 63. You can use commercially-available ActiveX controls. Usually parts displayed in a graphic window are tag numbers associated with fixed data.0 % 6. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0 LIC303 LIC304 0. created in Visual Basic.

ai Figure Tuning Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0 100.0 = 20.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 : 0.0 = 0.2 : 0 = 100.3.0 : NR HH PH M3/H PL M3/H LL % VL DL SVH SVL ALRM = = = = = = = = Tuning parameters 100. plus a trend display.0 = 0. FIC100 TUN Tank Intake flowrate CAL Tag mark Tag name Tag comment FIC100 Tank Intake flowrate MODE SH SL PV SV MV DV SUM OPHI OPLO MSH MSL = MAN : 100.0 Tuning trend Instrument faceplate 14:02 PV SV MV Ready 14:03 14:04 14:05 14:06 0.3.0 = 0.15.0 = 100.0 = 1.2003-00 .0 0.0 100.0 0.0 : 100.2 Tuning Window The tuning window displays all the tuning parameters for one instrument.0 % 20.2 = 30.0 FIC100 Tank Intake flowrate MAN NR PV SV MV M3/H 63.1 : 33.0 = 63.0 100. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-25 3.0 100. An example of a tuning window is shown below.0 : 0. You can change the time axis and data axis scales.0 MH ML P I D GW DB CK CB PMV = 100.0 = 20.0 00:07 100% F030311.0 0.000 = 0 = 0.2 M3/H 30.1 100.

3 M3/H 3 LIC100. PV Tank inlet flow 70.6 M3/H 2 FIC002.15. up to eight color-coded “pens” (traces) representing trend data. PV Tank A temperature 25.03 0.2003-00 .0 6 Pen no.3 Trend Window Trend functions acquire process data.0 5 100.ai Figure Trend Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. superimposed. Tag name Data item Tag comment 100.0 Engineering units Current data 10:00* 1 0.7 DEGC 5 TIC200.0%) 80.0 4 13:00 0.1 DEGC 6 7 Display span high limit Index mark scrolling Index mark scrolling 2 1 100.0 4 100.0 6 7 15:00 8 Gathering 0.0 2 12:00 12.3. TRTANK Tank trend 1 Index mark Time at index mark 7 8 97/12/03 01:18:30PM 1 FIC001. PV Tank B temperature 14.0%) 8 Display span low limit Ready 05:30 100% Time change/power failure display F030312. and display it as timeseries trend charts.0 (100. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-26 3.0 ( 0.0 3 0.0 40.3.0 20.0 2 100.0 5 14:00 0. store it as time-series trend data. Each trend window can display. PV Tank level 3.0 60.0 3 10. An example of a trend window is shown below. PV Tank outlet flow 53.8 M 4 TIC100.

6 M3/H 100. created automatically when process data is allocated to a trend window. FIC100. PV PV Tank inlet flow 70.0 20.0%) 80. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-27 3. It is a one-pen view of the trend window.0 97/12/05 01:18:30 PM 1 FIC100.0 ( 0.0 40. PV Tank inlet flow 1 100.0 10:00* 1 Ready 0.2003-00 .4 Trend Point Window The trend point window displays one of the up-to-eight trend data “pen traces” allocated to a trend window.15.0 (100.05 13:00 14:00 15:00 0.ai Figure Trend Point Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0 12:00 12.3.3.0%) Gathering 05:30 100% F030313.0 60.

separately in the upper and lower sections of the message display area. HI/LO alarms) in the order they occur. PA001 18:28:14 PA001_S SIS Pressure Ind. You can search for such events by field control station or related tag name. it is possible to display process alarms specific to ProSafe-RS and/or all process alarms.S Abnormal HTRP HHH 1. PA001 FIC002 LNG Outlet Flow Ctl SIS Pressure Ind. [SCS Alarm occurrence Notification] button . medium priority. respectively.3.S Abnormal ALL Process Alarms (for CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS) Ready Range : Safety Control Station Type : All 11/11 19/19 Status bar Tag name Scope set in filter dialog Tag comment F030314. By clicking the [SCS Alarm Occurrence Notification] button on the toolbar.g. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-28 3. Ctl 18:24:40 PA002B P. PA001 0. Acknowledged and not-yet-acknowledged messages and alarms can be distinguished. This allows focusing only on ProSafe-RS process alarms directly linked to plant failures.0 m3/s 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 18:30:38 Emergency Shutdown! 18:30:38 PA001_S SIS Pressure Ind.2006-00 . and related windows displayed.1 DEGC 18:28:14 PA001_S Message display area 8 18:26:08 TIC201 Vaporizer Temp.215 MPa Process Alarms (for ProSafe-RS) Display order number Tag mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 5/12 18:31:54 FIC002 18:31:29 18:30:38 18:30:38 18:29:33 LNG Outler Flow Ctl LO LO HTRP DVHHH HI FIC201G Fuel Gas Flow Ctl Emergency Shutdown! PA001_S SIS Pressure Ind.00 T/H 1. The system can be configured to either acknowledge alarms individually or to acknowledge all at once.3. PA001 18:24:40 PA002B P.215 MPa 1.0 M3/F 1.215 MPa 0. By using the buttons of toolbar. including those of CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS.ai Figure Process Alarm Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.5 Process Alarm Window The process alarm window displays annunciator messages and alarms (e.215 MPa 57. you can also select to be displayed or not for each alarm priority level (high priority. low priority).AL Process Alarm Alarm status Annunciator message Toolbar 1 2 3 4 1.00 T/H 0. An example of a process alarm window is shown below.

flashing. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-29 3.ai Figure Operator Guide Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. or instructions to the operator to enter data or confirm an action.3. Display order Ready Range: All 5/5 Scope set in filter dialog Number of displayed messages Number of generated messages F030315. 12/10 PM 03:17:05SBP200:MSG001 Enter set value.15.0 8C 12/19 PM 03:17:40 Transfer process started. An example of an operator guide window is shown below. The operator guide window can display the production phase status.2003-00 . new and unacknowledged operator guide marks appear. Time of message . PIC100 11 kPa Limit 3. The same as for new process alarms. in the system message window.3.6 Operator Guide Window The Operator Guide window displays operator guide messages in the order they occur. 12/19 PM 02:16:18 Material charging complete.OG Operator Guide Message Guide message mark Guide message 1 2 Interactive message mark Interactive message 3 4 5 12/19 PM 04:18:33 Reactor temperature high! 12/19 PM 04:18:14 Reactor operation conditions abnormal! Pressure or temperature exceeds limit.5 kPa TIC200 125 8C Limit 120. You can search for operator guide messages by field control station name or by related tag name.

operational record messages and fieldbus messages) to be acquired and displayed depending on your needs.15. When there are no already-acknowledged messages. You can specify the number of messages to be saved in the message registration dialog. the oldest not yet acknowledged message is deleted. Message Monitor Header 1 2 3001 1999/01/11 3002 1999/01/11 Message 17:10:14 FCS01 FB RB RI01 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Device Error 15:03:22 FCS01 FB RB RI01 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT 01 Device Recover Ready range: All 2/2 NUM F030316. The message monitoring window displays newest messages first.acknowledged message is deleted. An example of a message monitoring window is shown below. and check messages in real time.7 Message Monitoring Window The message monitoring window displays messages in the order they occur.ai Figure Message Monitoring Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. the oldest already.2003-00 . When this number is exceeded. You can specify the types of messages (such as sequence messages.3.3. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-30 3.

4. TI 33Q01B10-01E Sep. You can search by station name. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-31 3. element type.2 Historical Message Reports You can search the stored process alarms and operation logs containing process and system events. I/O Reports I/O reports provide a digital display of I/O status on a per-element basis. tag name. and display or print selective historical message reports.4 The following operation and monitoring support functions are provided as standard: • Process reports • Historical message reports • Security functions • Report functions (option) • Connecting ITV cameras • CENTUM desktop environment custmization • Voice messaging functions • Multi-monitor functions • Advanced alarm filter function • Remote Desktop function Operation and Monitoring Support Functions 3.2002-00 . and print various system operation status information. mode and process data on a per-tag basis.1 Process Reports The process report functions are used to acquire. display.24. 3. Tag Report Tag report functions display current (values of) function block alarm status. You can search for reports by station name. alarm status etc.4. etc.3.

User Groups The User Group which the user belongs to determines the scope of operation and monitoring functions that can be performed. the corresponding user group and user permissions are checked.2003-00 .ai Figure Flow of Security Functions User Name This is a user-specific user name which uniquely determines who the operator is. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. and which windows can be displayed. for example. and engineering functions that can be performed. When the user logs on. A password is associated with each user name. Security functions (such as user group and alarm processing level setting) can be used to hide alarms that are not relevant to the operator. which FCS can be operated. You can specify certain groups in certain plants. restrict operation to authorized personnel. Historical (operation) logging and the like will include this user name. The user group determines which FCS can be monitored.4. You can restrict the items which can be monitored and operated by specifying the corresponding station name and drawing name. The operation and monitoring functions manage passwords separate from the Windows security functions. Passwords are defined on a per-HIS basis. • User group (described in detail below) This restricts the scope of FCS data that can be monitored and changed by group members. Thus the HIS user name does not agree with the Windows log-on user name.3. monitoring. and restrict the range of operation and monitoring functions that may be performed.3 Security Functions Security functions help prevent operator errors and preserve system safety. which determines the range of operation and monitoring functions and permissions. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-32 3. The flow of the security functions is illustrated below. Overview of Security Functions The operator can define the following operation and monitoring function attributes: • User name (described in detail below) An operation history is recorded for each user.15. for example. • User permissions (described in detail below) These restrict the range of operation. User permission Operation history • Function block operation and monitoring • Window operation and monitoring • Operation and monitoring of received messages User in Operator Check user name User group Check operation and monitoring scope Check operation and monitoring permission Invalid operation Invalid operation Invalid operation F030401.

For each individual function block. senior operator. MV or alarms. S2. and S3 – per user group. Table Tag Priority Levels Tag mark Tag priority Important tag Ordinary tag Auxiliary tag 1 Auxiliary tag 2 Security on a Per-Window Basis For each window. Using operation marks. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-33 User Permissions You can subdivide a user group into several levels of user permission (restriction): ordinary operator.2007-00 . you can also change temporarily the operations are available or not. need for acknowledgment. etc.3. to prevent inadvertent data entry. • Alarm processing The type of alarm (blinking. The default user permissions for these three levels are as shown below.14. User-defined user permissions U1 to U7 are also possible. The default is three such levels – S1. Table Standard User Permissions Monitoring x x x Operation – x x Set by user Engineering – – x S1 S2 S3 U1 to U7 x: –: enabled disabled Permission level Security on a Per-Function-Block Basis You can require confirmation when setting data in important function blocks. • Tag mark The tag mark corresponding to an individual function block can also be specified by the user. you can set three categories of authorizations for operation and monitoring: • Ordinary windows • Important windows • System operation windows TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. engineering personal. repeat alarms). you can specify: • User restrictions User restrictions on changing settings such as SV. • Confirmation of settings The need for confirmation of settings (to help prevent errors). to indicate tag importance (priority).

or you can create new templates from scratch.2003-00 .3.ai Figure Overview of Reporting Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.4. maximums. Reports can be defined using the daily or monthly report templates included in the package.4 Report Functions (Option) The report package enables you to create a daily or monthly report. You can use Microsoft Excel to format the report. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-34 3. minimums) • Historical trend data • Historical alarm event messages • Tag information • Process data (instantaneous values) • Batch data An overview of the reporting functions is displayed below: Standard Operation and Monitoring Function Open Data Interface Package Report Package F100 PV Process data acquisition Trend data acquisition *1 *2 Report definition Report template file Closing data process Report definition file Trend data files Closing data save file Tag information Historical message file *3 OPC Server *4 Printing Report Saves printed report *5 Message management Batch process Batch data file *6 History management Report FCS HIS: Human Interface Station FCS: Field Control Station HIS *1: Process data *2: Trend data *3: Closing data HIS or general purpose PC *4: Tag information *5: Historical messages *6: Batch data F030402. totals.15. The types of data you can read in and display include: • Closing data (average values.

0 00. You define tag numbers and process data to be logged.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.2003-00 .0 00000. Total Max.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00. XXXXXX Daily Report TIC100 PV Temp.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00000.0 00. and the daily report format is created.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 TIC300 PV Temp.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 FIC200 PV Flow2 m3/h 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 FIC100 PV Flow1 m3/h 00.3.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.2 DEGC 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 000.0 Date : yyyy/mm /dd FIC300 PV Flow3 m3/h 00.0 00.0 00000.0 000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000. Min. Time for Min.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 000.0 00000.0 00000.ai Figure Report Template Example TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00. Time for Max.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 TIC200 PV Temp.0 00000.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00000. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-35 An example of a daily report template is shown below.0 00000.0 00000. 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.3 DEGC 00.0 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 F030403.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.1 DEGC 00:00 01:00 02:00 03:00 04:00 05:00 06:00 07:00 08:00 09:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00 23:00 Ave.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.15.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00000.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 FIC400 SUM Total m3 FIC500 SUM Total m3 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00000.0 00.0 00.0 00000.

3.2002-00 .24. TI 33Q01B10-01E Sep. This allows Windows-based machines on the network to access report data and use Microsoft Excel to print report data. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-36 Starting Printing Printing may be started as follows: • Automatic printing at preset interval/specified time • Automatic printing when sequence message received • Manual printing when function key (on operation keyboard) pressed • Manual printing when button on graphic window clicked • Manual printing from Microsoft Excel • Printing from application program (using Visual Basic) Report Printing from Other PC The report package supports the open data interface OPC (OLE for Process Control).

0 MH = 100.0 100. permitting to monitor operations and their results (combustion.0 = 0.0 0.0 100.0 0.0 CK = 1.0 DL = Address SUM : 0 SVH = OPHI = 100.0 SVL = 01PIC-101 STEAM BM PRES S CTRL AUT NR PV SV MV TNE/H 40 TNE/H 30 % 1.2 M3/H PL = SV = 30.4.0 100.0 Search D Favorites 100.0 P = 100.4 100 S Internet 20:58 PV SV MV Ready 20:59 21:00 21:01 21:02 0 00:05:32 100% Proprietary LAN HIS ITV system F030404. 01PIC-101 TUN STEAM BM PRESS CTRL CAL 01PIC-101 STEAM BM PRESS CTRL MODE = AUT ALRM : NR 100.0 PH = FileSL Edit :View Favorites Tools Help PV = 63.0 M3/H LL = Back Forward Stop % Refresh MV = 0.0 GO GWLinks = 0.0 0.5 Connecting an ITV Camera ITV images can be shown on the HIS screen using a standard Windows 2000 or Windows XP function.2003-00 . ITV Connection Functions • Connects ITV system via LAN and shows the ITV images in the Web browser window. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-37 3.) from HIS.5 VL Home = DV : 10.0 HH = 0.0 ML = 0. etc.ai Figure Connecting an ITV camera TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. • You can operate ITV camera remotely on the Web browser.0 I = 20. crane position. flare stack.3.15. An ITV system can be connected to the HIS via LAN and the ITV images can be shown in the Web Browser window running on Windows 2000 or Windows XP.0 DB = 0.000 Microsoft Internet Explorer SH : 100.

• Auto Run from CD-ROM can be disabled. etc.) can be hidden.3. In addition to voice messaging. etc.7 Voice Messaging Functions Annunciators and operator guide messages are displayed and buzzers are sounded to inform process status and abnormalities .4. • Unnecessary items on the start menu (Explorer. and buzzer messaging. operator can farther confirm the process status and abnormalities. 3. providing an optimal operating environment (CENTUM Desktop). Trash Can. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-38 3. Customization (profiles): • All Desktop Icons (My Computer. Shutdown. You can use the HIS utility to switch between the Windows standard desktop and CENTUM desktop. this function can generate combined messaging of voice and animation. TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.2001-00 .4. such as standard Windows functions and the Auto Run function from Explorer or CDROM. By using the voice messaging functions.) can be hidden.01.6 CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization controls functions not required for operation and monitoring.

7 % 4 5 6 7 AUT NR PV SV MV M 5.15.0100. This function is available with both console type HIS and desktop type HIS.0 (0. PV Chemical tank 5.OG Processing tank 1 2 3 4 5 12:00 6 12.0 Main monitor HIS CPU Sub monitor Example of multi-monitor setting F030405. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-39 3. The two monitors.0 1 0.AL ? . permitting to display more information.2003-00 .0100.0 Command 0.ai Figure Multiple Monitors in Full-screen and Multi-window Modes TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.03 7 8 9 3 0.0 F 13:0014:00 0.7M3/H USER PLANTOVERVIEW WASHINGOVERVIEW HW GRTANK SYSTEM AUT NR AUT NR 10.3. which are designated as main and sub monitors.8 Multi-monitor Functions The Multi-monitor functions enable one general purpose PC to use two monitors.0 % 67.6M3/H %PR .0%) 10.0 0.0 0.0 (100. PV Chemical tank 75.3 DEGC 3 AIC300.4.0 80.PRB3 C2D1 Def LIC303 LIC304 Flow tank B 85. can be set up in the following display modes: Table Combination of the main and sub-monitor screen modes Main monitor Full-screen mode Full-screen mode Multi-window mode Multi-window mode Sub monitor Full-screen mode Multi-window mode Full-screen mode Multi-window mode Sub monitor (multi-window mode) 1/19/98 1:51 PM Main monitor (full-screen mode) ? FIC100 Inlet wflo LO NAME COPY ? FIC100 Inlet flow LO COPY 1/19/98 2:56 PM GRLEVELCONTROL TRREACTOR Reactor Trend 1 LIC300 Chemical tank A1 B1 C1 LIC301 LIC302 AUT NR 2 LIC300 Chemical tank 7 8 1 10.0 10.0 2 3 4 5 6 1/19/98 2:56:00 PM Level control A2 B2 AUT NR 100.8 M 2 TIC300.0 A1 40.0 2 Ready Flow tank A 72.8 M 5.0 10.1 10.0 1 LIC300. Switching between two monitors can be done by mouse or function key previously assigned.0 4 5 6 7 8 Gathering 04:00 100% Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 Sheet4 Sheet5 Sheet6 Sheet7 Sheet8 0.010 11 12 13 14 20.0 0.3M3/H CW Navigator \SYSTEM\. PV Chemical tank 28.0%) 8 0.0 Book 1 60.0 A B C D E Flow tank A 56.

2001-00 . equipment maintenance person and such.4. In addition to the range in charge such as the station names. medium priority and low priority • The color of alarms • Alarm names: HI (high alarm). by using the logic operations. tag names and so forth. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-40 3. IOP (input open alarm) and so forth. and notices only the necessary alarms.3.9 Advanced Alarm Filter Function This function selects the alarms to be displayed on the HIS. TI 33Q01B10-01E Nov.01. it can also select from the alarm names and the color of alarms. • The kind of messages: process alarm. Therefore it can select the alarms according to the roles of operator. The items used for selections are shown below. operator guide message and annunciator message • Message number • Station names • Tag names • Alarm priority levels: high priority. the more detail filter setting can be performed. Furthermore.

10 Remote Desktop Function The standard remote desktop feature of Windows XP enables the functions of the CENTUM CS 3000 to be accessed from a distant location.4.0 60.0 6 7 10:04 8 0. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-41 3.0 6 7 8 12/03/2000 10:02:20 1 FIC001. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 Client machine 20. TRTANK Tank A -Expert Trend Viewer File Edit Display 1 2 1 100.1 DEGC 6 7 Sampling Period 1 Sec. PV Inlet flow 72.0 5 100. enables HIS operation and monitoring functions as well as builders for system generation to run on a client machine.31.3 M3/H 3 LIC100. No special software is required.1 M3/H 2 FIC002.0 GRREACTORA Reactor control 40.2 °C Product Recipe Lot No.0 ( 0.8 M 4 TIC100.0 4 10:02 0.0 2 10:01 0. PV Level 3. PV Temp B 14. 1 min. such as via the Internet. Benefits • Only an Ethernet or dial-up connection is required. PV Outlet flow 53.0 /min Reactor A SW FIS2012A Shipping :180. Logging on from a client machine to a host machine.0 (100. • Uses a Windows XP standard feature.0 5 10:03 0. No need of connection to the V net control network.6 /min Office building Client machine Site Internet/intranet CS 3000 Remote desktop on host HIS V net Ethernet Central control room F030406. 55. 1 min. 100.0 FIS2001A Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp. 1 Sec.7 DEGC 5 TIC200.ai Figure Examples of Remote Desktop Connections TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. • Even a low-speed connection such as at a rate of 128 kbps is sufficient. PV Temp A 25. • The number of client PCs that can simultaneously access the host PC is one.0 3 0.0 3 10.0%) 8 FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes 00:04:20 100% FIS2003A Steam Coolant Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180.0 2 100.0 4 100.2004-00 . 10 Sec. 98.2 °C TIC2002A Outer temp.3.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping : 98.0 10:00 1 Ready 0.0%) 80.

1 System Status Overview Window The system status overview window displays the status of stations on the V net.5 This section describes windows and dialogs for system status confirmation and system maintenance.3. • System status overview window • System alarm window • FCS status display window • HIS setting window • Time setting dialog • Help dialog System Maintenance Functions 3.SO System Status Overview FCS IOM FCS BKDCS Domain : 01 V net1 V net2 Fail Fail CPU Status (Left CPU Fail) FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103 FCS0104 FCS0105 FCS0106 SCS0107 Communications Status Abnormal Communications CPU Normal HIS0121 HIS0122 HIS0123 HIS0124 Test Functions Ready Running CPU Status (Right CPU Fail) Communications Status Abnormal Communications Normal F030501.ai Figure System Status Overview Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. An example of a system status overview window is shown below.2006-00 . FCS of CS 3000 SCS of ProSafe-RS . Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-42 3.5.

odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801.odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. is notified to an HIS as system alarms. including those of CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS.V NODE 1 SLOT 1 CH 1 SCS0107 Variable Locked Variable=DI010101.odb FCS0108 Fail FCS0108 LEFT Fail (V STOP Code= 0014 0008 0000 0000) FCS0108 Prameter Save Complete Area=1 FCS0108 Prameter Save Start Area=1 FCS0108 Prameter Save Complete Area=0 FCS0108 Prameter Save Start Area=0 Range : Safety Control Station 4/4 30/30 ALL System Alarms (for CS3000 and ProSafe-RS) Status bar Message display area F030502. Note that all SCS diagnostic information. System alarm messages are not defined by the user.3.V NODE 1 SLOT 1 CH 1) Lecel Changed to 1 System Alarms (for ProSafe-RS) SCS0107 Security Lecel Changed to 2 SCS0107 Variable Unlocked Variable=DI010101. This allows focusing only on ProSafe-RS system alarms. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-43 3.V NODE 1 SLOT 1 CH 1) SCS0107 Security Lecel Changed to 1 FCS0108 Copy FCS0108 RIGHT Battery Alarm DataBase Equalize Complete FCS0108 IOM Out Service FI01 NODE 01 SLOT 02 FCS0108 IOM In Service FI01 NODE 01 SLOT 01 FCS0108 Batch Manager Ready FCS0108 RIGHT Control FCS0108 RIGHT Manual Reset Start FCS0108 LEFT Fail (V STOP Code= 0014 0008 0000 0000) FCS0108 Recover Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801.odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. respectively.2006-00 .odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. including ProSafe-RS field wiring checks (short-circuit failure and disconnection failure).odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. separately in the upper and lower sections of the message display area.odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. Toolbar [SCS Alarm Occurrence Notification] button .5.ai Figure System Alarm Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.SA System Alarm Message HELP 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Ready 4177 4104 4103 4177 4177 4104 4103 4177 0450 0047 0502 0460 0459 0490 0451 0001 0011 0304 0510 0510 0510 0510 0510 0510 0510 0510 0510 0303 0011 0478 0482 0478 0482 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 11/01 18 : 20 : 48 18 : 20 : 10 18 : 19 : 45 18 : 18 : 52 18 : 20 : 48 18 : 20 : 10 18 : 19 : 45 18 : 18 : 52 18 : 09 : 43 18 : 09 : 35 18 : 09 : 31 18 : 09 : 30 18 : 09 : 30 18 : 09 : 29 18 : 09 : 29 18 : 09 : 29 18 : 09 : 29 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 09 : 28 18 : 06 : 40 18 : 06 : 20 18 : 06 : 16 18 : 06 : 03 18 : 06 : 03 18 : 05 : 41 SCS0107 SCS0107 SCS0107 SCS0107 Security Variable Variable Security Lecel Changed to 2 Unlocked Variable=DI010101. it is possible to display system alarms specific to ProSafe-RS and/or all system alarms.2 System Alarm Window The system alarm window displays system alarm messages such as system hardware abnormalities and communication abnormalities. they are part of the system software.odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801.odb Data Base Download from HIS0155 File = OGAR010801. You can obtain a simple explanation of system alarm messages and how to resolve them using the HELP button. By clicking the [SCS Alarm Occurrence Notification] button on the toolbar.V NODE 1 SLOT 1 CH 1 Locked Variable=DI010101.

3 FCS Status Display Window The FCS status display window displays FCS station information. R) 01 COM COM PSU PSU 02 COM COM PSU PSU 03 COM COM PSU PSU 04 COM COM PSU PSU IO FAIL 05 RMT COM COM PSU PSU TEMP 06 RMT COM COM PSU PSU 07 RMT COM COM PSU PSU 08 RMT COM COM PSU PSU 09 COM COM PSU PSU 10 COM COM PSU PSU Ready ESB bus status display Local node Remote node Node status display F030503. and communications bus status. The window display is different for a standard FCS for FIO (KFCS) with multiple nodes than for a compact FCS for RIO with no remote nodes and a compact FCS for FIO.00 Generation : 01/10/08 04:08 CPU Idle Time Comm Load Ave Cur Test Mode ControlStatus Comm I/O BKDCS Domain : 01 V net1 MAN L V net2 R Not Ready Stand-By Control Hard Ready Maintenance P S U : 34 sec : 0% : 0% : OFF : RUN : ON P S U S B 3 0 1 C P U C P U S B 3 0 1 1X 2X 1 2 TEMP Air In Air Out Battery ( L. N2) Door ( 1.2006-00 .SF FCS0101 FCS Status Display FCS IOM FCS KFCS01 Distillation calum A Station No : 1 Type : AF Revision : R3. An example of a status display window for a standard FCS for FIO (KFCS) is shown below. hardware configuration and status. and save tuning parameters. download I/O Module configuration information. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-44 3.ai Figure FCS Status Display Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. You can start or stop the displayed FCS.02.3. R) Fan FCU ( N1. 3. 2. Toolbar Status display area .5. 4) Battery ( L.

01.3. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-45 3. Node status display F030504.03. Toolbar Status display area .ai Figure SCS Status Display Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. hardware status. number of forcing operations.5. hardware configuration. R) Battery ( L.30 or later.14. R) Ready : 29sec : 0% : 0% : RUN : 50msec : 20% : RUNNING :2 :0 : 3 stn : YES (*1) C P U 01 PSU PSU 1 2 03 COM COM PSU PSU 04 COM COM PSU PSU 05 COM COM PSU PSU I/O FAIL 06 COM COM PSU PSU 07 COM COM PSU PSU 09 08 COM COM COM COM PSU PSU PSU PSU 02 COM COM PSU PSU 10 COM COM PSU PSU ESB bus status display *1: Displayed in the versions of R1.SF SCS0107 Station Status Display FCS IOM FCS BKDCS SCS0107 SCS-107 Station No Type Domain : 01 V net1 V net2 MAN Not Ready Stand-By Control Hard Ready Maintenance C P U P S U P S U :7 : SSC10D-S Revision : R1. communication bus status. etc.00 Generation : POU DB : 2007/12/14 14:26 Variable DB : 2007/12/14 14:26 System DB : 2007/12/14 14:26 Integration DB : 2007/12/14 14:26 CPU Idle Time Comm Load Ave Cur ControlStatus Scan Period Execution Time Operating Mode Security Level Forcing Link Trans Lock Comm I/O Lock TEMP Air in Air out Battery ( L.2007-00 . security level.. An example of the SCS status display window is shown below. in a list. operating mode.4 SCS Status Display Window The SCS status display window displays SCS station information.

tone. Assigns function keys on operation keyboard. Sets multimedia functions. Settings for printing messages & reports. . print screen functions. etc. Operation mark settings. The operating window allows use to set window size.2006-00 Tab Sheet Name Station Tab Sheet Printer Tab Sheet Buzzer Tab Sheet Display Tab Sheet Window Switching Tab Sheet Navigator Tab Sheet Control Bus Tab Sheet Alarm Tab Sheet Preset Menu Tab Sheet Equalize Tab Sheet Function Key Tab Sheet Operation Mark Tab Sheet Multimedia Tab Sheet Long Term Data Tab Sheet (option) External Recorder Tab Sheet (option) OPC Tab Sheet (option) Report Tab Sheet (option) Process Management Tab Sheet (option) Multi-monitor Tab Sheet (option) . Shows control bus communications status.0 Port : Number of Tags (Reboot computer required) Print OK Cancel Import Apply Export Help F030505. etc. Sets size of windows launched from system message window. and is used to customize Product Overview toolbar buttons. sets font size. selects whether to display batchrelated trend windows. and is used to set the security policy (password change request and intrusion count check settings). source. Sets dual stacked monitor for console type HIS and two monitors for desktop HIS.SH HIS Setup Function Key Operation Mark Multimedia Long-Term OPC Report Process Management Multi-Monitor Station Printer Buzzer Display Window Switching Navigator Control Bus Alarm Preset Menu Equalize Project : BKDCS Station Name : HIS0164 Type : PC (PC) Address : 01-64 Comment : OS : Windows 2000 professional (Service Pack 1) OPKB Revision : 0. Settings for long-term data (archiving) package. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.3. method of alarm confirmation. screen mode setting. Sets the simultaneous unit formula dialog call mode. etc. Switches between full-screen & windowed modes. Selects need or not for operation logs in process data logging.5 HIS Setting Window The HIS setting window displays station information and operating environment for the HIS. sets equalize environment. and operation/monitoring function specific settings. An example of an HIS setting window is displayed below. Sets buzzer volume. Sets External Recorder Output. Sets quality codes. Performs equalization. Determines preset menu settings. Sets process alarm display mode. automatic opening of window when alarm occurs. Specifies printers for report output. etc. Sets the preferences for the Navigator window. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-46 3. printer settings.ai Figure HIS Setting Window Table HIS Setting Tab Sheet Items Contents Shows station information such as the project name and HIS software revision.5.

HW Help Search key Message number 9100 Display Cancel When process C starts. The same system date and time is set (at Windows operating system and operator station levels).ai Figure Help Dialog Box TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.6 Time Setting Dialog Box The time setting dialog sets the system date and time. Time setup Current time Date Time 2000/12/21 16:19:17 Setting time Date Time 1997 16 12 : 20 21 :0 OK Cancel F030506. .5. This sets the date and time for the whole CENTUM CS 3000 system on the V net.3. close the distillation tower intake valve. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-47 3. An example of a help dialog box is shown below.2006-00 . F030507.ai Figure Time Setting Dialog 3.5. Only one help dialog can be associated with each operation and monitoring window.7 Help Dialog Box The help dialog box can display predefined (system) or user-defined help messages to assist the operator with plant operation and monitoring.

J02 IN IKLAG LAG CPV IKDUMY PVI S11 S12 Flowrate control 1 FASW-33 S10 SW-33 RUN AUT SET NR 27.27.1 Control Drawing Window (Option) The control drawing window provides an interactive display of control status on a control drawing.0 PV FAPVI-DV PVI-DV IN AUT NR 27. the following displays are available: • Control drawing window • Sequence table window • Logic chart window • SEBOL window • SFC window Control Status Display Window 3. A sample of a control drawing window is shown below.0 IKCALCU2 CALCU AUT NR 0.0 M3/H FAPIDSTC.ai Figure Control Drawing Window TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Depending on the way to generate a system.2 AUT NR 0.6 The control status display windows are intuitive.6.0 %Z172101 FA500 B0001 %Z173101 FA500 D0001 F030601.2 MV IKST16 ST16 AUT NR 00 IKCALCU1 CALCU AUT NR 0.0 IKFOUT.0 FAPIDSTC IN PID-STC OUT CPV FALAG LAG IN %Z171101 FA500 W0001 Ready AUT NR 27.0 VELLIM VELLIM OUT SET IKFOUT FOUT J01 SET IN FIC300 PID J02 CAS HI 73. It provides an overview of data values and alarm status related to the selected control loop. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-48 3.0 0.3. color-coded display of the status of control functions.SET AUT NR 73.0-300.0-100.2006-00 . It is continuously updated. FASW-33 AUT NR 0.

. .. .ACT CL0022...... . .... ... 6789 . ... Action signal no.. .. . ....... .. . .. . N..... . .......... . ....1 . Table name of extention destination *1 *2 Label for next step *1: Can drag to change (relative) display area for conditions/actions *2: Can drag to change display area for signals & comments/rules F030602.......BSTS TM0004. .. ... .. . . .. . . .ACT CL0023... ..4 5. ... .... .......OP CL0020. ...ai Figure Sequence Table Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.. .. . ... ........ . ...... . .. ..... . . Y... .... . . Y.... ... . . . ..... . .. ... .. ... .. ..... Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-49 3.. . .... . ... . . .. . . .6. .... .. ....... ... ... ...... .... N.... ......... .. . .....PV TM0003.....PV TM0003...A .. .. . ........ ........ ... ... Y............. .. .....Y ............. . ... .... .. . ... ..2 Sequence Table Window The sequence table window provides a detailed display of the status of sequences in sequence table blocks... ..... .. . . ... . . . .....ACT FIC003. ..... .. . ..N . Action signal .. N... ...... ... . . .... .... .. .Y ....... .. AAAA .... .. .Y . rule true/false status and sequence progress are displayed.. ... . .. Y.... ... ... An example of a sequence table window is shown below. AAAA 9..Y.. . .Y .. .. .. .....MODE FIC007. . 2 1234 Y.... .. . 8 5678 .... . . Y.. ... . ........ N.. Y... . 8 9.... .... .. .. ... .X01 ON ON CTUP CTUP GE Line stop Washing start Process timer 1 Process timer 2 5. Y.. Y...Y .BSTS RL0001. ..... . ........ ... . ..... . .... . ..Y Y. 2 3. ...2006-00 . .... .PV SW0011. 6 7..... .... .. . .......... ..ACT NON H START ON MAN MAN MAN ON ON ON Washing process start Washing complete Process timer 1 Flow calculation 1 Inlet flow Flow calculation 2 Flow calculation 3 Flow calculation 4 THEN ST101 ELSE SW0012.......... ........... ... ... . .... .. .. .. AAAA Extended table label Ready YN YN 2345 ... .. ..... . ..... . .. Y. ...... .. ..... ....... . . 0 1. . Tag comment Control period ST100 Wash Line Accpt Processing Y N Rule no..3.. . .. . Sequence table scan status.. . .. ..... ..... ........ . ....PV SW0010..... .. ..... .. .. ... .. ... .... ... Condition signal Signal comment/ tag comment YN YN 1..... . .. .. 4 AAAA ST100 Wash Line Accpt Processing AUT NR A1 TC 1-sec period No Comment C01 C02 C03 C04 C05 C06 C07 C08 C10 C11 C12 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 %OG0001... .. ...... . Y......MODE CL0021. .... .. .. Step label Rule true/false status Rule Tag name Block mode Alarm status Label name of the step currently in progress Process timing Condition signal no..... . .MODE FIC005. .. ...... . ..... .

6.PV.ALRM. Logic chart scan status. logic true/false status. and other control progress can be monitored.3 Logic Chart Window (Option) The logic chart window displays logic chart block details and status.L Valve B open Tank C level HH LIC300.L Valve C open Ready F030603.PV.ai Figure Logic Chart Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.HH 0 0 V0002.L Valve A open Tank B level HH LIC200.PV.3.HH 0 V0001. A logic chart window display example is shown below. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-50 3.ALRM.2006-00 .HH 0 V0003. Block mode Tag mark Tag name Tag comment LC100 Reactor interlock Alarm status Processing timing Control period LC100 Reactor interlock MAN NR T 12sec Period Tank A level HH LIC100.ALRM.

ai Figure SEBOL Window 3.setvalue. Toolbar SBP200 Reactor SBP200 Reactor MODE =AUT ALRM PHASE :NR :#2 Load ingredients BSTS =RUN DIALOGUE: MSG001 1 Executed Statement Display Mark SEBOL Display Area 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 block PID FIC_001 alias 01FIC001 long setvalue.4 SEBOL Window The SEBOL window displays a SEBOL program and current program status. and from paused status force a jump to another step.3. An example of an SFC window is displayed below. SF205A Processing Tank A Tag comment SF205A Process Tank A Agitation Start Tag name Block mode MODE =AUT ALRM PHASE :NR AOF BSTS =RUN DIALOGUE: 1 2 :Agitate Facility Block status Alarm status SFC block current phase Dialog name (Operator guide message display) Initial step Initialize Agitate Facility Agitate Hi-speed Transfer Washing Discharge End 3 4 Agitate Med-speed 5 Agitate Low-speed SFC status display 6 7 8 9 Ready NUM F030305. You can also display details of the currently-executing SEBOL statement in a SEBOL detail window. An example of a SEBOL window is shown below."\ .6.retry setvalue.5 SFC Window This window displays SFC block status.6. you can call up a detail window which displays each step in a phase. etc.2006-00 .time 120 while (setvalue<50or setvalue>100) dialogue"Out of range.SV=setvalue ! Entered Value applied to SV ans = FUNC1 (FIC_001) + FUNC3 (FIC_001) end Ready NUM F030604."\ .ans dialogue "MSG001"."Enter setting. From here.ai Figure SFC Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30."Setting=". please reenter.time 120 wend FIC_001. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-51 3.

and can be displayed and viewed. this data may be read into a spreadsheet or similar external report generation package. maximum and time it occurred. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-52 3. Trend Functions Trends To capture a trend. scan period. and process status can be monitored by displaying and viewing trend recordings. max. and minimum and time it occurred. Trend block TR0001 TR0002 TR0003 TG0016 TG0017 TG0018 TG0019 Pen 8 Pen 1 Pen 2 Pen 3 Trend group TG0001 TG0002 TG0003 Trend point Pen 1 Pen 2 Pen 3 TR0017 TR0018 TR00nn (nn: 01 to 18) TG0xxx (xxx: 001 to 288) TG0032 Pen 8 TG0288 : Trend block name.3. as well as scan interval and recording time span. FV etc.7 3. of points acquired Acquisition type Continuous Batch 1 sec 48 min Rotary type Rotary type. 256 points. : Trend group name.1 The trend recording functions acquire and record process data.ai Figure Hierarchy of Trend Functions The trend specifications are as follows: Table Trend Specifications Item Data to be recorded Scan period Recording span No. you must specify the data to be acquired and the type of trend. Closing processing may include calculation of totals and average value. Fixed for system. or 10 sec. MV. Acquired data is captured to a hard disk file. Data acquired by the trend functions may be used to create closing data. One shot type 10 sec 8 hours Specifications Numeric data (PM. SV.7. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. This data is in a convenient form for use in statistical processing.) 1 min 2 days 2 min 4 days 5 min 10 days 10 min 20 days Max.2006-00 . Data is acquired in “trend blocks” of 128 items. Using the OPC interface package. F030701. 2304 points. For 1 sec.

7. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-53 3. Trend specifications for remote trend data are the same as for local trend data. SW 3.2006-00 . 48 minutes (2880 samples) Depends on no. An HIS can access and display up to 6400 points.7. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. including locally-acquired data.3. The “reserved” (continued) recording data is displayed next time the window is opened. The specifications of the tuning trend are as follows: Table Specifications for Tuning Trend Item Data to be recorded Acquisition period Recording timespan No. of tuning windows displayed Continuous (Rotary) 16 points Specifications PV (CPV). and stops when the window is closed.2 Tuning Trend The tuning trend is displayed in a tuning window. of points acquired Recording type Reserve functions 1 sec. using the engineering functions. You may start the “reserve” function to continue recording even after the window is closed. SV. FV.3 Displaying Trends from Other Stations Trend data acquired at any HIS can be displayed at other HIS. MV. You can change the trend graph axes. You can define the data to be displayed. in 128-point trend block units. Tuning trend acquisition starts when the tuning window is displayed.

and restore them from media to hard disk.8 MB (total 1231. period 2 blocks or Low speed 768 points.0 MB Notes for Hight speed 256 points.5 MB / day Closing data Historical message Disk capacity : TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.5 MB 1. Disk Capacity The disk capacity used depends on how long data should be saved.2 MB) 50.4 Long-term Data Archive Functions (Option) For the standard trend and historical message functions. 1-min.7.27. Typical capacities are shown below. If you want to keep recording data to disk. • Historical data (in day units). 1.3. 1-sec.5 GB Data type Trend Disk capacity used 194. Table Typical Figures for Disk Capacity Save data time-span High speed Low speed Hourly Daily Monthly 24 hours 100 days 100 days 50 months 10 years 100 days approx.2 MB) 22. Saving to other Media You can save long-term record of plant data and operation logs to other media such as MO. Long-term trend data is displayed in a standard trend window. The following data can be saved: • Trend data (in units of trend blocks).2 MB (total 38.4 MB 1036. The open data interface is used to access long-term data. period 6 blocks For 200 points Assuming 0.5 MB 14. • Closing data (in trend pen units). Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-54 3.2006-00 . when the acquired data reaches capture file capacity the oldest data is overwritten. use the long-term data archive functions.

2006-00 . • Yokogawa’s FA-M3 PLC is use as D/A converter. up to 4 groups (max.5 External Recorder Output Functions (Option) Process data acquired by HIS can be output to external recorder by this function. and security can be set for each group. FA-M3 allows for a low-cost hardware configuration.3. • Can be used on any platform with operation and monitoring functions. HIS Process data (RS-232C) Process data (V net) Process data (Analog output 0 to 5 V) Recorder FA-M3 FCS F030702.ai Figure External Recorder Output Function TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. • 8 points per group. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-55 3. 32 points) can be output.7. • 8 points per group.27. making a simple but expandable hardware configuration.

3.ai Figure Expert Trend Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. However.0 6 7 8 12/03/2000 10:02:20 1 FIC001.1 M3/H 2 FIC002. PV Temp A 25.0 6 7 10:04 8 0.2006-00 .0 3 10. the trend data gathered with different sampling periods can be displayed together.6 Expert Trend Viewer Function (Option) On an expert trend window.0 5 10:03 0.1 DEGC 6 7 Sampling Period 1 Sec.0 10:00 1 Ready 0. 10 Sec.0 (100.7 DEGC 5 TIC200. PV Inlet flow 72.0 4 10:02 0.0 3 0. 1 min. PV Temp B 14.0 60.0 ( 0.8 M 4 TIC100.0 20. Displaying is irrelevant to the limit for the number of windows that can be displayed on one HIS.0 2 100.0 4 100.0%) 8 00:04:20 100% F030703.3 M3/H 3 LIC100. TRTANK Tank A -Expert Trend Viewer File Edit Display 1 2 1 100.7.0 40. only one expert trend window can be displayed and it is displayed as a window even in full-screen mode. 1 min.0%) 80. 1 Sec.0 2 10:01 0. 100. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-56 3.0 5 100. PV Outlet flow 53. PV Level 3.

HIS offers the following OPC standard interface: Open Interfaces (Option) Data Access (DA) Server Function This function enables reading and writing process data. Normally. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-57 3.8 The HIS interface for supervisory computers is compatible with OPC (OLE for Process Control) Foundation specifications. Process Data Information Acquisition and setting of tag data item (scale.) registered in the system configuration. which requires expertise and much time.) process data. in addition to OPC interfaces. The library offers a wide range of interfaces as shown below. etc. for the communication with an OPC server. The use of this library enables the user to develop an application simply and efficiently. etc. Station Information Acquisition of various station data (model. Alarms & Events (A&E) Server Function This function is used to notify occurring alarms and events asynchronously. Alarm & Event Information Recognition of asynchronous alarms and events. the complex OPC communication protocol needs to be coded. CENTUM Data Access Library The CENTUM data access library processes the OPC communication protocol within the library. providing a simplified interface. which include Yokogawa’s original functions.2006-00 .3. operation status. The following messages are supported: • System alarm messages • Process alarm messages • Mode/status change messages • Sequence messages • Operation guide messages • Engineering maintenance messages • Operational record messages TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

2006-00 . Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-58 Historical Message Information Acquisition of historical messages.) and batch ID. Trend Data Information Acquisition of historical trend data. average value. etc.) Common Block Information Acquisition and setting of common block data and acquision data items. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Closing Data Information Acquisition of closing data (total value. Recipe Information Acquisition of recipe header information (recipe name. etc.3. recipe product name.

Commands include “Download (for data setting)” and “Upload (for data acquisition). for example. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-59 3.9 Using the PICOT( Process Information Controller) function. for recipe management. application created by Visual Basic) Flow of Process To use the function. The following figure shows the flow of the process. FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Functions (PICOT) (Option) Features • Data setting to FCS function blocks • Data acquisition from FCS function blocks • Microsoft Excel file macro execution • Starts programs (Windows general-purpose software.3. • Acquisition Product Definition File The file is used for data acquisition. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The function is convenient for frequent data setting and/or modification. A procedure consists of operation orders called commands. Process data is also read into an Microsoft Excel file. the setting data for function blocks on the control station is given from an Microsoft Excel file on the HIS. The acquired data is put in the file.” • Grade Definition File The file is used for data setting.2006-00 . It defines function block information and setting items. It defines function block information to be acquired. • Procedure Definition File The file is used to define procedures (orders) to be executed in the order of execution. the three Microsoft Excel files must be prepared as definition files in advance.

Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-60 The following figure shows the flow of the process.xls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 A Group Buf01 B Tag BD001 Prc0001S0101.3] USR3[1] USR4[3] USR5 SV DT01 DT02 Sheet3 D Value 30 46 52 40 12 85 77 66 33 29 20 20 69 45 72 51 E MIn 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 F Max 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Sheet4 Grade Definition File 1 Pdf0001.2006-00 . HIS Sequence process definition Excel File (*.xls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 A ID Tag01 B Tag Name BD001 Sheet1 Sheet3 Procedure Definition File Tag02 END Sheet1 BD002 Sheet2 C Item DT01 DT02 DT03 DT04 DT05 DT06 DT07 DT08 DT09 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT01 DT02 Sheet3 D Value E F Sheet4 Acquisition Product Definition File F030901.xls) FCS Read/write Y NY Function blocks F030902.xls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Executed in this order A Num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B Command GRADSET PRODUCTSET DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD SETFLAG UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD UPLOAD END Sheet2 C D Arg2 Arg1 0001 0001 Buf01 Buf02 Buf03 Buf04 Buf05 Buf06 Buf07 Buf08 Buf09 %SW1000S0101 PV Tag01 Tag02 Tag03 Tag04 Tag05 Tag06 Tag07 Tag08 Tag09 Tag10 Sheet4 E Arg3 UNIT01 Buf02 END Sheet1 FIC0001 BD002 Sheet2 C Item DT01 DT02 DT03 DT04 DT05 DT06 DT07 DT08 DT09 USR1[2. When “Download” or “Upload” is specified. the function on the HIS executes according to the Procedure Definition File corresponding to a message.3.ai Figure Definition Files Receiving a sequence message notification from the control station. Gdf0001.xls) Other programs FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Function %M3 Setting data Excel File (*.ai Figure FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Function TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. it refers to the Grade Definition File or Acquisition Product Definition File for processing data.

Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function (Option) This function can be used by Ethernet or a dial-up connection only. CENTUM CS 3000 Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function allows a remote PC(*1) with no CENTUM CS 3000 operation and monitoring functions to monitor plant operations. PV Temp A 25.7 DEGC 5 TIC200.0 2 100.0 3 0.0 20. 55. PV Level 3.0%) 80.0 2 10:01 0.2 °C TIC2002A Outer temp. it can display windows approximately equivalent to HIS windows though some functions are not available.0%) 8 FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes 00:04:20 100% FIS2003A Steam Coolant Reactor internal pressure Material system 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A Shipping :180. 98. TRTANK Tank A -Expert Trend Viewer File Edit 1 2 1 100.0 6 7 8 12/03/2000 10:02:20 1 FIC001.8 M 4 TIC100.0 /min Reactor A SW FIS2012A Shipping :180. PV Outlet flow 53.0 4 10:02 0.3 M3/H 3 LIC100.0 GRREACTORA Reactor control FIS2001A Reactor control TIC2001A Inside temp.0 4 100.0 5 10:03 0. Batch Quantity : ABC resin : #1234-C : 8000 Client PC 10:00 1 Ready 0.0 0. 1 min. and allows a remote PC(*1) with no CENTUM CS 3000 engineering functions to perform engineering. *1: It is called a client PC.ai Figure Examples of Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Connections TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Control network (Vnet) connection is not required.0 5 100. A maximum of eight simultaneous sessions (a session being the period of time on the server from log-on to logoff) can be run on one server for remote operation and monitoring. 100.0 3 10. If a PC(*1) that is located away from the instrument room is connected to the network.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping : 98. A client PC can individually display different screens regardless of the screens displayed on the server for remote operation and monitoring or on other clients.6 /min Office building Site Client PC Intranet CENTUM CS 3000 Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring V net Ethernet Central control room F031001.0 6 7 10:04 8 40. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-61 3. PV Temp B 14.10 With Windows Server 2003 Terminal Services.2 °C Product Recipe Lot No.0 (100.2006-00 .3. 10 Sec. PV Inlet flow 72. It is available even on low-speed line (128 kbps).1 DEGC 6 7 Sampling Period 1 Sec.1 M3/H 2 FIC002. The package for the operation and monitoring function or for the engineering function need not be installed in the client PC.0 ( 0.0 60. allowing the monitoring of plant operations. 1 min. 1 Sec.

remote monitoring for graphic/trend windows in offices far from the instrument room is possible.ai Figure Web Monitoring Function TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. By converting HIS files into HTML files and Java Applets.3.11 Web Monitoring Function makes it possible to display HIS graphic windows (graphic objects) and trend windows on a general-purpose WWW browser. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-62 3.2006-00 . HIS graphic/trend windows are converted into HTML files and Java Applets Web Monitoring Functions (Option) Web server Ethernet LAN/WAN Ethernet HIS General-purpose PC Monitoring graphic/trend V net FCS CS 3000 System F031002.

0 M3/H LL MV = 20.0 HH SL : 0.12 The builder window relevant to the operation and monitoring window currently displayed on an HIS can be accessed instantly. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-63 3.0 40.0 = 20.0 % 20.0 PH = PV = 63.2 M3/H PL SV = 30.2 M3/H 30.0 Toolbox Tool Box SYS HELP MODE = MAN ALRM : NR : 100.0 ML = 0.2 M3/H 30.0 GW = 0.1 % VL DV : 33. Configured Information Reference Function (Option) Access to Relevant Builders There are two ways to access builder windows relevant to the currently displayed operation and monitoring window: by clicking the Builder Quick Start button in the toolbox.ai Figure Accessing Relevant Builders TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.0 20.2006-00 .0 I = 20.0 100. or by entering the window name (or the tag name) in the name input dialog box.0 20.0 14:02 PV SV MV 14:03 14:04 14:05 14:06 System View (CS 3000)-DR0001 File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help 0.1 % VL = DV : 33.0 100.0 60.0 100.0 = 100.0 0.0 100.0 0.0 = 0.0 FIC100 Tank inlet flow MAN NR PV SV MV M3/H 63.0 100.0 0.0 % 20. which boosts efficiency of engineering such as debugging of graphic windows and troubleshooting of problematic computational expressions.0 40.0 D = 0.2 DL = SUM : 0 SVH = 100. FIC100 TUN Tank inlet flow CAL RAW FIC100 TUN Tank inlet flow CAL RAW FIC100 Tank inlet flow FIC100 Tank inlet flow MAN NR PV SV MV M3/H 63.0 = 0.0 100.2 M3/H PL = SV = 30.0 Ready 00:07 100% Builder Quick Start button Ready 00:07 100% a z 87 All Folders SYSTEM VIEW MYPJT + COMMON + - Opened Folder:DR0001 Name Type Modified Date FIC100 FIC101 FIC102 FIC103 FIC104 Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 BATCH FCS0101 + + CONFIGURATION SEQ_LIBRARY IOM SWITCH MESSAGE FUNCTION_BLOCK DR0001 DR0002 - 5 Function blocks Function key O FIC100 BDR System View (CS 3000)-DR0001 File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help a z 87 All Folders SYSTEM VIEW MYPJT + COMMON + - Opened Folder:DR0001 Name Type Modified Date FIC100 FIC101 FIC102 FIC103 FIC104 Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail Function Block Detail 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 2001/04/20 BATCH FCS0101 + + Input Window Name FIC100 BDR OK CONFIGURATION SEQ_LIBRARY IOM SWITCH MESSAGE FUNCTION_BLOCK DR0001 DR0002 Stn - - Name input dialog box 5 Function blocks F031101.0 = 0.0 DB = 0.1 FIC100 Tank inlet flow MODE = MAN ALRM : NR SH : 100.0 100.0 M3/H LL = MV = 20.0 60.1 ? 100.0 100.0 P = 100.2 DL : 0 SVH SUM = = = = = = = 100.0 80.3.0 80. Users can thus refer to configuration information during operation and monitoring with a one-touch operation.0 0.0 100.0 MH ML P I D GW DB = 100.0 HH = SH SL : 0.0 = 0.0 MH = 100.0 14:02 PV SV MV 14:03 14:04 14:05 14:06 0.0 PH PV = 63.

including application of electronic signatures to these electronic records. • Retention of historical messages as electronic records (PDF files). with joint use of Adobe Acrobat 5. Auxiliary storage Audit trail date server Optional Consolidated Historical Message Viewer Ethernet HIS HIS Consolidated Historical Message Viewer Meeting FDA Regulations (Option) Historical message file Historical message file V net FCS F031201. once the area has become full.0 from Adobe Systems Incorporated. at the PC for consolidated message management. using a personal computer. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-64 3. Consolidated Historical Message Viewer integrates the historical messages distributed at multiple HISs into a single PC having a sufficiently large disk capacity.2006-00 . This facilitates the audit trail (historical message) management required by FDA’s 21 CFR Part 11.13 Consolidated Historical Message Viewer embodies integrated management of historical messages collected at each HIS in a CENTUM CS 1000 system. • Searching and display of the historical messages that match particular conditions.3. Consolidated Historical Message Viewer enables the following: • Referencing and permanent retention of multiple HISs’ historical messages at a single PC. and allows the multiple historical message files to be referenced and retained permanently.ai Figure Consolidated Message Management Meeting FDA Regulations TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The message area size is fixed in an HIS and used as a rotary buffer in such a way that the oldest message will be deleted whenever a new message occurs.

HIS ENG Vnet/IP Bus 1 (control communication) Process data access Message FCS Vnet/IP Bus 2 (open communication) SIOS OPC server Communications bus of other PCS/PLC Other PCS or PLC F031401.0 interface stipulated by the OPC Foundation. SIOS and the OPC server are connected through Ethernet or Vnet/IP open communications (on the bus 2 side).2006-00 . SIOS is connected to the control bus (V net or Vnet/IP) as a CS 3000 station.3. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-65 3. It operates as a gateway that connects the CS 3000 system and the OPC server to PCSs. It allows the CENTUM CS 3000 to exchange data with other PCSs and to receive alarms and events generated at the other PCSs through the OPC server. SIOS exchanges data between other PCSs.14 The System Integration OPC Station (hereinafter referred to as SIOS) integrates process control systems (PCSs) from other into the CENTUM CS 3000 system.27. and acquires alarms and events through the OPC server to access the other systems according to the OPC DA 2. Moreover. the OPC server and SIOS can be configured on the same PC.ai Figure System Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. System Integration OPC Station (SIOS) (Option) System Configuration SIOS is a general-purpose PC-based station where the basic functions of SIOS are installed.

and the like SEE ALSO Please refer to GS 33Q05P10-31E for The System Integration OPC Station. or communications recovery are notified to HIS as system alarms. overview and graphic attribute) • Trend window (trends at one-second intervals cannot be displayed) • Faceplate window. Message Functions SIOS can send the following messages to the CS 3000 side. information required for responding to function blocks is available in standard packages. communications errors with the OPC server.3. Operation and Monitoring Functions 3-66 Functions of SIOS The SIOS provides the following functions. For STARDOM. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Operation and Monitoring Data acquired via SIOS can be displayed on the following HIS screens: • Graphic windows (with control. are all notified to the HIS as arbitrary character-string of sequence messages. • Notification of events detected by SIOS (system alarms): Messages such as start or stop of SIOS operation.27. • Notification of events from the OPC server (sequence messages): Alarms and events on the side of systems from other. regardless of event types or categories.2006-00 . which are notified by the A&E server. detailed information concerning other systems’ function blocks is needed. tuning window. Process Data Access Function We can operate and supervise other system’s function blocks from HIS like CS 3000 function blocks. In order to make other systems’ function blocks responding to that of CS 3000.

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-67

3.15

The primary objective of the Yokogawa Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal (VTSPortal ) enables you to put CENTUM CS 3000, Exaplog, Exapilot, Exaquantum, and PRM on the web site via the Windows terminal service.

Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal (VTSPortal)

General of VTSPortal
VTSPortal is to provide an integrated Human-Machine Interface (HMI) framework that promotes the idea of digital independence for all Yokogawa solutions. Digital independence is the ability to connect to any Yokogawa HMI application, over any network connection. The VTSPortal are for operational staff, engineering staff, and plant management staff in new or existing plants that deploy a mixture of Yokogawa products and who now wish to extend the reach of those applications to support remote or web access. Access is provided in the form of a Portal Web Site with customizable content on a peruser basis.

Potential Features of VTSPortal
• Support remote maintenance or engineering work for CS 3000 installations via a dialup or other WAN connection. • Support remote monitoring and operation for unmanned control areas. • Support connection of mobile field devices to a control room server for CS 3000 installations. • Support an aggregated access point for all applications. • Support application deployment on dedicated thin-client hardware.

SEE

ALSO

Please refer to GS 33Q02N81-31E for the VTSPortal.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.27,2006-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-68

VTSPortal System Architecture
The VTSPortal can be deployed in an internal LAN environment (e.g. intranet), a WAN environment with remote access capabilities (e.g. internet), or in a mixture that provides both LAN and WAN access.
WAN Portal Clients Laptop PDA Desktop PDA W-LAN Portal Clients
Modem

Remote Engineering Station
Internet

Portal Clients

W-LAN Tablet

Firewall Office Network W-LAN Access Point

W-LAN Laptop

Modem

VTSPortal Web Server

Plant Network CS 3000 HIS

Exapilot Server

VTSPortal Application Server (Exapilot)

VTSPortal Application Server (LHS1150/LHM1150)

W-LAN: Wireless LAN

Control Network

FCS

FCS
F031501E.ai

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.27,2006-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-69

3.16

CAMS for HIS deliver optimal alarm to the right person at the right time. CAMS for HIS representative functions are shown in the following:

Consolidated Alarm Management Software for Human Interface Station (CAMS for HIS) (Option)

General of CAMS for HIS
Consolidated Alarm Management Software (hereinafter called CAMS for HIS) is optional software which operates on HIS of CENTUM CS 3000 (hereinafter called CS 3000). It acquires various kinds of alarms and events in real-time which occur in CS 3000 system and other systems connected to CS 3000. Those alarms and events are notified to an operator with identifiers (e.g., purposes, user name, allowed time for response and alarm priority) used for sorting and value-added information (e.g., cause of alarms and how to handle them). Operators sort by identifiers a wide variety of alarms and events used at plants, using CAMS for HIS filtering and sort functions, so that they can receive only information they need in the most suitable timing. As a result, operators are able to perform safer, more efficient operation. This package offers environment in which engineering can be done in accordance with EEMUA No.191 (a guideline concerning engineering, management and procurement of alarm system, issued by EEMUA).

Functions of CAMS for HIS
CAMS for HIS representative functions are shown in the following:

Acquire a Wide Variety of Alarms and Events
It acquires alarms and events given out from CS 3000 as well as PRM, STARDOM and ProSafeRS which connected to CS3000, and integrate them on HIS.

Normalize/Standardize Alarms and Events
It standardizes information necessary to integrate and manage alarms and events: standardize alarm titles unique to each system; standardize notation system for time stamp; standardize alarm priority and plant hierarchy.

Re-classify Alarms and Events
As acquired alarms and events sometimes include alarms like events and events like alarms, they are re-classified.

Define Alarms and Events Attribute
For acquired alarms and events, it additionally defines value-added information including each attribute used for message filtering and sorting, cause of alarms and countermeasures as new attributes.

Suppress Unnecessary Alarms and Events Issuance
It is a function to suppress unnecessary alarm and event issuance. Suppressed alarms and events here are not displayed on CAMS for HIS message monitor.
TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.27,2006-00

3. Operation and Monitoring Functions

3-70

Supervise Alarm and Event Messages
By using CAMS for HIS, operators can integrate process alarms, system alarms and operation guide messages, which used to be supervised on different windows, on one window.

Test (EEMUA No.191 Compliant)
A function to give out virtual alarms and events to test if an alarm system is designed properly or not.

System Configuration Using CAMS for HIS
An example of system configuration using CAMS for HIS is shown below. CAMS for HIS, connected to OPC A&E server, manages messages given out not only from CENTUM but also from STARDOM and PRM. Alarms and events can be equalized among more than one HIS in which CAMS for HIS is installed. It is possible to specify the range of HIS where alarms and events are equalized. In specified HIS, every alarm and event including alarms via OPC is equalized. There is only one download master for CAMS for HIS Configurator. Database is equalized and managed by Download Master.
HIS

Download Master HIS.
HIS DB CAMS for HIS Configurator DB CAMS for HIS

Information which requires equalization among CAMS for HIS is equalized via open bus.
HIS

CAMS for HIS DB Subject to equalization

CAMS for HIS

Open bus Control bus
A&E A&E

Messages from CS 3000 are broadcast simultaneously to every STN by control bus.
SCS FCS PRM OPC Server OPC Server

Messages from OPC server is noticed to specific CAMS for HIS via open bus.

STARDOM FCN/FCJ
F031601E.ai

SEE

ALSO

Please refer to GS 33Q02N03-31E for the CAMS for HIS.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Dec.14,2007-00

4. Field Control Station Control Functions

4-1

4.

Field Control Station Control Functions
The Field Control Station (FCS) handles process control functions in CENTUM CS 3000. It can perform control functions – such as continuous control, sequence control, calculation – in continuous and batch processes, in a wide range of industries. This section describes the CENTUM CS 3000 FCS control functions. The FCS features include:

Four Types of FCS to Choose from, for Flexible System Configuration
You can choose the FCS for FIO, FCS for RIO, Compact FCS for FIO or Compact FCS for RIO, according to your application requirements – for system expansion or replacement.

Subsystem Integration Functions
Subsystems such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), data acquisition units, analyzers and the like can be transferred to the FCS by communication functions, integrating these subsystems with the FCS.

Support for Next-generation Field Instruments with Open Fieldbus
CENTUM CS 3000 supports the next-generation Foundation Fieldbus. It supports multiple devices, and fast, accurate transfer of multiple data items per device. Foundation Fieldbus faceplate blocks are a kind of regulatory control blocks.Foundation Fieldbus faceplates support 15 of the fieldbus function blocks as defined by the Fieldbus Foundation. Advanced fieldbus communications allow distributed control with fieldbus devices and optimum control in combination with an FCS.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

1 The configuration of FCS control functions is shown in the figure below. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-2 4.ai Configuration of FCS Control Functions Figure Configuration of FCS Control Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. FCS Control Functions Standard Control Functions Regulatory Control Functions Sequence Control Functions Calculation Functions Faceplate Block Functions Unit Management Functions Option Subsystem Communication Functions Value Pattern Monitors Offsite Block Functions Process input/output Software input/output F040101.2003-00 .15.4.

calculation blocks.1 for an example of a control drawing display.6. Refer to Item 3. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-3 4.15. The features of control drawings are described below.4. and create control functions which match your process. and makes it easy to perform engineering and maintenance. and the status of related groups of devices.1.2 Control Drawings (Option) A control drawing consists of two or more control blocks representing a control function. and sequence control blocks are interconnected in a manner similar to the conventional instrument flow diagrams. sequence control (sequence tables and logic charts) and calculations are performed by function blocks. The control drawing makes it easy to monitor process phases. Continuous control. Continuous control blocks.1 Function Blocks Function blocks are the basic unit for performing control and calculations. You can mix Continuous and Sequence Control You can mix continuous and sequence control in a control drawing.1. rather than monitoring on an individual-device basis. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Functionally this is the same as signals between function blocks on a single control drawing.2003-00 . 4. Free Signal Flow between Control Drawings Function block I/O signals may extend outside a control drawing to another control drawing.

W Cooling Discharge Washing H. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-4 Control Drawing Examples Examples of the instrument flow diagram and control drawing for a simple reactor process are shown below. B) Stirring Heating Reacting LS 100 LS 200 TVC100 TVC200 C.W Figure Reactor Process Flow Diagram FT200 FI200 (BSETU-2) V-200 SET100 (BDSET-1) FT100 FI100 (BSETU-2) V-100 TIC100 (PID) TT100 PB-100 PB-200 PB-300 PB-400 LS100 LS200 M-100 Sequence Table Block (ST16) TIC200 (PID) TT200 TVC100 TVC200 V-300 F040103.2003-00 .15.4.ai Figure Example of Control Drawing TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. FI 100 V-100 Raw material A V-200 Raw material B PB-100 Start PB-200 Stop PB-300 Reset PB-400 Emergency stop Flow diagram V-300 Stop F040102.ai FI 200 TIC 100 TIC 200 M-100 M SET 100 Start Raw material loading (A.

0 62. represent data items. as illustrated in the figure below. (Thermocouple and RTD temperature data are in temperature units.3 Regulatory Control Functions These functions support continuous-process feedback control.1.0 SET IN PID controller OUT block 71. manipulated variable outputs – such inputs and outputs to / from the block are expressed as 0 to 100%.ai Figure Continuous Control Block I/O Data Example TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. process variable inputs. SET BIN RL1 RL2 TIN TSI (TSW) INT (VN) (RLV1) (RLV2) Alarm processing SV MAN CSV RSV Input processing CAS AUT MAN RCAS PV Control calculations IN RAW CAS AUT Output processing MV OUT ROUT (PV. ∆MV) SUB RMV F040104.ai Figure Signal Flow in Regulatory Control Blocks For regulatory control blocks. Regulatory Control Blocks These control blocks are for controlling analog (continuous) process variables.2003-00 .5 Analog input module [0 to 300. The labelled boxes on the outside of the function block represent I/O terminals.15. ∆PV.8 150.) IN PID controller OUT block 63. Some representative regulatory control function blocks are shown below. Function blocks which support continuous processes are provided. Symbols in circles. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-5 4. and lists of items in brackets. cascade set points.0 DEGC] AAT141 Analog input module [0 to 100%] AAI141 Analog input module [0 to 100%] AAV542 F040105. MV.4.

and logic charts. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-6 4. blocks Valve monitoring blocks Input signal processing and testing Control calculations. process I/O.1. and software I/O.4. • Conditional control (supervisory type): Monitors the process status and performs conditional control. action rule processing Output signal processing Output signal processing (actions) Sequence Control Block Various function blocks Process I/O Software I/O F040106. process I/O and software I/O is illustrated below. Various function blocks Process I/O Software I/O Sequence Table Blocks Sequence aux. Types of Sequence Control • Program control (multi-phase type): Performs control according to a predefined program.4 Sequence Control Functions Sequence control performs several control steps in a predefined sequence.ai Figure Relationship of Sequence Control Block to other Control Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. The figure below shows how sequence control blocks (which contain the sequence control functions) relate to other function blocks. condition rule processing ······ ······ ······ ······ Y N Y Y Logic Chart Blocks Input signal processing and testing Logical operations Switch instrument block Control calculations. Methods of Representing Sequences You can create a sequence control program to run in the FCS using sequence tables.2003-00 . The relationship between sequence control blocks and other function blocks.15. Sequence Flow Charts (SFC).

ON SWA.PV.PV. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-7 Sequence Table Block Sequence table blocks are decision-table-format function blocks with input signal logic and output signal logic represented by Y/N patterns. Refer to item 3.PV.2 for an example of a sequence table block display. An example of a sequence table block is shown below.PV.2003-00 .15.6.ai Figure Sequence Table Block TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.H Valve A Valve B Y N Y N Action Step label to move to THEN ELSE A2 A1 Next step name Step A1 Step A2 F040107. They can connect to other function blocks.4.H VLVB.PV.ON SWB. Rule number Symbol PB001. and are ideal for creating monitoring sequences or phase progress sequences.ON Step label Comment Start button Switch A (Level HI) Switch B (Level LO) 01 A1 Y N Y 02 03 A2 Y Y Y Condition 04 05 06 A3 Step name Y VLVA.

2 temperature < -70 ºC RL002.L Cooling completed voice Comment Condition signal Logical operational element Action signal Comment F040111.2 Breaker valve Open Comment No.PV. counters and code conversion blocks.PV.X02. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-8 Logic Chart Blocks A logic chart consists of function blocks of interlock block diagram type. they are used with sequence table blocks or logic chart blocks.PV.2 TV101.15.PV.3 for an example of a logic chart block display. which describe the relationship between input signals (condition signals) and output signals (action signals) with logic-operation elements.4.ai Figure Example of Logic Chart Switch Instrument Blocks Switch instrument function blocks are used for monitoring. The following figure shows an example of a logic chart.LT DO0100.6.LT No.2003-00 .PV.1 temperature < -70 ºC RL001.PV. Stop Cooling %SW0500.L TCV all close command WO %SW0200.2 TV101.CSV.PV. and are mainly used for sequence I/O signal processing.L Automatic Breaker 1 Open Breaker 2 Open Breaker 1 open output Breaker 2 open output Cooling command TV100.ON %SW0150.PV.X01.PV.CSV.ON TM100 %SW0160.ON %SW0120. In general. for starting and stopping motors and valve actuators. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.PV.ON %SW0100. Valve Monitoring Blocks Valve monitoring blocks are used for monitoring the ON/OFF status of valves and for comparing the manipulated output signal with the answerback signal from the valve.ON %SW0050.PV.PV. Sequence Element Blocks Sequence Element Blocks include timers.NON Cooling transition Cooling print Level 1 Level 2 Stop Cooling TM100 TV100.2 %SW0201. and opening/shutting ON/OFF valves.L %PR0001. Refer to item 3. The main function is to control interlock sequences.

Field Control Station Control Functions 4-9 SFC Block Functions SFC Block Functions execute application programs expressed as Sequential Function Charts (SFCs). SEBOL Functions SEBOL (SEquence and Batch Oriented Language) is used to write application programs.15. SFC Blocks are used for large-scale sequence control and device control. each program step represents a group of actions.4 for an example of a SEBOL program.ai 1 2 3 4 6 7 Initialization Loading Heating Reaction Cooling Exhaust Figure SFC Blocks and SEBOL TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. etc. sequence control blocks. SEBOL can handle quite sophisticated sequences effortlessly.5 for an example of a SFC block display.4. and calculation blocks.6. Refer to Item 3. The I/O from other function blocks (continuous control blocks.6. �������������������� �������������� ������������������� �������������������� �������������� ������������������� ������������ ���������������� ������������������������������� ������������������������������ ����������������������������� 8 End ��� SFC Block SEBOL F040108. Each step of the SFC may be a sequence table or a SEBOL program (see Figure). Phase progress management (status display) is easy. Applications of SEBOL: • Executing multi-phase sequences • To construct instruments which handle complex combinations of sequential control and logical computation • To communicate with subsystems such as sequencers • To combine sequence processing and data processing • To create hybrid applications which perform functions that can’t be handled by standard function blocks. When an SFC program is created.) as well as process I/O data and soft I/O data can be input to a SEBOL block.2003-00 . Refer to Item 3. and computed outputs returned to such function blocks.

15.g. Logic Operation Blocks Logical operation blocks handle a fixed number of input and output points (contact and relay signals. 4. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-10 4. a single faceplate block. The following five types of calculation blocks are supported: Arithmetic Calculation Blocks Arithmetic calculation blocks handle a fixed number of input and output points. and operating the sequence-e. Sequence Faceplate Block A sequence faceplate block is used for displaying current sequence phase. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. An analog faceplate block is used for monitoring and controlling a continuous control application. and use a fixed algorithm to perform a logical operation. General-Purpose Calculation Blocks General-purpose calculation blocks handle a fixed number of input and output points. and can handle process I/O signals as well as analog signals from other function blocks. Hybrid Faceplate Block This combines analog faceplate block and sequence faceplate block functions. Function blocks include the following: Analog Faceplate Block A multi-block control loop may be treated as a single tag (faceplate). and internal switches).2003-00 . Auxiliary Blocks Auxiliary blocks are used for performing auxiliary control calculations.1.4.5 Calculation Functions Calculation blocks can process analog signals and contact signals used in continuous control functions and sequence control functions. and use a fixed algorithm to perform an arithmetic calculation.1. with push buttons.6 Faceplate Block Functions Multiple functions blocks may be treated as a single tag. Analog Calculation Blocks Analog calculation blocks are mainly used to modify the characteristics of the plant. and use a user-defined algorithm to perform a general-purpose calculation.

for a batch process in a chemical plant.7 Unit Management Functions The Unit Management Functions apply to groups of control functions representing major control process units such as furnaces and reactors and their associated control devices.2003-00 .ai Figure Examples of Units TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. in conjunction with batch and continuous process control.4. reactor and crystallization stages – can each be operated from a corresponding unit instrument. This is much simpler than representing the unit as a number of tags. the process equipment and control devices representing each stage of the process – e. Unit Management Functions can be used for various types of sequence control.15.g. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-11 4. A unit control instrument allows you to operate the whole group of process equipment and control devices that represent the unit. Material A Material B Unit A Unit B M TIC TIC STM Discharge M TIC TIC STM Discharge Semi-finished product C Material D Unit C TIC TIC STM Discharge M F040109. For example.1. and operating it as such.

Field Control Station Control Functions Unit instrument Unit instrument data Internal temperature =120 DEGC Unit procedure Initialization Charging-1 Heating 4-12 Operation Operation Function block Software I/O Process I/O F040110. For example. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. and heating. Unit procedures. charging 2. charging 1.15. so the same generic name may represent different tag names in different unit instruments. which represent the procedures for processing product recipes. Operations An operation represents a control process unit such as initialization. charging 1. and heating. and define a unit procedure to execute these operations in turn. Generic Name In the unit instrument. can manage the execution sequence of multiple operations.4. The relationship between tag name and generic name can be defined for each unit instrument. Operators can write a program without depending on a tag name. not a tag name but a generic name can be used.2003-00 . which enables easy-to-reuse program description. charging 2. you may define operations such as initialization.ai Figure Configuration of Unit Management Functions Unit Instruments Unit instruments perform control according to data settings and control algorithms.

ai Figure Example of Application with Offsite Blocks TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. created through the operation of a unit instrument. This block is used in combination with motor control blocks. One valve pattern monitor can monitor up to 512 valves simultaneously in a transfer-system plant.9 Offsite Block Functions (Option) The offsite block is a function block that controls the flow rate and batch quantity for offsite blending and shipment control at oil refineries.1. is used to monitor valves.4. 4. An application program (written in SEBOL).2003-00 . switch instrument blocks. Flow rate totalizer value Blending master control block BLEND Flow rate setpoint Switch instrument block Motor control block Batch set control block SIO MC-2 FSBSET TANK Switch instrument block Motor control block Batch set control block SIO MC-2 FSBSET Product storage tank TANK Valve Pump Flowmeter Control valve F040112. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-13 4.1.15.8 Valve Pattern Monitors (Option) The valve pattern monitor is a function block running in a Field Control Station (FCS). or enhanced switch instrument blocks for offsite batch shipment control or blending control of products.

10 List of Function Blocks Regulatory Control Blocks Regulatory control blocks perform calculation using analog process values for process control and monitoring.2003-00 .4. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-14 4.1. Table List of Regulatory Control Blocks (1/2) Model PVI PVI-DV PID PI-HLD PID-BSW ONOFF Controller ONOFF-G PID-TP PD-MR PI-BLEND PID-STC MLD MLD-PVI Manual Loader MLD-SW MC-2 MC-3 RATIO Signal Setter PG-L13 BSETU-2 BSETU-3 Signal Limiter Signal Selector VELLIM SS-H/M/L AS-H/M/L SS-DUAL FOUT Signal Distributor FFSUM XCPL SPLIT Pulse Count Input PTC Input indicator block Input indicator block with deviation alarm PID controller block Sampling PI controller block PID controller block with batch switch Two-position ON/OFF controller block Three-position ON/OFF controller block Time-proportioning ON/OFF controller block PD controller block with manual reset Blending PI controller block Self-tuning PID controller block Manual loader block Manual loader block with input indicator Manual loader block with Auto/Man SW Two-position motor control block Three-position motor control block Ratio set block 13-zone program set block Flow-totalizing batch set block Weight-totalizing batch set block Velocity limiter block Signal selector block Autoselector block Dual-redundant signal selector block Cascade signal distributor block Feedforward signal summing block Non-interference control output block Control signal splitter block Pulse count input block Name Block Type Input Indicator TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.15.

4.2004-00 .31. Field Control Station Control Functions Table List of Regulatory Control Blocks (2/2) Model SLCD SLPC SLMC SMST-111 YS Instrument SMST-121 SMRT SBSD SLCC SLBC STLD FF-AI FF-DI FF-CS FF-PID FF-RA FF-AO FF-DO Foundation FF-OS Fieldbus Faceplate FF-SC Blocks FF-IT FF-IS FF-MDI FF-MDO FF-MAI FF-MAO FF-SUNV YS controller block YS programmable controller block YS programmable controller block with pulse-width output YS manual station block with SV output YS manual station block with MV output lever YS ratio set station block YS batch set station block YS blending controller block YS batch controller block YS totalizer block Foundation Fieldbus analog input block Foundation Fieldbus discrete input block Foundation Fieldbus control selector block Foundation Fieldbus PID control block Foundation Fieldbus ratio block Foundation Fieldbus analog output block Foundation Fieldbus discrete output block Foundation Fieldbus output splitter block Foundation Fieldbus signal characterizer block Foundation Fieldbus integrator (totalizer) block Foundation Fieldbus input selector block Foundation Fieldbus multiple discrete input block Foundation Fieldbus multiple discrete output block Foundation Fieldbus multiple analog input block Foundation Fieldbus multiple analog output block Foundation Fieldbus simplified universal block Name 4-15 Block Type TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.

15. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-16 Sequence Blocks Sequence blocks perform calculation using logic values for control instrument level sequence control.2003-00 . Block Type Name Sequence table block Total of 64 input and output signals and 32 rules Sequence table block (M-size) (*1) Total of 96 signals (32-64 input and 32-64 output signals) and 32 rules Sequence table block (L-size) (*1) 64 input and 64 output signals and 32 rules Rule extension block Rule extension block (for M_ST16) (*1) Rule extension block (for L_ST16) (*1) Logic chart block Three-position switch SFC block Pushbutton SFC block Analog SFC block Switch instrument block with 1 input Switch instrument block with 2 inputs Switch instrument block with 1 output Switch instrument block with 2 outputs Switch instrument block with 1 input 1 output Switch instrument block with 1 input 2 outputs Switch instrument block with 2 inputs 1 output Switch instrument block with 2 inputs 2 outputs Switch instrument block with 1 input 2 one-shot outputs Switch instrument block with 2 inputs 2 one-shot outputs Timer block Software counter block Pulse train input counter block Code input block Code output block Representative alarm block Relational expression block Resource scheduler block Valve monitoring block TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Table List of Sequence Blocks Model ST16 M_ST16 Sequence Table L-ST16 ST16E M_ST16E L_ST16E Logic Chart SFC LC64 _SFCSW _SFCPB _SFCAS SI-1 SI-2 SO-1 SO-2 Switch Instrument SIO-11 SIO-12 SIO-21 SIO-22 SIO-12P SIO-22P TM CTS Sequence Element 1 CTP CI CO ALM-R Sequence Element 2 RL RS VLVM *1: Can be used in RFCS2.4. such as the control of interlock and process monitoring sequences.

4.15.2003-00 . Table List of Calculation Blocks (1/2) Block Type Model ADD Arithmetic Calculation MUL DIV AVE SQRT EXP LAG INTEG LD RAMP LDLAG Analog Calculation DLAY DLAY-C AVE-M AVE-C FUNC-VAR TPCFL ASTM1 ASTM2 AND OR NOT SRSI-S SRSI-R SRS2-S SRS2-R WOUT Logic Operation OND OFFD TON TOFF GT GE EQ BAND BOR BNOT General-Purpose Calculation CALCU CALCU-C Addition block Multiplication block Division block Averaging block Square root block Exponential block First-order lag block Integration block Derivative block Ramp block Lead/lag block Dead-time block Dead-time compensation block Moving-average block Cumulative-average block Variable line-segment function block Temperature and pressure correction block ASTM correction block: Old JIS ASTM correction block: New JIS Logical AND block Logical OR block Logical NOT block Set-dominant flip-flop block with 1 output Reset-dominant flip-flop block with 1 output Set-dominant flip-flop block with 2 outputs Reset-dominant flip-flop block with 2 outputs Wipeout block ON-delay timer block OFF-delay timer block One-shot block (rising-edge trigger) One-shot block (falling-edge trigger) Comparator block (greater than) Comparator block (greater than or equal) Comparator block (equal) Bitwise AND block Bitwise OR block Bitwise NOT block General-purpose calculation block General-purpose calculation block with string I/O Name TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Field Control Station Control Functions 4-17 Calculation Blocks Calculation blocks perform the calculation of analog and contact signals.

4. Field Control Station Control Functions Table Trend List of Calculation Blocks (2/2) Model TR-SS SW-33 SW-91 Auxiliary DSW-16 DSW-16C DSET DSET-PVI BDSET-1L BDSET-1C Batch Data BDSET-2L BDSET-2C BDA-L BDA-C Snap-shot Trend Block Three-pole three-position selector switch block One-pole nine-position selector switch block Selector switch block for 16 data Selector switch block for 16 string data Data set block Data set block with input indicator One-batch data set block One-batch string data set block Two-batch data set block Two-batch string data set block Batch data acquisition block Batch string data acquisition block Name

4-18

Block Type

Faceplate Blocks
Faceplate blocks are man-machine interfaces to let the operator operate a group of function blocks as a single tag.
Table List of Faceplate Blocks Block Type Analog Faceplate Model INDST2 INDST2S INDST3 BSI Sequence Faceplate Hybrid Faceplate PBS5C PBS10C HAS3C Name Dual-pointer indicating station block Dual-pointer manual station block Triple-pointer manual station block Batch status indicator block Extended 5-push-button switch block Extended 10-push-button switch block Extended hybrid manual station block

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

4. Field Control Station Control Functions

4-19

Unit Instruments and Operations
Unit instruments handle the operation and control of a process unit. Operations handle operation and control of individual phases of a unit.
Table List of Unit Instruments and Operations Model _UTSW _UTPB _UTAS _UTSW-N _UTPB-N _UTAS-N OPSBL OPSFC OPSFCP1 Operation OPSFCP2 OPSFCP3 OPSFCP4 OPSFCP5 Name Unit instrument with three-position switch Unit instrument with five-pushbutton switch Analog unit instrument Non-resident unit instrument with three-position switch Non-resident unit instrument with five-pushbutton switch Analog non-resident unit instrument SEBOL operation SFC operation SFC operation with floating-data parameters SFC operation with character-data parameters SFC operation with floating/character-data parameters SFC operation with integer/character-data parameters SFC operation with floating/integer-data parameters Block Type Resident Unit Instrument

Non -resident Unit Instrument

Enhanced MC/Switch Instrument Blocks
These are enhanced function blocks; they are for functions incorporated in ON/OFF controler blocks, motor control blocks, and switch instrument blocks. In addition to general instrument functions, these blocks allow the connection of two discontinuous contact inputs and outputs, providing functions that stop the detection of answer-back inconsistency alarm masks over a constant period of time from the switching operation.
Table List of Enhanced MC/Switch Instrument Blocks Model ONOFF-E ONOFF-GE MC-2E MC-3E SI-1E SI-2E Enhanced MC/ Switch Instrument SO-1E SO-2E SIO-11E SIO-12E SIO-21E SIO-22E SIO-12PE SIO-22PE Name Enhanced two-position ON/OFF controller block Enhanced three-position ON/OFF controller block Enhanced two-position motor control block Enhanced three-position motor control block Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 output Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 outputs Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input 1 output Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input 2 outputs Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs 1 output Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs 2 outputs Enhanced switch instrument block with 1 input 2 one-shot outputs Enhanced switch instrument block with 2 inputs 2 one-shot outputs Block Type

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

4. Field Control Station Control Functions

4-20

Valve Pattern Monitors (Option)
Valve pattern monitors are function blocks for monitoring valve-open and -closed statuses.
Table List of Valve Pattern Monitors Block Type Model VPM64 VPM128 VPM256 Valve Pattern Monitor VPM512 VPM64A VPM128A VPM256A VPM512A Name 64-data valve pattern monitor 128-data valve pattern monitor 256-data valve pattern monitor 512-data valve pattern monitor 64-data valve pattern monitor with alarm 128-data valve pattern monitor with alarm 256-data valve pattern monitor with alarm 512-data valve pattern monitor with alarm

Offsite (Option)
Offsite block is a function block used for batch blending and shipment control performed offsite at oil refineries and other plant facilities.
Table List of Offsite Block Type Offsite Model FSBSET BLEND Batch set control block Blending master control block Name

4.1.11

Process Input/Output and Software Input/Output

The Field Control Station (FCS) exchanges data between FCS function blocks and field devices outside the FCS through process inputs/outputs, communications inputs/outputs or field-bus inputs/outputs. Direct connections between function blocks allow data exchanges inside an FCS or between FCS’s; data exchanges through software inputs/outputs are also possible.

Process Input/Output
Process I/O stands for the signal communication interface between field devices and field control stations. Process I/Os are classified into two types according to the signals to be exchanged: analog I/O and contact I/O signals. Analog input: Current input, voltage input, mV input, thermocouple input, resistance temperature detector (RTD) input, potentiometer input, and pulse-train input. Analog output: Current output and voltage output. Contact input: Status input and pushbutton input. Contact output: Status output, pulse-width output and time-proportioning on/off output.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

4. Field Control Station Control Functions

4-21

Communications Input/Output
Communications I/Os are inputs and outputs for accessing various data incorporated in subsystems. Data communications are carried out using the communication I/O module that interconnects the FCS and subsystems. For communications with subsystems, refer to Chapter 5, later in this document.

Field Bus Input/Output
Field bus I/Os are inputs and outputs for accessing various data used in field devices.

SEE

ALSO

For more details on the fieldbus, refer to the Fieldbus Technical Information ( TI 38K03A01-01E).

Software Input/Output
Software inputs/outputs are virtual inputs/outputs that are provided by the FCS’s internal software. Two types of software inputs/outputs are available: an “internal switch,” which is used to exchange logical values between function blocks or other application functions; and a “message output,” which is used to inform the occurrence of an event. The organizational structure of software inputs/outputs is as shown below.
Software inputs/outputs Internal switch Common switch (%SW) Global switch (%GS) Message outputs Annunciator message (%AN) Sequence message Print message (%PR) Operator guide message (%OG) Multimedia start message (%VM) Sequence message request (%RQ) Supervisory computer event message (%CP) Supervisory computer event message for PICOT (%M3) Signal event message (%EV) SFC/SEBOL return event message (%RE)
F040113.ai

Figure Structure of Software Input/Output

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

4. Field Control Station Control Functions

4-22

Internal switches include the following: Common switches (%SW): These switches are internal switches used by various control functions to save shared logical values in an FCS. Global switches (%GS): These switches are internal switches with the same logical value on all stations in the same domain. Message outputs include annunciator messages and sequence control messages that are further classified according to the functions used. Annunciator message output (%AN): HIS annunciator functions simulate the annunciator instrument panel. Along with printout messages (%PR), messages with process data are also displayed. Printout message output (%PR): Print message outputs print data corresponding to an event that has occurred in the process. Operator guide message output (%OG): Operator guide message outputs alert the operator to the operator guide window in real-time. Multimedia function start message (%VM): This message starts the HIS multimedia function from the FCS. Sequence message request (%RQ): Sequence message requests enable the operator to start user programs or a batch trend. Supervisory computer message output (%CP): This message is used to output FCS event messages to the supervisory computer connected to the system. Supervisory computer event message output for PICOT (%M3): This message is used to output FCS event messages to the FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Package (PICOT) running on the HIS. Signal event message output (%EV): This message output enables a function block to inform the SEBOL control functions of event changes. SFC/SEBOL return-event message output (%RE): This message output enables a function block to inform the SFC block or SEBOL program of event changes performed by the SEBOL program.

TI 33Q01B10-01E

Oct.15,2003-00

In addition. For these connections. for a subsystem’s redundancy structure. allowing operation monitoring from an HIS.1 Communication I/O modules and subsystem communication packages are used to handle subsystem data similarly to function block data. Subsystem Communication Functions 5-1 5. dual-redundant functions are provided to handle communication data as control data.” and data exchanges through communications prevail over the use of analog or contact signals.1 Connecting Subsystems The FCS for FIO and compact FCS for FIO use communication I/O modules that are incorporated in a local node installed in an FCS or incorporated in a remote node installed in a cabinet mounted near the field for connecting subsystems. Subsystem Communication Functions Recently plant equipment or large motors have increasingly incorporated PLCs for equipment monitoring and automatic operation.15. RS communications cables (RS-232C modem cables. analytical equipment. RS-232C null modem cables.2003-00 . In addition. as in regulatory control blocks or sequence control blocks. 5. or RS-422/RS-485 cables) or Ethernet cables are used. Communications with Subsystems Through an FCS (Option) 5. FCU ESB bus FA-M3 HUB ALEIII Communication module Ethernet F050101.5. and various measuring instruments are being made “intelligent. CENTUM CS 3000 systems communicate with subsystems that handle communication data in two ways: using PLCs through an FCS and using an OPC server.ai Figure FA-M3 Example of Connection TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. The FCS for RIO and compact FCS for RIO use a communication I/O module built into an I/O module nest installed in the FCS to connect subsystems.1. weighing equipment.

1.2 Supported Subsystem Communication Packages To communicate with subsystems.5. Subsystem Communication Functions 5-2 5. Schneider’s Modicon and Yaskawa Electric Corporation’s Memocon-SC) • Siemens communication package (for Siemens’ SIMATIC S5) • SYSMAC communication package (for OMRON’s SYSMAC Series) • YS communication package (for Yokogawa’s YS100 SERIES and YEWSERIES 80) • YS communication package with direct connection (for Yokogawa’s YS100 SERIES) • Gas chromatography communication package (for Yokogawa’s gas chromatograph) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Subsystem communication packages that are supported are: • FA-M3 communication package (for Yokogawa’s FA-M3 and FA500) • DARWIN/DAQSTATION communication package (for Yokogawa’s DARWIN and DAQSTATION) • MELSEC communication package (for Mitsubishi general-purpose MELSEC sequencers) • MELSEC-A communication package (for Mitsubishi general-purpose MELSEC-A sequencers) • PLC-5/SLC 500 communication package (for Rockwell Automation’s PLC-5/SLC 500 family of programmable controllers) • Modbus communication package (for Yokogawa’s STARDOM.27. download the optional supported subsystem communication packages into the communication I/O module.2006-00 .

Subsystem Communication Functions Table Supported Subsystems and Communication Packages (Types of FCS and Specific Connection Cables) FCS for FIO/compact FCS for FIO Subsystem FA-M3 DARWIN/ DAQSTATION MELSEC-A MELSEC PLC-5/SLC 500 Modbus Siemens SYSMAC YS100 and YEWSERIES 80 YS100 with direct connection Gas chromatograph x: xx: –: *1: Communications packages available. Communication programs meeting communications requirements are created and supplied. refer to Section 2. Communications packages available. but limited in use.2007-00 .14.5. 5-3 FCS for RIO/compact FCS for RIO Serial communications x – x Ethernet communications x x x –: RS-232C cable connection only for SLC500 –: RS-232C cable connection only Note Ethernet Serial communications communications xx xx xx (*1) xx xx xx x xx xx xx – xx x x x xx – – – –: RS-485 cable connection only –: RS-485 cable connection only – –: RS-232C cable connection only FOUNDATION Fieldbus or Profibus devices can be connected. Communications are also possible with subsystems that are not described above. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Communications packages and redundant functions available. Redundancy is possible only for communication with DARWIN.7. For details.

4 Redundant Communication Functions A configuration meeting the redundancy on subsystems is possible with redundant communication I/O modules. control is switched.1. Those data stored in the communication I/O data area in the FCS can be connected to function block I/O terminals as in general-use analog/digital I/O signals. The FCS for FIO and compact FCS for FIO incorporate redundant serial communications functions. FCS Regulatory control block Sequence control block Data Communication I/O data area ALE111 Communication module I/O image Data reference /setting Subsystem communication package Ethernet Subsystem Subsystem data F050102.ai Figure Data Flow Between Function Blocks and Subsystem (When ALE111 Communication I/O Module is used) 5.3 Data Flow between Function Blocks and Subsystems Subsystem data are stored in the communication module I/O image area in the communication I/O module and sent to the FCS. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Data on the control side (the module in service) of the communication I/O module is set to the master communication data area while the stand-by communication I/O module performs data reading access but does not write the read data to any communication input data area. control is switched on a module basis even if the other port in the same module is not defective. If a failure is detected in the master-side communication I/O module or there is an error in communicating with subsystems. Data Reading A pair of communication I/O modules perform constant data reading access from subsystems asynchronously. Switchover between the control side and stand-by side of redundant communication I/O modules is performed on a per communication I/O module basis.2003-00 . Therefore.5. redundancy is not established for each port. communication redundancy requires two modules. Although each communication I/O module has two ports. Subsystem Communication Functions 5-4 5.1. if there is a failure in one port.15.

ai Figure Redundant Subsystem Communications (Models ALR111/ALR121 Communication I/O Modules are used) TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Normally.and even-numbered slots (oddnumbered slot + 1 slot number) on the same unit. Normally. Subsystem Communication Functions 5-5 Data Writing The data from function blocks are written to the master communication data area. data are overwritten on the new control side. odd-numbered slots are for the master side and even-numbered slots for the slave side. control is switched. and thus data writing access is performed. Hardware Configuration Communication I/O modules are installed in contiguous odd. Data Reading Regulatory control blocks Switch instrument blocks Sequence blocks Data Writing Regulatory control blocks Switch instrument blocks Sequence blocks Master Communication input data area read Master communication output data area write After switchover of communication right After switchover of communication right Module in service (on the master side) Stand-by module (on the slave side) ALR111 /ALR121 Module in service (on the master side) ALR111 /ALR121 After switchover of communication right Stand-by module (on the slave side) ALR111 /ALR121 ALR111 /ALR121 RS Serial communication card RS Serial communication card RS Serial communication card RS Serial communication card Reading when in stand-by Subsystem Subsystem F050103.2003-00 . data writing access is performed from the master side for the data set.5. If a failure is detected on the master side.15.

ai Figure System configuration where GSGW is on a PC separate from the OPC server When GSGW and the OPC server are on the same PC The subsystem network is connected directly to GSGW. Ethernet OPC server GSGW HIS/ENG V net Subsystem network Subsystem F050201. like FCS. Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (Option) GSGW is addressed to monitor subsystem data.2 The Generic Subsystem Gateway (GSGW) package is an operation and monitoring station for subsystems such as PLCs.ai Figure System configuration where GSGW and the OPC server are on the same PC TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. For OPC servers. PLC supplier or third-party vender servers are used. GSGW can communicate with subsystems using a general-use OPC DA interface through an OPC server. make sure that if will cause no problem beforehand. It does not incorporate control function blocks such as PID blocks and the like.5. and the assigned function blocks can be operated and monitored from a human interface station (HIS). Note: If an OPC server of third-party vender runs on the same PC as GSGW.15. Subsystem data are assigned to GSGW function blocks. With its general-use PC platform. GSGW/ OPC server Ethernet HIS/ENG V net Subsystem network Subsystem F050202. System Configuration GSGW is connected to a V net and Ethernet. PCs for OPC server and GSGW are needed when connecting to multiple OPC servers.2003-00 . Subsystem Communication Functions 5-6 5. Insert an interface card connected to the subsystem network into GSGW. Connections to an OPC server are classified in two types as given below: When GSGW is on a PC separate from the OPC server Connection to the subsystem network is made through an OPC server through Ethernet.

. HIS XXXX. Data stored in the data buffer are assigned to the communication input/output data storage area. These assigned data can be accessed from the function blocks or sequence tables in the same process as in a normal FCS.15...ai Figure Data Flow of Subsystems TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.. Subsystem Communication Functions 5-7 Summary of Communications with Subsystems Communications in cases where GSGW basic functions and the OPC server are on the same PC are summarized below: Subsystem data acquired via an OPC DA server are stored in the buffer. Monitoring Operation Message occurrence V net GSGW GSGW basic control function Regulatory control function block Sequence control function block Communication input/output data strage area Data buffer OPC client OPC server Subsystem comunications network Subsystem data F050203.2003-00 .5.

Engineering Functions The CENTUM CS 3000 engineering functions are used for system generation – for creating the databases necessary for monitoring. tests can be performed on an Engineering HIS (ENG) (you can switch between monitoring/ operation and engineering windows). dedicated machine is not required. the engineering functions run on Windows on a general purpose PC.01. Actual FCS hardware is not required.6. Reusable Engineering Data • Necessary fragments of engineering data can be easily reused in another station or another project. “Virtual Test” Functions • The control functions can be simulated on a PC. and standardize control. The engineering functions are described below. several people can share an Engineering database on a network. concurrent engineering is possible. Alternatively. engineering databases created on separate machines can be merged. Engineering Functions 6-1 6. TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb. A special. You can even run the engineering functions on an HIS – together with operation and monitoring functions – and easily switch between operation/monitoring and engineering windows. So you can perform tests to validate each program segment immediately after you complete it. Concurrent Engineering • Using Windows File sharing. Run on General Purpose PC • Like the operation and monitoring functions. operation and control – and for maintenance. So you can reuse special control know-how.2001-00 . reduce engineering. if you wish.

01.6.ai Configuration of Engineering Functions Figure Configuration of Engineering Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.2001-00 .1 The figure below shows the configuration of Engineering Functions. Engineering functions Standard functions System view Each builder Project common HIS builder FCS builder Test functions Virtual test Target test Expanded test Utility functions Self-documentation Tag name search F060101. Engineering Functions 6-2 6.

Engineering Environment Engineering and Operation/Monitoring Functions on the same PC When Engineering and Operation/Monitoring Functions share the same PC: Engineering functions Operation & monitoring functions HIS Engineering data V net FCS (Control functions) F060201.01.6.2001-00 .2 Different operating environments for the Engineering Functions are illustrated below.ai Figure Engineering and Operation/Monitoring Functions on the same PC Engineering Functions on dedicated PC When using Engineering Functions on a dedicated PC: Ethernet Engineering functions Operation & monitoring functions PC Engineering data V net FCS (Control functions) HIS F060202.ai Figure Engineering Functions on a dedicated PC TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb. Engineering Functions 6-3 6.

CS 1000 and CS 3000. When defining the CENTUM CS 3000 project as the upper-level project. In this function. station name. reducing the time involved. Engineering Functions 6-4 Multiple Project Connection Functions (Option) From CENTUM CS 3000 operation and monitoring functions (HIS). part of the lower-level project database (tag list) could be read into the upper-level database and operated/monitored by tag number. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. CS 1000 and CS 3000 project databases.6. • Changes to lower-level project tag lists (tag names added/changed/deleted) are automatically reflected in the upper-level project. The Multiple Project Connection Functions add an ID prefix to distinguish duplicate names in multiple projects. A multiple project connection example is shown below. Representative data includes tag name.2003-00 . Other features are as follows: • Multiple systems on the same control bus. so the scope of operation and monitoring functions is much wider. etc. This function facilitates large-scale plant distributed engineering and plant expansion. • Lower-level project control statuses (control drawings. you can totally operate and monitor plants configured by CENTUM CS.) can be displayed and monitored.ai Figure Multiple Project Connection Example In the CENTUM CS. plant hierarchy names and engineering units.15. In previous multiple project connections. So project connection does not change the original names. CENTUM CS project ICS EWS FCS CENTUM CS 3000 current project HIS ENG FCS BCV ICS EWS V net FCS HIS ENG FCS VL net HIS ENG FCS V net CENTUM CS 3000 project HIS ENG FCS V net BCV BCV CENTUM CS project Scope of operation and monitoring CENTUM CS 1000 project CENTUM CS 3000 project F060203. various name-data (definitions) exist. CS 1000 and CS 3000 projects) from operation and monitoring functions (HIS) defined in the upper-level project. logic charts. • System statuses and FCS statuses of lower-level project can be displayed. you can operate and monitor multiple lower-level projects (CENTUM CS. connected by communication gateway (CGW) or bus converter (BCV) are supported. the upper-level project operation and monitoring functions keep the connected lower-level project database (data necessary for operation and monitoring).

ai Figure Merging of Engineering Data TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.2003-00 . concurrent engineering is possible.6.1 Concurrent Engineering Using Windows File sharing. several people can share an Engineering database on a network.2. Concurrent Engineering on a Network Ethernet Engineering functions PC Engineering data V net FCS (Control functions) PC HIS Operation & monitoring functions Concurrent engineering via V net F060204. Engineering Functions 6-5 6. Alternatively.15.ai Figure Concurrent Engineering on a Network Merging of Engineering Data Engineering functions PC Engineering data Engineering data V net FCS (Control functions) Engineering data merge Operation & monitoring functions HIS Engineering functions F060205. engineering databases created on separate machines can be merged.

and checks the individually-checked functions on the above test and execution timing. Individual Test This test uses the virtual test function. start from this stage.2001-00 . Overall Test This test uses the target test function with a real FCS. A number of engineers can perform testing simultaneously. Engineering Functions 6-6 6. Specification design Engineering Procedure Frame design Design details System generation Individual test Overall test Actual process test Work phase F060302.6. A number of engineers can work on the system generation concurrently (Concurrent engineering).01.ai Figure Flow of Engineering Work System Generation If the design of detailed specifications is not required. though this does not require field wiring.3 The following figure illustrates the flow of engineering work involved in creating a new project. TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.

When changing or expanding the current configuration. You can create several different projects for a system. Engineering Functions 6-7 6. FCS and HIS. • Allows you to execute individual builder functions. • Allows you to execute test functions to validate the database.6. you can create a new project (based on the current project) – so that the current database is not affected – and perform configuration. • Allows you to download a database to the corresponding FCS or HIS.1 The Standard Engineering Functions consist of system view (a tree view of the database) and the builder programs that define each of the functions. • Allows you to save FCS tuning parameters. This is called the current project.) in the engineering database. HIS etc.4. Simply double clicking an item in the tree view launches the corresponding builder program. and virtual testing. SysView-WINDOW File Edit View Tool Project FCS HIS Help a z All folders SYSTEM VIEW MYPJT + COMMON FCS0101 HISO124 CONFIGURATION HELP WINDOW OV0001 GR0001 OV0002 GR0002 CG0001 TG0001 TG0002 87 Current folder : WINDOW Name Type OV0001 Overview OV0002 Overview TG0004 Trend display pen assignment TG0005 Trend display pen assignment TG0006 Trend display pen assignment TG0007 Trend display pen assignment TG0008 Trend display pen assignment TG0009 Trend display pen assignment TG0010 Trend display pen assignment TG0011 Trend display pen assignment TG0012 Trend display pen assignment TG0013 Trend display pen assignment TG0014 Trend display pen assignment TG0015 Trend display pen assignment Update date/time 1997/08/20 19:07 1970/01/01 09:00 1970/01/01 09:00 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 1997/08/20 19:07 140 Objects F060301. one of which is the configuration of the current running system. The main functions of the system view are as follows: • Displays a hierarchical view of the engineering data.ai Figure System View TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.4 6. • Allows you to create new engineering data for projects. Projects A project is an individual system configuration database containing configuration information for all FCS and HIS stations in the system. Standard Engineering Functions System View The System View provides a hierarchical (tree) view of components (FCS. • Allows you to execute self-documentation functions.15.2003-00 . on the new project.

6. Defines engineering unit symbol. and alarm status character strings. Engineering Functions 6-8 6. Defines state transition matrix. Defines unit procedure. Defines SFC sequences. Defines status change command character string. Defines the processes of sequence messages sent from FCS. Defines the specifications for terminals of an input/output module. Defines annunciator messages. tag name. Defines switch position label. Defines the order of execution.2 Builder The builder contains programs to generate project common functions. Displays system-specific data status. Defines multiple project connection. Assigns data items to trend record pens. Specialized builder programs handle each of hese functions. Defines operation marks used on an HIS. tag name. Defines each point of devices connected to communication module.2003-00 . Defines the trend block data acquisition cycle and the number of samples. Performs Graphic windows definition. Defines the schedule of Windows applications. Defines Help for tags and windows. Defines plant hierarchy.4. Category Project Common Switch position label State transition matrix Alarm processing table Alarm priority level System-specific status character string viewer Status change command character string HIS constant Graphic window Trend data acquisition pen assignment Trend record Trend display pen assignment Scheduler Sequence message request Function key assignment Panel-set Help dialogue FCS constant IOM Communication input/output Common switch Annunciator Operator guide Printout message User-defined status character string Defines user-defined status character string. A list of builder programs is shown below. Edits control drawing or logic chart status display file. Defines the windows combination for panel-set. Defines alarm processing table. Table List of Builder Programs (1/2) Builder Name Station configuration viewer Security Operation mark Multiple project connection Plant hierarchy Engineering unit symbol Description Displays station addresses and models in the system. Defines operator guide messages. Defines the detailed specifications of each function block. operation and monitoring functions. Defines signal events. Defines various constant values on an FCS. model of each function block.15. Defines the order of execution. model and connection of each function block in a graphical format. block status. Defines printout messages. Defines SEBOL user functions. Defines global switches. Defines various constant values on an HIS. Defines common switches. and control functions. Defines the function key assignment. Displays the trend display pen assignment. Operation and Monitoring Functions (for HIS) Control Functions (for FCS) Signal event Global switch Function block list Control drawing Function block details Status display SEBOL user function SFC sequence Unit procedure TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Defines alarm priority level. Defines security such as HIS user management and access rights for tags. block mode.

Defines product control window. Defines process management functions. Defines common block. Defines tag lists and messages of existing FCSes. Communication CGW constants Gateway Process management function Batch functions Common block Unit common block Product control Train TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.6.2003-00 .15. Defines various CGW constants. Defines the common block used by unit instruments. Defines Train. Engineering Functions Table Category 6-9 List of Builder Programs (2/2) Builder Name Description Bus converter BCV constants tag list generation Defines various BCV constants.

and other settings. Receiving Communications from Other Stations Virtual control stations can send messages to other control stations.6. virtual control stations start/stop other FCS’s on a per FCS basis. Engineering Functions 6-10 6. This is useful for investigating problems. the station is stopped. alarm settings.2003-00 . Test Functions (Option) Virtual Test Functions The virtual test functions use FCS simulation (virtual FCS) to test the system configuration on a single Personal Computer. Messages may also be generated just one time.15. and offer the following debugging support functions: One-shot Execution Functions Function blocks may be executed just one time. Snapshot Functions Using snapshot functions. then stopped. You can check that calculations are being executed properly. Step Execution After a function is executed a specified number of times (at the control period) it stops. and confirm that (sequence trigger) messages are being generated. PID control block parameters. You can confirm the control operation. The main functions are as follows: Virtual control stations can be started and stopped.5 The Test Functions allow combinations of monitoring/operation and control functions to be tested before being put into operation. In addition. tuning parameters. testing of a completed module can be performed while another module is being configured. Breakpoint Functions You can specify a break condition for a function block. When the break condition becomes true. allowing the confirmation of communication functions. common switch status. annunciator status. can be validated and saved each time you change the system configuration. TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. Tuning Parameter Save Functions Tuning parameters used in a virtual test can be saved. You can operate several virtual FCS at the same time. You can set up to eight break conditions. Virtual test functions and target test functions allow system configuration and testing time to be greatly reduced. and I/O status can be saved or retrieved.

Engineering Functions 6-11 Virtual test function is shown below.01.6.ai Figure Virtual Test Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.2001-00 . HIS HIS V net FCS F060501. CENTUM CS 3000 Virtual test FCS simulator Operation & monitoring functions Operation & monitoring functions and engineering functions are required.

or – if it exists – you can specify that it be ignored (I/O switching).ai Figure Target Test Functions (I/O Switching) TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct. HIS V net I/O switching image IN TAG01 PID I/O simulator (First-order lag function) I/O switching OUT FCS F060502. As well as virtual test functions there are debug support functions. The virtual process receives the control output from the FCS. The virtual process may use first order lag and the like to model the actual process. One-shot Execution Functions Step Execution Breakpoint Functions Tuning Parameter Save Functions Profiler Display Functions CPU usage and FCS internal status are displayed.2003-00 . and the response of the virtual process is connected to the FCS process variable input.6. Actual field wiring is not required. Engineering Functions 6-12 Target Test Functions These use actual HIS and FCS for the test.15. The main functions are summarized below. You can also simulate a virtual process in an FCS.

6.2001-00 . PC1 PC2 PC3 Virtual FCS Virtual FCS Virtual FCS Operation and monitoring functions Ethernet F060403.ai Figure Testing Multiple Virtual FCSes from Multiple PCs Operating Same Virtual FCS from Multiple PCs A virtual FCS on a PC can be operated from multiple PCs.ai Figure Operating Same Virtual FCS from Multiple PCs TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.01. Test Multiple Virtual FCSes from Multiple PCs Virtual FCSes distributed over multiple PCs resemble an actual plant. • Distributed engineering of FCS. and several virtual FCSes can be tested simultaneously. PC1 Operation and monitoring functions PC2 Operation and monitoring functions PC3 Operation and monitoring functions Virtual FCS Ethernet F060404. Engineering Functions 6-13 Expanded Test Functions Expanded Test Functions can be used with standard test functions to allow FCS simulation. and engineering functions to be used among several PCs utilizing communications. • Operate same virtual FCS from multiple PCs. operation and monitoring functions. You can improve engineering efficiency by the following engineering and tests: • Test multiple virtual FCSes from multiple PCs.

PC1 Operation and monitoring functions PC2 Project database Disk shared Project database Virtual FCS Engineering functions Operation and monitoring functions Engineering functions Ethernet F060405.6.2001-00 . Engineering Functions 6-14 Distributed Engineering of FCS Engineering of a single virtual FCS may be performed simultaneously from multiple engineering functions.ai Figure Distributed Engineering of FCS TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.01.

Edit Headers. Self Documentation (Option) These functions print engineering data for final document. Footers This allows you to edit headers and footers. • Detail (setting item) printing: TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb. You can print a station unit. and some utilities are regular Windows NT applications. or by modification date. Edit Table of Contents This allows you to freely assign a section number to each station.2001-00 . and displays references. Specify Type of Printing You can specify any of the following types of printing: • Normal printing: • Simple printing: Undefined fields are printed as blanks. Print All Data This function prints all data in the project. Tag Name Search This searches for tag names within a specified range. Utility Functions Resource Usage Status Display This displays the resource usage status for function blocks.01. Engineering Functions 6-15 6. Printout of Individual Items This prints separately for each builder. Even tag-level items are printed. Only defined fields are printed out.6 Some utilities are provided for use from the System View.6. Tuning Parameter Printout This prints tuning parameters.

ai Figure Example of Self-Documentation for Function Block Detail Definitions TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.SET 004 STTCA102 SPLIT 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 LIA100 LIA101 XVA1001 XVA1001OUT XVA1002 XVA1002OUT XVA1003 XVA1003OUT XVA1004 XVA1004OUT XVA1005 XVA1005OUT XVA1006 XVA1006OUT XVA1007 XVA1007OUT XVA1008 XVA1008OUT XPA1001 XPA1001OUT XGA1001 XGA1001OUT XVAS1001 XVAS1001OUT XLAS1001 PVI PVI SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SIO-11 SI-1 Tag comment A1 Inner temp Program A1 Inner temp Control A1 Outer temp Control A1 Temp reguiation Split A1 Level AS1 Level A1 Bottom valve A1 Pull out valve A1 N2 Push valve A1 Drain valve A1 Steam valve A1 Cold Water valve A1 Jacket dren valve A1 Air open valve A1 Pull out P A1 Agitator AS1 Bottom valve AS1 Empty exam & notic Scale LO limit Setpoint input connection 0 0.0 100.SET 002 TCA101 PID TCA102.0 0.2003-00 .SET 003 TCA102 PID STTCA102.0 150.0 0 0.0 0. Tag Name Model Output connection 001 PGTCA101 PG-L13 TCA101.6. Engineering Functions 6-16 A printout example is shown below: Function Block Lists XXXXXXXXXXXX Header XXXXXXXXXXXX Function block detail definitions Comment No.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX Footer XXXXXXXXXXXX F060601.15.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scale HI limit 0 150.0 0 100.

2001-00 .01.ai Figure Self-Documentation for Graphic Windows TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.R °C + XVA1005 CW + HW CW + XVA1007 + + XVA1006 CIP XVCIPA2 XVA1001 XVA1004 XVA1002 XPA1001 Drain + XVA1003 Drain N2 XXXXXXXXXXXX Footer XXXXXXXXXXXX F060603.: RRRR.R °C LIA101 RRRR.: RRRR. Engineering Functions 6-17 Graphic Definitions XXXXXXXXXXXX Header XXXXXXXXXXXX Panel type: Size: Window update period: Graphic window 1024 x 686 1 second Unit : RA001 Mode : CCCC Status : CCCCCCCCCC Phase : CCCCCCCCCCCC Batch No.R % + TCA102 Temp. : CCCCC Recipe : CCCCCC : RA001 Dialog + + + + #1 Mesuring XVM1A1 XVCOSA1 XVAS1001 + AS1Blending CIP XGA1001 M XVCIPA1 XVA1008 + TCA101 Temp.6.

0 IKCALCU2 M3/H CALCU VELLIM VELLIM OUT SET IKFOUT FOUT J01 IKST16 ST16 IKCALCU1 CALCU J02 FAPIDSTC.2003-00 .0 Status display window 800 x 536 5 seconds 0.6.J02 SET IN FIC300 PID MV Flowrate control 1 IN IKLAG LAG CPV IKDUMY PVI S11 S12 CPV FALAG LAG IN %Z171101 FA500 W0001 PV FAPVI-DV PVI-DV IN %Z172101 FA500 B0001 %Z173101 FA500 D0001 SET FASW-33 S10 IN FAPIDSTC SW-33 PID-STC OUT XXXXXXXXXXXX Footer XXXXXXXXXXXX F060602. Engineering Functions 6-18 Control Drawing Definitions XXXXXXXXXXXX Header XXXXXXXXXXXX Panel type: Size: Window update period: 0.ai Figure Self-Documentation for Control Drawings TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.0-300.SET IKFOUT.15.0-100.

8 Using this function. offline maintenance only): • FCS power switching from single to dual-redundant • Fast scan period • MC (Motor Control) instrument block pulse width setting • MC instrument block start interval • MLD-SW block auto mode (AUT/CAS) setting • SEBOL statement “Drive” statement operation type • SS-DUAL PV update during deviation alarm • Alarm notify action when all AOF released • User-defined status character string • Alarm processing table • Alarm priority level • Status change command character string • State transition matrix Online Maintenance Functions 6. without any effect on other than the modified functions – i.31.ai Figure Remote Maintenance TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.6. Apart from items which would affect the continnuity of control. Yokogawa’s service section experienced systems engineers diagnose the overall operating condition of your system. the effect on plant operation is minimized.7 The online maintenance functions allow you to modify the control functions during online control. To change the following functions requires that the CPU be stopped (i. HIS Modem Remote Maintenance (Option) Diagnosis support system Remote terminal Exchange Exchange Modem FCS User’s CENTUM CS 3000 system [Public switched network] Yokogawa’s service section remote maintenance system F060801.2004-00 . your CENTUM CS 3000 system can be connected to Yokogawa’s service section support system in a public network for remote maintenance within the scope of specified user-security.e.e. Engineering Functions 6-19 6. most settings can be modified using online maintenance functions.

Applicable Data for Data Exchange • FIO Data • FOUNDATION fieldbus Device Data Data Transfer Unit The data transfer unit can be selected from the following • FCS • The node • The I/O Card • Drawing Export Function The Export function converts the database of CS 3000 into a form that allows it to be loaded into the SmartPlant Instrumentation side. CS 3000. Engineering Data Exchange Function The CS 3000 engineering function exchanges the engineering data with SmartPlant Instrumentation interactively. TI 33Q01B10-01E Mar. Coordination with SmartPlant Instrumentation CENTUM CS 3000 has the interface function with SmartPlant Instrumentation. and realize an efficient engineering work. If the database of SmartPlant Instrumentation is set a master.31. It is used to transfer the database on the CS 3000 side to the master when SmartPlant Instrumentation is introduced. which allows the correction of the database of SmartPlant Instrumentation to be reflected in the data of CS 3000. Consolidating the management of the database and providing the interactive interface between SmartPlant Instrumentation and CS 3000 prevent overlap of inputting the same data into SmartPlant Instrumentation and CS 3000 and omission or mistake of correction.2005-00 . SEE ALSO Please refer to GS 33Q02B30-31E for coordination with SmartPlant Instrumentation. Also. which enables the CS 3000 builder and SmartPlant Instrumentation to reuse the common data such as the tag name and the span each other. Engineering Functions 6-20 6.9 SmartPlant Instrumentation is Intergraph Corporation’s instrumentation design and information management tool that manages a database on plant instrumentation. CS 3000 can reflect the engineering data in SmartPlant Instrumentation when SmartPlant Instrumentation is introduced newly.6. the SmartPlant Instrumentation side can consolidate the management of the plant engineering data including the engineering data of DCS. Import Function This function detects the difference between the databases on the SmartPlant Instrumentation side and on the CS 3000 side and reflects the difference in the CS 3000 side.

It facilitates applying the device database created in the engineering work to an actual device. the field devices can be replaced efficiently. Engineering Functions 6-21 6. • This function manages the actual state of the device connected with the fieldbus segment (whether the engineering database is reflected in the actual machine. The software downloading results are reflected in PRM via HIS.6.31. whether there is any communication abnormality) and can take the appropriate responses to the device state. whether it is combined to the CS 3000 system.10 DevicePanel is a function included in the fieldbus engineering function package. TI 33Q01B10-01E Mar. • This function allows the software downloading function to work. (using the Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function) DevicePanel Functions Relation to Other Functions • This function is called a device information list display function by the CS 3000 fieldbus builder. • The information on the device connected with the segment can be visually displayed. • It is available in the field because it operates even on the PC not connected directly with the control bus. Moreover. • The database created in the engineering work can be applied to the actual device easily and easy replacement work of the devices can be realized.2005-00 .

Protection Layers of Plant and Safety Instrumented System IEC 61511 utilizes the concept of protection layers in order to achieve safety.ai Figure Protection Layers and Positioning of Safety Instrumented Systems TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) ProSafe-RS is a safety instrumented system conforming to IEC 61508. This chapter explains the various features and functions of safety instrumented systems that ProSafeRS provides. Each protection layer is required to set quantitative risk reduction goals as well as means of achieving these goals independently without interfering with other layers. ISA S84. (IEC 61511. According to this idea of protection layers. freedom from unacceptable risk.2006-00 .7.00. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-1 7. safety instrumented system is positioned within the mitigation and prevention layers.01) COMMUNITY EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLANT EMERGENCY RESPONSE MITIGATION Mechanical mitigation systems Safety instrumented control systems Safety instrumented mitigation systems Operator supervision Mechanical protection system Safety instrumented control systems Safety instrumented prevention systems Process alarms with operator corrective action PREVENTION CONTROL and MONITORING Basic process control systems Monitoring systems (process alarms) Operator supervision Process F070001.

are divided into 16 phases as shown in the figure below. 1 2 3 4 Concept Overall scope definition Hazard and risk analysis Overall safety requirements 5 Safety requirements allocation Overall planning Overall operation and 6 maintenance planning 7 Overall safety validation planning Overall installation and 8 commissioning planning Safety-related systems: E/E/PES 9 Realisation (see E/E/PES safety lifecycle) Safety-related systems: other 10 technology Realisation 11 External risk reduction facilities Realisation 12 13 14 Overall installation and commissioning Overall safety validation Overall operation. the tasks involved.ai Back to appropriate overall safety lifecycle phase 15 Overall modification and retrofit 16 Figure Safety Lifecycle TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.2006-00 . For example. “Hazard and risk analysis” shown in the third frame sets requirements to clarify the hazards and hazardous events that may occur in a plant and its control devices (e. In the safety lifecycle. and the required tasks to be achieved in each phase are defined. maintenance and repair Decommissioning or disposal F070002.g. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-2 Safety Life Cycle IEC 61508 specifies the management of safety-related systems in terms of lifecycles. DCS).7.. from the conceptual stage in which a basic safety system is designed to the decommissioning of the system. The purpose of these definitions is to minimize the likelihood of human-induced errors.

7. The higher the SIL level. specifying SIL3 as the safety integrity requirement for a safety instrumented system means requiring the safety instrumented system to ensure that the frequency of risk occurrence is reduced to less than 1/1000 under the current conditions. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-3 Scales of Safety Evaluation IEC 61508 introduces the concept of Safety Integrity Level (SIL) as a method for showing the safety integrity requirements. The safety integrity level is classified into four levels according to the value of Probability of Failure on Demand (PFD). PFD is the malfunction probability of a safety instrumented system due to a failure when actuation of the system is requested. the higher the risk reduction level of the plant.2006-00 . TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Table SIL 4 3 2 1 Safety Integrity Level (SIL) PFD ≥10 to <10-4 -5 ≥10-4 to <10-3 ≥10-3 to <10-2 ≥10-2 to <10-1 For example.

It not only satisfies requirements to be used in safety instrumentation by itself. FCS can read data of SCS. This allows implementing SIL3 safety loop in a single configuration together with the CPU module and input/output module. Features of ProSafe-RS Implementation of Control System Technologies ProSafe-RS employs the CS 3000 architecture in its base technologies. but also achieves higher efficiency of operations through integration with CS 3000. Since it achieves SIL3 with a single configuration. Connection with Other Systems It is possible to read data of SCSs from the host computer using OPC and SOE-OPC. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-4 7. This can be done by the same interface (tag name) as of reading data of one FCS from other FCS. • Basic concepts. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. including design and installation costs. which provide a communication interface for accessing SCS of ProSafe-RS via V net or Vnet/IP from HIS and FCS of CS 3000.1 ProSafe-RS is a safety instrumented system conforming to safety rating SIL3 as defined by IEC 61508. the safety level of SIL3 can be maintained even if a CPU module or input/output module on one side fails in the dual-redundant configuration. the following advantages can be expected. These functions allow monitoring SCS operation using the same interface (window) as of monitoring FCS from HIS.7. such as hardware installation and maintenance methods.27. can be shared with CS 3000. It is also possible to connect to other DCSs and PLCs via subsystem communication (Modbus communication method). Because of this. system construction and interface design are made simpler. Achievement of Safety Rating SIL3 with Single Configuration ProSafe-RS has built-in dual-redundant system matching and self-diagnosis mechanisms embedded within one CPU module and one input/output module. allowing an improvement of the total engineering efficiency.2006-00 . thus making it conform to SIL3 as defined by IEC 61508 in a single component. Achievement of High Availability by Redundancy ProSafe-RS allows selecting dual-redundant module configurations in order to achieve high availability. • Since connection via V net or Vnet/IP is possible. Integrated Monitoring with CS 3000 ProSafe-RS is equipped with functions for integration with CS 3000.

System Configuration of ProSafe-RS 7.SF SCS0107 Station Status Display FCS IOM . Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-5 7. 55.7. it is possible to configure SIL3 safety loops across multiple SCSs via V net or Vnet/IP. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Product Recipe Batch Quantity FCS0106 #1234-C SCS0107 : : 8000 : ABC resin xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxxxxxx x xxxxxxxx xxxx x xxxx xxxx x x xxxx x xxxx xxxx x x xxxx xxxx x x xxxx x xxxx xxxx x x xxxx x xxxx x xxxx x FIS2002A Phase Standby Charge Heating Reaction Cooling Shipping Completion Elapsed time 00 minutes 05 minutes 05 minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes FIS2003A Steam Coolant xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx Reactor internal pressure 4700 Pa Tag amount volume name FIS2001A 1234 576420 FIS2002A 1234 576420 FIS2003A 1234 576420 Ready Charge Totalized FIS2011A HIS0121 HIS0122 Shipping :180. 98.SF FCS0101 Station Status Display . CPU modules and input/output modules comprising an SCS are placed in single configuration and can be applied to applications of up to IEC 61508 SIL3.ai Figure ProSafe-RS System Configuration (for ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 Integration Structure) • In a ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure.2006-00 . • SCS engineering is performed from SENG and engineering of FCSs and HISs is performed from an ENG.27.SO System Status Overview .2 DEGC TIC2002A Outer temp. The SENG.2 ProSafe-RS is comprised of SENGs (safety engineering PCs) equipped with engineering and maintenance functions and controller SCSs (safety control stations)for safety.SF FCS0101 Station Status Display IOM .0 /min Reactor A SW FIS2012A Shipping :180. Workbench Function Block Diagram .AL Process Alarm FCS IOM FCS FCS HELP 01 V net1 V net2 V net2 V net2 V net2 xxxxxx FCS GRREACTORA Reactor control Logics To To xxxx Outputs FCS Logics Logics xx xx xx Inputs From xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xx xx x xx xxxxxx xx xxxxxx xx x xx xx x xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xxxx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx x xxxx x xxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x xxxx xxxx x x x xxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx Outputs Outputs To FIS2001A FCS0101 FCS0102 Reactor control FCS0103 FCS0104 TIC2001A Inside temp. The minimum configuration involves one SENG and one SCS. modules in required areas are made dual-redundant.SA System Alarm Message Domain : BKDCS Alarm Message .SA System . it is possible to monitor operations of both FCS and SCS with HIS. It is possible to have a structure where ProSafe-RS is integrated with CS 3000 and a configuration where ProSafe-RS is connected to systems other than CS 3000 via Modbus.2 DEGC FCS0105 Lot No. ENG and HIS functions can be installed in a single PC or separate PCs. If it is desired to improve the availability.1 System Overview In ProSafe-RS.2.0 /min FIS2013A Shipping : 98. Engineering of CS 3000 integration functions is performed from both SENG and ENG.SF FCS0101 Status: Display Domain 01 FCS V net1 BKDCS Station Inputs FCS From IOM IOM Domain : 01 V net1 BKDCS BKDCS Inputs Domain : 01 From V net1 FCS FCS . By using inter-SCS safety communication.6 /min HIS0123 HIS0124 Graphic display of up to 8 different loops Process alarm System alarm SCS operating Host computer status System operating status SOE Viewer Ethernet or Vnet/IP ENG/HIS HIS Fail Fail ProSafe-RS SENG V net or Vnet/IP Inter-SCS Safety Communication Tag name access FCS SCS Wiring error detection by wiring check adapters Pressure SW SCS Wiring error detection by pulse output Solenoid valve Modbus SCS Other system (host system) Modbus Slave Communication EBS bus (Optical Fiber Cables) Other system (Sub system) Sensor Process Safety valve Process Subsystem Communication Modbus I/O node F070201.

• Using the external communication function blocks prepared in ProSafe-RS. it is possible to connect only HIS to ProSafe-RS. the function blocks on the receiving side output the pre-determined fail-safe values. it is possible to communicate with external devices without interfering the safety functions of an SCS. The inter-SCS safety communication function is achieved by dedicated function blocks. In both cases. • In a ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure. It is necessary to use these function blocks to perform inter-SCS safety communication. • It is possible to connect an SCS with other systems using serial communication (Modbus). and Modbus slave communication functions that allow other systems to establish connections as Modbus communication masters. the configuration is the same as the system configuration without CS 3000 FCS. Dedicated function blocks for performing inter-SCS safety communication are provided: secure safety communication is realized by describing logic using these function blocks. ENG and HIS via Ethernet during the engineering. it is possible to write data in an SCS from HIS and FCS. serial communication interface modules are mounted on SCS nodes and used to connect with other systems.7. This allows creating safety loop across two SCSs. it is necessary to connect SENG. Note that Modbus communication cannot be used in safety loops (they shall be used as interference-free applications). Function blocks on the receiving side (consuming side) perform various inspections for checking the validity of received data and output only data whose quality can be guaranteed. it is also possible to access SOE information of SCS from a host computer. By using the SOE OPC interface package of ProSafe-RS.2006-00 . The communication is not limited to communication routes between SCSs in the same domain. routes between SCSs in different domains can also be used. Overview of Inter-SCS Safety Communication An SCS can perform inter-SCS safety communication with other SCSs in the same domain or different domains. SCSs support subsystem communication functions that allow the SCS side to connect to other systems as a communication master. which is then sent to the communicating SCS via V net or Vnet/IP. In this case. If data received from the network is judged incorrect as a result of these inspections. In case of a ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure. Inter-SCS Safety Communication ProSafe-RS allows constructing systems in which both safety communication and CS 3000 control communication can be performed on V net or Vnet/IP. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-6 • Host computer that performs production control can access data of FCSs and SCSs via an OPC interface by installing the Exaopc OPC interface package of CS 3000 (for HIS). Note that external communication function blocks are required when writing data to an SCS from external devices. Mechanism of Inter-SCS Safety Communication Function blocks on the sending side (producing side) add data to be written as well as data for guaranteeing the communication quality.27. • In a ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure.

TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.2007-00 . *1: Supported by ProSafe-RS R1. SCS Global Switch Communication Interference-Free communication can be done between SCS and FCS by using a special database.7. and communication between SCS and FCS is called SCS Global Switch Communication.14. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-7 SCS Link Transmission (*1) SCS link transmission function makes it possible to bilaterally transmit and receive data in stations in the same domain by broadcasting.00 or later. Communication between two SCS is called SCS Link Transmission Safety Communication. SCS Link Transmission Safety Communication Boolean data can be safely communicated from one SCS to many other SCS by using special I/O function block.03.

Number of SENGs At least one SENG is required. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-8 7.2 System Scale and Hardware Implementation Requirements This section explains limitations on system scale and implementation requirements of hardware such as input/output modules. Number of Stations The maximum number of stations that can be connected in the entire system is as follows for both ProSafe-RS single system configuration and CS 3000 integration structures. three layers for control bus) Note that the maximum number of stations per domain is limited to 16 in case of CS 3000 HIS. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. bus converter (BCV) and CS 3000 ENG functions are required. Hardware Implementation Requirements The following requirements apply to the implementation of SCS hardware.7.2007-00 . it is necessary to duplicate ESB bus coupler modules and mount them. • Up to four serial communication modules (ALR111 and ALR 121) can be mounted per SCS as communication master modules (two pairs in case of dual-redundant configuration) and up to two modules as Modbus slave communication modules. System Scale The following restrictions on system scale apply to ProSafe-RS systems.1 for “Hardware Configuration of SCS. implementation requirements due to power supply capacity and operation ambient temperature conditions (60 to 70°C) apply to the implementation of input/output modules.2.” • An SCS can connect up to nine I/O nodes to a CPU node to expand inputs and outputs. When using multiple domains.14. Note that it is not allowed to perform both subsystem communication and Modbus slave communication in the same serial communication module. See 7. • In addition to the requirements above. • Number of domains that can be connected to hierarchical layers: 16 • Number of stations that can be connected within a domain: 64 • Number of stations that can be connected to hierarchical layers: 256 • Hierarchical layers: 3 (by using two layers of bus converter.3. Number of SCSs The number of SCSs needs to be within the limitation of the number of stations. • When expanding inputs and outputs.

Safety Engineering PC (SENG) Safety Control Station (SCS) SCS is comprised of a safety control unit (CPU node) and a safety node unit (I/O node).2007-00 .ESB bus coupler module (dual-redundant configuration) . • Safety control unit .Devices related to V net or Vnet/IP communication (dual-redundant configuration) • Safety node unit .ESB bus slave interface module (dual-redundant configuration) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.7. The basic configuration of them is as follows.CPU module .Power supply module (dual-redundant configuration) . It is also possible to use a PC with HIS operation and monitoring functions implemented for performing the SENG functions.3 Hardware Configuration Devices SENG is a device used for performing engineering tasks such as editing. downloading and testing applications as well as carrying out maintenance tasks on safety control stations (SCSs).Power supply module (dual-redundant configuration) .2.14. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-9 7. General-purpose PC is used for a SENG.

contact.2 k bps) RS-232C communication module (RS-422/ PS-485. Isolated Yokogawa-specific cable (*2)) Analog input module (1 to 5 V/1 to 10 V. Isolated. Isolated. Isolated. A Yokogawa-specific cable can be connected without using a terminal block. Cannot be connected. 2-port. 1200 bps to 115. General-purpose cable (*1)) Analog output module (4-20 mA. Isolated. Isolated. Isolated. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-10 Input/Output Modules ProSafe-RS provides the input/output modules shown in the table below. Yokogawa-specific cables are special cables for connecting input/output modules to terminal boards. Yokogawa-specific cables (*2)) Digital output module (24 V DC. Isolated. General-purpose cable (*1)) Digital input module (no-voltage contact. contact. Yokogawa-specific cable (*2)) Digital input module (no-voltage contact.7. Yokogawa-specific cable (*2)) Digital output module (24 V DC. Isolated. Safety (SIL3) Interference-free (not safety) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Yokogawa-specific cable (*2)) Digital output module (24 V DC. contact. If no option code is selected. Hart Communication. Isolated. a wrong connection to I/O modules with different signals cannot be avoided. Isolated. Isolated. a wrong connection to I/O modules with different signals can be avoided. General-purpose cable (*1)) Analog input module (4-20 mA. Hart Communication. Yokogawa-specific Cables (*2)) Analog output module (4-20 mA.Hart Communication. Isolated. 2-port. Input/output modules can be placed in dual-redundant configuration in order to improve the availability.14.2 k bps) 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 x – x – x – – – x – x – x – – – x KS1-*B x KS1-*B – x KS1-*B/ SAI533 – x AKB331M x AKB651M x AKB331M x AKB331M x AKB331M x AKB331M/SDV144) x AKB651M/SDV521) – x AKB331M/DV531) x AKB331M/SDV53L) – x AKB331M/SDV541) x KS1-*B – x KS1-*B/ SAI144 x KS1-*B – x KS1-*B/ SAI143 – x KS1-*B/ SAI143 Types of Input/Output Modules Name Signal Connection I/O Channels Pressure Yokogawa-specific Cable (*1) MIL per Clamp No option Option Module Terminal Cable code (*4) code (*3) Digital I/O Module 16 16 4 8 8 8 16 16 x – – x – – x – x – – x – – x – Communications Module Two ports Two ports – – – – (D-Sub 9-pin connector) (*5) (M4-terminal block. General-purpose cables (*1)) Analog input module (4 to 20 mA. Isolated. Isolated. Table Model Analog Input Module SAI143S03 (*6) SAI143S33 (*6) SAI143H03 (*6) SAI143H33 (*6) SAV144S03 (*6) SAV144S33 (*6) SAI533H03 (*6) SAI533H33 (*6) SDV144S13 (*6) SDV144S33 (*6) SDV521S33 (*6) SDV53123 (*6) SDV531S33 (*6) SDV531L33 (*6) SDV541S23 (*6) SDV541S33 (*6) ALR111 (*7) ALR121 (*7) x: –: Analog input module (4 to 20 mA. contact. General-purpose cable (*2)) Digital output module (24 V DC. Yokogawa-specific Cables (*2)) Analog input module (4-20 mA. General-purpose cables (*1)) Digital output module (24 V DC. Yokogawa-specific cables (*2)) Digital output module (24 V DC/2 A. 10 poles) (*5) *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: *7: Can be connected. General-purpose cables are pressure clamp terminals and MIL cables. Yokogawa-specific cables (*2)) Serial communication module (RS-232C. General-purpose cable (*1)) Analog input module (1 to 5 V/1 to 10 V.2007-00 . Isolated. If option codes associated with I/O modules are selected. 1200 bps to 115.Hart Communication.

• SEA4D: Analog terminal board (single and dual-redundant. with ISA Standards G3) STB4S: Pressure clamp terminal block for digital I/O (16-channel input or 8-channel output. 16-channel input or 8-channel output) • SED2D: Digital terminal board (single and dual-redundant. They support both single and redundant configurations. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-11 Products Related to Input/Output Modules Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks Pressure clamp terminal blocks are used when wiring input/output modules to field devices directly. • SRM53D: 8x2 Dry Contact Outputs (safety relay built in type. with ISA Standards G3) • For dual-redundant configuration STA4D: Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for analog signals (16-channel.7. with ISA Standards G3) Dedicated Cable There are the following types of dedicated cable. They come in two types: for single and dual-redundant configurations. with ISA Standards G3) STB4D: Dual-redundant pressure clamp terminal block for digital signals (16-channel input or 8-channel output. 4-channel. SDV531 or SDV541 and terminal board) Use AKB331 cables to connect to SED4D. SRM53D and SRM54D in combination with SDV144. M4 terminals) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. 4x4-channel output) Relay Boards Relay boards for dry contact outputs that are equipped with safety relays are provided. • For single configuration STA4S: Pressure clamp terminal block for analog signals (16-channel.14. • Signal Cable (40-40 pin) (KS1) Use KS1 cables to connect to SEA4D in combination with SAI143. They allow reading back outputs by connecting with digital input modules. 16-channel) • SED4D: Digital terminal board (single and dual-redundant. M4 terminals) • SRM54D: 16 Dry Contact Outputs (safety relay built in type.2007-00 . SAV144 and SAI533 • Signal Cable (50-50 pin) (AKB331) (for connection between SDV144. each supporting single and redundant configurations. SDV531 and SDV541 • Signal Cable (AKB651) (for connection between SDV521 and terminal board) Use AKB651 cables to connect to SED2D in combination with SDV521 Terminal Boards There are the following two types of terminal boards.

it is possible to detect disconnection failures that occur while inputting OFF signals. • SCB110: For detecting short-circuit failures By mounting this adapter in series with a sensor switch. it is possible to detect failures due to short-circuit with a power supply line that occur while inputting ON signals and failures due to short-circuit with other channels. F070202. • SCB100: For detecting disconnection failures By mounting this adapter in parallel with a sensor switch. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-12 Wiring check Adapters Wiring check adapters are used to detect disconnection and short-circuit failures in field wiring between digital input modules and field devices.2007-00 . There are the following two types of wiring check adapters.14.7. The figure below shows the shapes of SCB100 and SCB110.ai Figure Shapes of SCB100 and SCB110 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.

Safety Control Station (SCS) Hardware Configuration of SCS SCS is configured with one safety control unit (CPU node) and up to nine safety node units (I/O node).7.3.14.3 7. V net or Vnet/IP SSC10D PSM PSM CPU(Optional) CPU SEC401 SEC401 IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM SNB10D ESB bus PSM PSM SNT10D PSM PSM SNT401 SNT401 SNT10D PSM PSM SNT501 SNT501 SNB10D PSM PSM SSB401 SSB401 IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM SSB401 SSB401 IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM IOM ESB bus Optical fiber cable ESB bus CPU node 1 CPU node per controller • SSC10D (Safety Control Units) • PSM (always duplicated) • SEC401 (always duplicated. Safety node units are connected by ESB buses. when connecting I/O nodes) • IOM (up to 6 or 8 modules can be connected) I/O nodes Can be expanded up to 9 nodes per controller • PSM (always duplicated) • SSB401 (always duplicated) • IOM (up to 8 modules can be connected) Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module Not counted as a number of extension node for I/O node • PSM (always duplicated) • SNT401 (always duplicated) • SNT501 (always duplicated) • Optical ESB Bus Repeater Module (up to 10 modules can be connected) Power supply module Processor module ESB bus coupler module Safety Node Unit (Rack Mountable Type) Input/output module IOM: SSB401: ESB bus slave interface module SNT10D: Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Rack Mountable Type) SNT401: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Master Module SNT501: Optical ESB Bus Repeater Slave Module F070301.1 This section explains the hardware and software of a safety control station (SCS). Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-13 7.2007-00 .ai PSM: CPU: SEC401: SNB10D: Figure Hardware Configuration of SCS TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.

The figure below shows a standard type safety control unit in dual-redundant configuration.SG 1 4 2 5 3 6 Utility unit Cable tray V net coupler units GPS interface unit (optional) External interface unit for standard type F070302.ai Figure Configuration of Safety Control Unit (standard type) Input/Output module or ESB bus coupler module Input/Output module Processor module Power supply module 1 UNIT=44.7. Power supply modules are always used in dual-redundant configuration. In the case of single configuration.2007-00 . processor module is mounted in a slot on the left side and dummy cover is mounted on the right side.ai Figure Configuration of Safety Control Unit for Vnet/IP (standard type) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. When connecting a safety node unit.45 mm Grounding terminal Base unit (5 UNIT) Utility unit (1 UNIT) Cable tray External interface unit F070309E. ESB bus coupler modules are used in dualredundant configuration. Slots for input/output modules and ESB bus coupler modules Slots for input/output modules Processor modules Power supply modules Ground terminal Base unit RX+ RX. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-14 Configuration of Safety Control Units Safety control units come in two types: Standard (ambient temperature: -20 to 50°C) and wide range temperature (ambient temperature: -20 to 70°C).14.

The figure below shows a utility unit and node fan unit that comprise a wide range temperature type safety control unit.2007-00 . The base unit is omitted in the figure.SG External interface unit for wide range temperature type Utility unit GPS interface unit (optional) Node fan unit 1 4 2 5 3 6 Power supply unit for fan Power supply input terminal Fan unit F070303. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-15 Wide range temperature type safety control units are configured in the same way as the standard type units. but are equipped with an additional node fan unit in order to support a wider range of ambient temperatures (-20 to 70°C).7.ai Figure Configuration of Safety Control Unit (wide range temperature type) External interface unit Utility unit (1 UNIT) Empty (1 UNIT) Node fan unit (2 UNIT) Power supply unit for fan unit Power input terminal Fan unit F070310E.ai Figure Configuration of Safety Control Unit for Vnet/IP (wide range temperature type) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.14. V net coupler unit RX+ RX.

Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-16 Configuration of Safety Node Units (SNB10D) The figure below shows a safety node unit. Power supply modules are always used in dual-redundant configuration. Slots for input/output modules ESB bus slave interface modules Power supply modules Ground terminal Cable tray F070304.7.2007-00 .14.ai Figure Configuration of Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Rack Mountable Type) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Power supply modules and ESB bus slave interface modules are always used in dual-redundant configuration.ai Figure Configuration of Safety Node Unit Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Rack Mountable Type) (SNT10D) The figure below shows a Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Rack Mountable Type). Slots for optical bus repeater modules Power supply modules IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 B1 B2 Ground terminal Cable tray F070311E.

3.2007-00 . A dual-redundant SCS contains a full set of duplicate components such as processor modules. When connecting additional node units.14. The dual-redundant processor cards (one active. ESB bus coupler modules are always used in dual-redundant configuration.7. the other standby) can switch from active to standby card without any interruption to control when active card breaking down. V net couplers (for V net) and power supply modules.ai Figure Configuration of Dual-redundant Processor Modules (SCS) TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.2 Dual-redundant SCS and Reliability of SCS Dual-redundant SCSs are provided. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-17 7. Control Bus (V net or Vnet/IP) <Left processor module> Comparator 1 Comparator 2 Comparator 1 CPU1 CPU2 CPU1 <Right processor module> Comparator 2 CPU2 Main memory (with ECC) Non-volatile memory for storing application programs Main memory (with ECC) Main memory (with ECC) Main memory (with ECC) Non-volatile memory for storing application programs V net or Vnet/IP Interface V net or Vnet/IP Interface SEN Bus Interface ESB Bus Interface SEN Bus Interface ESB Bus Interface I/Obus (ESB) F070305. ESB bus coupler modules need to be mounted.

TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. these codes are used to correct temporary bit-reverse errors that occur in the main memories.2007-00 . If it detects that the safety functions are not working normally. it regards the error as a temporary operation error and recovers from the abnormal status to the standby status. and if their values are different. the operation is regarded as normal and the data is sent to the main memory and bus interface modules. If either one of the comparators detect inconsistency. The control right can thus be switched without interrupting the operation.14. The main memory modules are equipped with ECC (Error Correcting Code). ESB Buses See Section 2. When the processor module obtains the control right. Each CPU module (CPU1 and CPU2) performs the same operation and the operation results are compared by two comparators for each operation cycle.2 for the explanation of ESB buses. • The processor module on the standby side synchronizes with the processor module on the control side to ensure that the same operations are performed. the control right is transferred to the standby side as well. it immediately starts sending operation data to the bus interface modules. a matching error occurs and the control right is passed to the processor module on the standby side.7. • A processor module conducts self-diagnosis if an operation error occurs. The main memory modules with ECC are dual-redundant as well. it is considered an “operation error” and the control right is passed to the processor module on the standby side. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-18 How an SCS is made dual-redundant is explained below. • Each processor module is equipped with a WDT (Watch Dog Timer) and monitors that the safety functions are operating normally.8. CPU • Each processor module has two CPUs and two main memories. If the operation results of both CPUs match. If there is no abnormality in CPU hardware as a result of diagnosis. • The operation results of CPU1 and CPU2 are compared by the two comparators. • A processor module is equipped with communication interfaces that can support dualredundancy on CPUs and V net or Vnet/IP interfaces are connected to dual-redundant control buses.

The figure below shows a rough overview of the relations among these states and operations. SCS can be in one of several states. override. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-19 7.14.3 States and Operations of SCS Depending on the operating mode and security level.” the operating mode shifts from the waiting mode to running mode regardless of the security level.3. SENG Offline download Forcing Online-change download HIS Override Output enable operation SCS (Operating mode:Running Mode) SCS (Operating mode: Waiting mode) If all output channels are in “output enabled status.ai Figure States and Operations of SCS TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.7. security level SW 1 : (Level 1: For maintenance) 1 0 : (Level 0: For engineering) 0 2 2 : (Level 2: For safety operation) Application logic execution function Application logic Process data input/output function Inter-SCS safety communication function Diagnostic function F070306.2007-00 . Operations of SCS include forcing. output enable operation and download.

it is always possible to shift from security level 1 to security level 2 by entering an RST input in a SYS_SECURE block . master database offline download Online Levels SYS_SEC_CTL check (*1) Level 2 Password check for level 1 and SYS_SEC_CTL check Level 1 Password check for level 0 and SYS_SEC_CTL check Offline Level Level 0 Password check for level 0 and SYS_SEC_CTL check F070308. initial mode. loading mode. SCS restart.ai *1: Regardless of the security level change permission status set by SYS_SEC_CTL. Security level is protected by password so that it cannot be changed. The operations carried out by the system program of an SCS are determined by the operating mode. Using SYS_SEC_CTL block.ai Figure Transition of Operating Mode Security Levels An SCS is equipped with a function to protect internal data from being overwritten by external devices. Figure Transition of Security Level TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. It always monitors attempts to write data from outside and judges whether user operations should be enabled or disabled according to the security level of the SCS. offline download. The security level indicates to what degree the SCS memory is protected from data writing attempts from outside.14. There are five operating modes of an SCS: stop mode.7. Loading Mode Request to start offline download from the workbench Notification of completion of offline download from the workbench SCS start request/SCS start Stop Mode SCS power supply on Initial Mode Completion of diagnosis/starting application logic execution function All output channels are in “output enabled status” Waiting Mode Running Mode The system can switch to this mode from all other modes At least one output channel is in “output disabled status” F070307. it can be decided whether security level is changeable or not by contact input of a foreign key switch. waiting mode and running mode.2007-00 . The status of the security level changes as shown below. There are two levels for the security level: a level (online level) used during constant operation of an SCS and a level (offline level) used when the SCS is not operating. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-20 Operating Modes Operating modes indicate the different running states of an SCS.

This function is used by an SENG to forcibly fix input/ output variables and internal variables of an SCS and allows fixing all input/output values of each input/output module at the same time as well.7. Whether or not forcing can be Possible to create application logic that performed depends on the security level allows switching override permission with a of SCS mechanical key switch.00 or later. forcibly changing variable values (variable value setting) and so forth for the purpose of SCS maintenance and debugging I/O loop check applications. The override function is used when performing system maintenance and similar. Additionally. The forcing function can also be used when performing maintenance tasks. – Supported by ProSafe-RS R1. More than one override function block (hereinafter referred to as override FB) are managed as a logical group and a function to enable only one override FB to override can be selected in the group. pre-programmed values are output as override values. Differences between Forcing and Override The table below shows differences between forcing and override.14. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-21 Forcing and Override Overview of Forcing Function The forcing function provides a user interface for fixing channel inputs and outputs of input/output modules and variables in application logic to constant values (variable lock). etc. it is possible to use SYS_FORCE function blocks to monitor the lock status within the application logic and forcibly cancel locking. Table Differences between Forcing and Override Item Purpose SCS security level Necessity of programming Specification of output value Requirement for setting variable values Grouping Override (*1) *1: Forcing Maintenance of SCS and debugging applications from SENG Can be performed at level 1 or lower No need for programming Possible to specify values to be output using the I/O Lock window and so forth Override Maintenance of SCS from HIS in ProSafeRS/CS 3000 integration structure Can be performed at level 2 as well Necessary to use override FB to create application logic If override is performed while executing an application.2007-00 . It is used for performing tasks in states where variable values of application logic are temporarily changed. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.03. Overview of Override Override is a function used to temporarily overwrite values of variables of application logic in an SCS from an HIS in case of ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure.

2007-00 . This event information can be viewed using SOE Viewer. Viewing Events with SOE Viewer • Event logs (SOE event information and diagnostic information messages) saved in an SCS are uploaded to an SENG via V net / Vnet/IP and displayed as event messages by means of the SOE Viewer function of the SENG. Time Synchronization Method of SCSs Connected to V net ProSafe-RS allows selecting from two synchronization methods: V net time master method (default).14. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-22 7. This information is notified to users without fail. Event information before and after trip signals. V net Time Master Method (Default) The V net time is set by an SENG or HIS specified as time master. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. A time synchronization function is provided in order to maintain the accuracy of the time at which an event occurs. This also allows registering changes in communication data with other SCSs. Saving Events Event information is saved in an SCS.3. discrete outputs and variables of application logic as event information.7.4 SOER SOER (Sequence of Events Recorder) is a function for acquiring and saving analog inputs. changes in application logic can be acquired as event information as well. Generated trip reports can be exported to printers and CSV format files. where all stations synchronize to the V net time. discrete inputs. By creating function blocks for SOER. which is particularly important. • In the case of ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure. and GPS time master method (optional). The time of each device connected via V net is synchronized according to the time information of the time master. SCS process alarm messages can be displayed together by using the HIS historical information. • Event logs of up to eight SCSs can be displayed at the same time. which eliminates the need to prepare a PC for storing events or keeping the power supply to an SENG turned on at all times. Event Acquisition It is possible to acquire not only discrete inputs (DI) but also changes of discrete outputs (DO) and analog input values as event information. where the time is acquired from an external source via the IRIG-B interface. • Trip reports are generated. • It is possible to filter event messages so that only desired messages are displayed. is saved in a different location. Time Synchronization Function An SCS has a function to synchronize time information among SCSs as well as between CPUs and DI modules in order to maintain a high accuracy of the event generation time records.

serial communication interface modules are mounted in SCS nodes in order to allow connections with other systems. Note that Modbus communication cannot be used for safety loops (they shall be used as interference-free modules). The time synchronization status can be checked in the SCS State Management window of the SCS Maintenance Support Tool on the SENG.7. and a Modbus slave communication function that allows other systems to connect to the SCS as the Modbus communication master. The standard time (date. It is possible to connect to LED outputs and PLCs by accessing data of other systems via subsystem communication from SCSs. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.2007-00 . it is possible to acquire events with high time accuracy. or in the SCS Status Display window on the CS 3000 HIS. SCSs support the Modbus communication protocol. but also DCSs made by other manufacturers can connect to an SCS as the Modbus master. Time Synchronization Method of SCSs Connected to Vnet/IP The time synchronization method of SCSs connected to Vnet/IP is fixed to the synchronization with Vnet/IP time. hour. Not only control stations of CS 3000. an SCS is able to function as a Modbus slave device. Since GPS is used. a commercially available GPS receiver is used to acquire time information of the IRIG-B format and use this in an SCS designated as the time master. In both functions.5 Subsystem Connection (Modbus) An SCS supports a subsystem communication function that allows the SCS side to connect to other systems as the communication master. 7. Synchronization among individual SCSs is achieved at this synchronization timing. The Modbus slave connection function of an SCS allows the Modbus master (external device) to read and write data in the SCS via the Modbus protocol. If an SNTP server is installed. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-23 GPS Time Master Method (Optional) In this method.14. it is possible to achieve highly accurate time synchronization with the standard time. • RS-232C serial communication module (ALR111) • RS-422/RS-485 serial communication module (ALR121) Subsystem Communication Function The subsystem communication function is used for reading and writing input/output data within subsystems from an SCS. Modbus Slave Communication Function With this function. There are the following two types of subsystem communication modules.3. The Modbus master requests to access data in the SCS using the Modbus device name as the interface. minute. second) and the synchronization timing are delivered to each connected SCS.

It is necessary to define such operations at occurrence of major errors individually for a given application. hardware and software are unable to function. Such situations include when one side of dual-redundant hardware modules fails. Such errors are treated as minor errors. there is no impact on the application logic execution functions themselves.14. which are defined by users in advance. SCSs are able to recover from errors by conducting recovery tasks corresponding to each error level.7. Operations at Minor Error Occurrence At this error level. some hardware is unable to function. the control right is switched to the standby side to continue processing. The hardware continues to operate in the same way as if it were placed in a single configuration. are performed for the failed areas. CPU (both sides for redundancy) stops and output values of all output modules are set to fail-safe values.3. Operations to be performed at abnormality. If one hardware side in a dual-redundant configuration fails. Operations at Fatal Error Occurrence At this error level. Operations at Major Error Occurrence At this error level. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.6 Operation at SCS Errors There are three error levels for SCSs: fatal errors.2007-00 . major errors and minor errors. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-24 7.

4.ai *1: A function that controls system engineering and maintenance tasks of an SCS.2007-00 . Test Functions 7. etc. SENG SCS Manager(*1) Test operation Result display Execution environment (SCS simulator) Application F070401.1 Virtual Tests In a virtual test.ai *1: A function that controls system engineering and maintenance tasks of an SCS. the tests that can be executed are limited by the security level of an actual SCS. and useful in debugging when you create or change applications. SENG SCS Manager(*1) Test operation SCS Result display V net or Vnet/IP Execution environment (SCS) Application F070402. It is possible to execute tests in a status where inputs/outputs are disconnected. such as definition of applications to be executed on the SCS. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-25 7.4 The test functions of ProSafe-RS are used for effective debugging of applications.7. database generation test functions. which allows debugging application logic of each SCS.14. In a target test. Figure Target Test TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. virtual tests and target tests.. it is possible to execute test functions on the SCS simulator regardless of the security level. an application is executed on an actual SCS. database generation test functions.4.e. without any input/output modules connected. In a virtual test. an application is executed using an SCS simulator on an SENG. etc. Figure Virtual Test 7.2 Target Tests In a target test. such as definition of applications to be executed on the SCS. using the forcing function. There are two types of tests. i.

it is possible to perform the following tasks on an SCS from an HIS and FCS.14. • It is possible to monitor system alarms generated on an SCS in the system alarm window of an HIS.2007-00 . diagnostic information) acquired in an SCS with the sequence of event recorder (SOER) function using a CS 3000 HIS or general PC (with V net or Vnet/IP interface card). an SCS is able to communicate with subsystems such as PLCs via interference-free serial communication modules (ALR111. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-26 7. SOE Viewer allows viewing event logs of a specified SCS. ProSafe-RS Related Packages SOE Viewer Package The SOE Viewer Package provides functions to display event logs (event information. Modbus Communication Package This is the Modbus communication package used for SCSs to communicate with subsystems. trip report generation and other functions. With this package. • It is possible to display the status of an SCS in the SCS status display window of an HIS. ALR121) mounted on a safety control unit or safety node unit using the Modbus protocol. Engineering Function for CENTUM CS 3000 Integration This package runs on an SENG and is used to integrate ProSafe-RS and CENTUM CS 3000. It also provides event log filtering. In a system integrating ProSafe-RS and CS 3000. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. • It is possible to manage generation/recovery of process alarms and alarms from the annunciator detected by an SCS in the process alarm window of an HIS. SOE OPC Interface Package This package provides functions for installing an OPC server on an HIS of CENTUM CS 3000 or SENG and notifying event logs (event information and diagnostic information) acquired by the SOER function of the SCS to OPC clients via the OPC interface.5 Various packages are provided in order to improve the integration with CS 3000 and systems made by other manufacturers as well as efficiency in operations/monitoring via integration. This package allows reading and writing subsystem data from application logic of an SCS.7. • It is possible to use tag names to operate and monitor data of an SCS from an HIS using the same interface as for FCSs. It is also possible to read data of an SCS from CS 3000 FCS.

Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-27 7. (*1) Message Monitoring Window Process Reports Historical Message Reports Security Functions Operation and Monitoring Support Functions Report Functions(Option) Connecting an ITV Camera CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization Voice Messaging Functions Multi-monitor Functions Advanced Alarm Filter Function Remote Desktop Function System Status Overview Window System Alarm Window SCSs do not support %VM (voice messages). (*2) Can be supported by SOE Viewer. Operation and Trend Window Monitoring Trend Point Window Windows Tuning Window Process Alarm Window Operator Guide Window SCSs do not generate operation guide messages. 1second trends cannot be created. Classification ProSafe-RS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X – X X X X X X X – X X Remarks for ProSafe-RS Common Window Hierarchy Operation and Navigator Window Monitoring Panel Set Functions Dynamic Window Set Circulate Functions Alarm Processing Functions Print Screen Functions Graphic Windows See “Table Mapping Blocks and Elements” for the assigned tags. See “Table Mapping Blocks and Elements” for the assignable tags. (*2) 1-second trends cannot be created. (*1) SCSs do not generate sequence messages.2007-00 . Only data settings (elements) from external devices can be used. Only data settings from external devices (elements) can be used.7. Table Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring between CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS HIS function Window Call-up Operating Screen Mode System Message Window Window Sizing Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring CS 3000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X – X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X – X X X X – – – – – X X X X X X – X X X – X X X X – Only data settings (elements) from external devices can be used. SENGs support this function with a multi-language editor of Workbench. See “Table Mapping Blocks and Elements” listed later.14. (*1) Inhibited for safety reasons. System Maintenance Functions FCS Status Display Window SCS Status Display Window HIS Setting Window Time Setting Dialog Box Help Dialog Box Control Drawing Window (Option) Control Status Sequence Table Window Logic Chart Window (Option) Display Window SEBOL Window SFC Window Trends Trend Functions Tuning Trend Displaying Trends from Other Stations Long-term Data Archive Functions (Option) External Recorder Output Functions (Option) Expert Trend Viewer Function (Option) Open Interfaces (Option) FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Functions (PICOT) (Option) Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function (Option) Web Monitoring Functions (Option) Individual package Configured Information Reference Function (Option) Consolidated Historical Message Viewer Meeting FDA Regulations (Option) System Integration OPC Station (SIOS) (Option) SOE package Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (Option) Plant Resource Manager (PRM) X: *1: *2: Can be operated Blank: Cannot be operated –: No function See “Table Software Inputs and Outputs that can be used with SCSs” listed later.6 The table below shows a comparison between CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS in terms of HIS operation and monitoring features. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. (*2) Supported by the SOE OPC interface package.

7. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Table Classification Mapping Blocks and Elements Description BOOL type Internal variable Input/output variable Data setting from external device Analog input indication Analog input indication Velocity limit Annunciator Integer-type (32-bit) Real number-type(32-bit) Discrete Analog Data settingn (BOOL) Data settingn (integer) Data settingn (real number) Analog input FB with data status Analog input Velocity limit alarm Velocity limit alarm Annunciator BOOL-Type Data Override INTEGER-Type Data Override REAL-Type Data Override Override from HIS IO_BOOL-Type Data Override IO_REAL-Type Data Override Application Logic Definition Classification Type name Mapping block/element Type name/ Type element name Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %Z Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block Mapping block S_ANLG_S S_ANLG_S S_ANLGI S_VEL S_OVR_B S_OVR_I S_OVR_R S_OVR_IB S_OVR_IR S_OVR_B S_GOV_IB S_MOB_11 S_MOB_21 S_MOB_RS S_MOA S_PASSWD Internal variable BOOL Internal variable DINT Internal variable REAL I/O structure I/O structure FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB FB IO_BOOL IO_REAL ECW_B ECW_I FB ANLG_S ANLG_S ANLGI VEL ANN OVR_B OVR_I OVR_R OVR_IB OVR_IR GOV_B GOV_IB MOB_11 MOB_21 MOB_RS MOA PASSWD SCI_B SCI_I SCI_R SCO_B SCO_I SCO_R Mapping element %AN BOOL-Type Data Grouping Override (*1) IO_BOOL-Type Data Grouping Override (*1) BOOL-Type data manual operation FB with two-position answerback BOOL-Type data manual operation FB with three-position Manual operation answerback Auto-reset BOOL-Type data manual operation Analog-Type data manual operation Password Password entry Subsystem communication input (BOOL) Subsystem communication input (integer) Subsystem communication input (real number) Subsystem communication output (BOOL) Subsystem communication output (integer) Subsystem communication output (real number) Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Mapping element %WB Subsystem communication I/O *1: Supported by ProSafe-RS R1.00 or later.03.2007-00 . Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-28 The table below shows a list of mapping blocks and elements.14.

Support by SCS x x (*1) x Element &SW %GS %AN %PR %PR %OG %VM %RQ %CP %M3 %EV %RE TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. Special function block is used for SCS transmission and reception. Table Software Inputs and Outputs that can be Used with SCSs Name Common switches Global switch Annunciator Printout message (both printed and historical message) Printout message (no printed message. FCS can refer to data of SCS global switch only from %GS001 to %GS128. Data after %GS129 is counted as invalid.03.00 or later. Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) 7-29 The table below shows software inputs and outputs that can be used with SCSs. historical messages only) Operation guide message Multimedia start message Sequence message request Supervisory computer event message Supervisory computer message output for PICOT Signal event message SFC/SEBOL retum event message output x: Supported Blank: Not supported *1: Supported by ProSafe-RS R1.2007-00 .7.14.

8. Advanced Control Functions The CENTUM CS 3000 is lined up with the Advanced Process Control Station (APCS) for advanced process control. This station is designed to periodically perform advanced process control and efficiencyimproving computations when incorporated in a plant operated highly reliably by CENTUM FCS. Advanced Control Functions 8-1 8. The CENTUM CS 3000 system can take advantage of advanced control functions of the APCS.2006-00 . which is also connectable to an existing CENTUM CS or CENTUM-XL system. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

1 The APCS (Advanced Process Control Station) performs advanced control and computations to improve the plant efficiency. However the APCS has same function blocks as the FCS.8. in one-second cycle.2006-00 . Ethernet HIS (for engineering) HIS APCS Overview V net APCS FCS F080101. In the long control scan period. and it executes efficiency improvement. in which set-point is changed only a little. the APCS is used mainly in the following examples of control applications: • Control applications in which many computations are required. it does not take the place of the FCS.ai Figure Example of APCS System Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The FCS executes set-point control. • Sophisticated control applications in which many additional and corrective actions are needed according to the change of the seasons or the plant conditions. Advanced Control Functions 8-2 8. It supports process control which the FCS performs.

deleted and changed at online.2 The APCS has the following features: Features of the APCS A General Purpose Server Platform A general purpose server PC (personal computer) is employed. which are occurred according to the advanced computations. Close Connection with FCS The APCS is connected to the V net. Unified Operation Procedures The APCS can be operated and monitored at the HIS.2006-00 . utilizing its high speed and large capacity for highly flexible control computations. and other function blocks. and its advanced control functions and computations can be managed as tags similar to FCS function blocks. similar to the FCS. APCS and FCS function blocks can be cascade-connected. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Online Maintenance Advanced computations (function blocks) of the APCS can be added. which are used by the FCS. a combined application of APCS and FCS simulators enables to simulate a plant environment using only the engineering HIS (ENG). so that alarms. The APCS inherits the bumpless and limit-check functions of the FCS and that ensures safer FCS connection compared to datasetting executed by a supervisory computer. monitoring. Wide-ranging Standard Function Blocks A wide range of control. Also. so that system maintenance can be performed without changing algorithms of the FCS.8. Advanced Control Functions 8-3 8. Unique Testing Environment The APCS action can be simulated for testing by APCS simulator. are available. can be operated and monitored at the same display of the FCS. enabling to share FCS function block data – in other words.

refer to 4. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.1 Configuration of FCS Control Functions. monitoring.1 Scan Period The APCS performs PID and other standard function blocks periodically. Standard Blocks SEE ALSO For details on standard function blocks. High-speed scan period: 1 second 8. Advanced Control Functions 8-4 8.3 SEE APCS Control Functions APCS Function Specifications ALSO For APCS function specifications. or 16 seconds. For APCS scan period.8. and other standard function blocks available with the CS 3000 FCS can be used with the APCS. refer to GS 33Q03M10-31E. see below. The FCS acts in onesecond cycle and the APCS executes advanced control in long scan period.2006-00 .3.3. 8.2 Function Blocks A wide variety of control. 8. That permits control computation using General-Purpose Calculation (CALCU) blocks and SEBOL. For standard block: Basic scan period: selected from 4.

3.2006-00 . Advanced Control Functions 8-5 8. Software input/output Internal status switch Common switch (%SW) Global switch (%GS) Message output Annunciator message output (%AN) Message for sequence control Print message output (%PR) Operator guide message output (%OG) Multimedia function start message output (%VM) Sequence message request (%RQ) Supervisory computer event message output (%CP) PICOT supervisory computer event message output (%M3) Signal event message output (%EV) SFC/SEBOL return event message output (%RE) F080301. Via communication. APCS Operation and Monitoring TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.8. and outputting the results to the FCS function blocks. From the standpoint of the operation and monitoring function. the APCS is a station executing the control function in accordance with the function blocks connected in the V net similar to the FCS. Software Input and Output Common switch and other software I/O are applicable to the APCS similar to the FCS.3 Input and Output of APCS The APCS uses a personal computer as its hardware and it can not access directly process I/O data.ai Figure Software Input/Output Configuration 8. Interface with FCS Data items and I/O terminals of FCS function blocks can be easily connected to the I/O terminals of APCS function blocks. The APCS status can also be monitored on the system status overview window. The software I/O configuration is shown below. performing advanced computation using the data as parameters. it acquires input data from the FCS and sends output data to the FCS.4 The HIS operation and monitoring function permits to the operation and monitoring of the APCS using the same interface as the FCS. It thus can easily perform the advanced control computations for the set-point control executed by the FCS. nor communicate with subsystems. The APCS provides an I/O capability that permits inputting the FCS function block data required for advanced control.

Advanced Control Functions 8-6 8.5 The APCS can be engineered using the system generation function in the same procedure as the FCS.ai Figure FCS & APCS Engineering Procedures TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Defining FCS common items Defining APCS common items APCS Engineering Defining I/O modules Defining function blocks Defining function blocks Virtual testing Virtual testing Target testing FCS procedure Target testing APCS procedure Engineering with CS 3000 engineering functions F080501.8. APCS user applications can be created in accordance with the function blocks similar to the FCS.2006-00 .

5. the data are computed using them as parameters. Additionally.ai Figure APCS Testing TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.8.1 APCS Simulation Testing Similar to the FCS. the APCS operation can be simulated for testing. In the simulation test. Advanced Control Functions 8-7 8. APCS and FCS simulators can be used in combination to simulate a plant environment using only the engineering HIS (ENG). the computed results are set at the FCS.2006-00 . FCS process data are acquired. Actual plant Test function HIS memory ENG APCS simulator APCS FCS FCS simulator Actual plant Simulated plant ENG F080502. and the set data are applied to the simulated operation in the simulated plant environment.

considerable man power is required to maintain.9. Support for International Standards The standardization of batch processes is now in progress in the United States (ISA SP88) and Europe (NAMUR). 9. flexibly. maintainability.2006-00 . Since each batch process typically corresponds to a dedicated control unit. and that it takes at least four times as long to program a batch process as it does to program a continuous process.01 standard that requires the separation of the product-related information and the equipment control-related information. Users now demand greater efficiency in programming and maintenance of batch programs using hierarchical programs. and to upload batch production data to the computer. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. and particularly multiple different procedures. but it is preferable – from the viewpoint of consistent operator interface – to use standard operation screens. General requirements for a DCS for batch processes. modify. support for unit instrument views of batch process is desirable. makers must support international batch process control standards. Recipes mainly consist of both procedures to manufacture products (phase control of process). and expand conventional batch programs. and make it easy to add new recipes. and reusable parts. In fact. and reusability. For the internationalization of production. and data (such as charge and temperature setting). The CS Batch 3000 Management Packages are designed to automate and systemize batch processes to fulfill these demands. Batch Management Functions (Option) 9-1 9.1 Batch Management Functions (Option) The powerful CS Batch 3000 batch process control package design considerations were ease of use. Open Environment It must be easy to download recipes and schedules from a supervisory computer. A DCS must handle multiple recipes. Requirements for a DCS for Batch Processes Support for Multiple Products To make multiple products in one process unit. The design concept is based on the ISA S88. the DCS must store multiple recipes internally. Higher Engineering Efficiency It is said that no two batch processes are the same. shared libraries. Easy Operation It may be tempting to create custom operating screens for different recipes involving different procedures.

but the CS Batch 3000 software supports master and control recipes.01 Recipe Management covers general.ai *2: Figure ISA S88. formulas.01 Control Activity Model & CS Batch 3000 SEE ALSO For detail information of CS Batch 3000.2 The functions of this package correspond to the Control Activity Model of ISA S88. It can be used without the CS Batch 3000 Recipe Management and Process Management package. Batch Management Functions (Option) 9-2 9. and control recipes. Batch process status can be observed in the special batch management monitoring window.2006-00 . site. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. After a recipe is executed. refer to “Batch Management Package CS Batch 3000. the product-related information (recipe procedures. The created recipe is called a master recipe. so that the practical batch plants can be realized. results data are acquired and can be output as batch reports. the master recipe is converted into a form usable in an actual process (Recipe setup).” (TI 33Q01B3031E) A recipe is created and managed by the recipe management function. permitting production for multi-product/variable volumes and frequent recipe changing. called a “control recipe” is downloaded to the FCS and then it’s ready for use. The “set up” recipe . When the master recipe is used in an actual process. etc) can be managed separately.01 as follows: Main Functions of CS Batch 3000 Package Recipe management *1 Scheduling management Information management Process management Unit supervision *2 *1: Process control (function block) : Covered by the CS Batch 3000 software The ISA S88.9. Unit Supervision is a standard FCS function. master. F090201. As described above. etc) and the equipment-related information (sequence control.

not only parameters but also sequence procedures in FCS are defined and managed on a per-recipe basis. and up to one thousand recipes can be created in a group. • Formula (recipe data) This consists of parameters such as charge and temperature setting.2006-00 . As described above. Batch report printout Control recipe Batch results 5.ai Figure Flow of CS Batch 3000 Recipe Management Functions Recipes can be organized into recipe groups. Recipe set up 6. A recipe consists of the following four elements: • Recipe header (management information) • Procedure (manufacturing procedure) Described by SFC First use standard builder to create a unit sequence to be called from SFC. Batch results acquisition 3. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. assign actual units to be used.9. • Equipment requirement Choose generic process units corresponding to the requirement. Batch Management Functions (Option) HIS 1. At set-up time. Recipe creation(*1) Basic recipe 2. Common block (user-definable variable block) is used. Up to 16 recipe groups per project can be created. Download 9-3 4. • Unit instrument blocks • Common blocks F090202. Recipe executed Control recipe FCS *1: The master recipe can be created using not only HIS but also a network -connected general purpose PC.

(3) Recipe execution As for downloading. or use automatic download after recipe setup. There are two methods for downloading: manual either manually download from the process management window. (2) Download Download control recipe to FCS. Set Batch ID (ID to add a control recipe) and assign a unit that meets requirements (Unit assignment). These batch result data are acquired in relation to the batch ID.9. Batch Management Functions (Option) 9-4 Process Management Functions (1) Recipe setup Set up a recipe using process management functions after completing the corresponding master recipe. These batch results can be printed out as batch reports. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Then. there are two methods: manual start from the special batch management window or automatic start after download. execute recipe setup and create control recipe. (4) Batch results acquisition Batch results are acquired after recipe execution.2006-00 . or using SEBOL. Use standard builder to create unit instrument block in FCS as download target beforehand. Batch results consist of the formula used for execution and a log of messages generated. You can monitor and control batch process status using the special batch management window.

10. so that utilizing above information as the field device maintenance information is easy. • Device master PRM server • Maintenance information • Parts list • Related information • Historical information • Device setting information • Inspection memo • Inspection schedule • Audit trail of device parameters PRM client (instrumentation and control) PRM client (maintenance) Field communication server Parameter setting performed by operator Input of inspection and control data Online setting and acquisition of various parameters 4 to 20 mA analog devices Foundation Fieldbus Devices HART Devices F100001. It classifies and manages the device maintenance information. Furthermore. refer to GS 33Y05Q10-31E. has the features. so that it is available for the versatile maintenance ways. and configuration information of devices. Plant Resource Manager (PRM) PRM (Plant Resource Manager). TI 33Q01E10-01E June 30. in various aspects. such as inspection schedules. such as the capability of the preventive maintenance management and so on.ai Figure Plant Resource Manager (PRM) Overview SEE ALSO For details on Plant Resource Manager (PRM). It contributes to saving of maintenance cost and reduction of TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) by the utilization of field device information. inspection memos. corresponding to the bi-directional digital field networks represented by Foundation Fieldbus.2006-00 . which contributes to enhance the efficiency of maintenance management of field devices. It can also acquire the operation information of field devices from a remote area via the remote bus. Plant of Maintenance Inspection Works 10-1 10.

operation history of setting. besides record reservation. which can easily and safely restore the past operation parameters by the parameter comparison function. revisions and so forth Inspection schedules. calibrations. parts composition Events of device. and maintenance work records into the database. TI 33Q01E10-01E June 30. device types. Table Maintenance Information Items Contents Maintenance Information Managed by PRM Information Managed by PRM Device master Maintenance information Parts list Related information Historical information Device setting information Device tag names. and so forth Device specification sheets. it can record together who operated and what was the purpose. In addition to the data. events from device. such as operation history of setting /calibration and so forth. diagnoses and so forth Setting data to devices These information items are identified and related with each other.2006-00 . manufacturer names. inspection memos Parts list including spare parts information.1 The maintenance information items managed by PRM are shown below. Especially. is also available. The historical information reserves the history of the items affecting to device. by the device ID assigned to device.10. Plant of Maintenance Inspection Works 10-2 10. data restoration ability. so that you can call the information items easily.

Kind of view Plant view Network view Class view Device Navigation Function In the plant according to its size.10. device type. as well as running devices. there are from tens to thousands of devices. Plant of Maintenance Inspection Works 10-3 10. and the spare devices. such as vender. In accordance with field network configuration. devices under repair and so forth. By using this function. In accordance with the use status. PRM use the Device Navigation Function shown in below table. spare devices.2006-00 . revision and so forth. Table Device Navigation Function Function Display according to the logical position (plant hierarchy). devices under calibration and broken-down devices. display devices with the wiring conditions. TI 33Q01E10-01E June 30. Display devices in the each type.2 To get the necessary information form many devices in understandable way. you can easily identify the status and type of devices. display in the categories of running devices at the plant.

a valve manipulates directly process. as well as the device status (normal or abnormal). • Can confirm the contents of abnormality by the alarm event notice corresponding to abnormal condition of device. Support of Record and Report of Maintenance Inspection Result The management of the maintenance inspection result as work records is the effective information source of next inspection. parts replaced for broken-down device. comparison and setting of parameter) • The method execution function (execution of specific calibration procedure of field device) • The PLUG-IN application function (execution of specific tool of field device) Valve Diagnosis Among the field devices. Calibration of Device For the field devices compliant with Foundation Fieldbus and HART. The preventive maintenance enhances not only the efficiency of maintenance works but also the availability of plant operation by the prolongation of inspection period. • Make the inspection records according to inspection schedule. the following functions are available as the remote calibration function. so that the diagnosis of the valve is important.10. countermeasures.2006-00 . • Can confirm the device parameters under abnormality. • The parameter setting function (display. • Display explicitly the work status by the approval function for completion of inspection work. you can confirm the device status immediately when abnormality occurred. Furthermore. The device information acquired online is effective for making inspection records of device. By the enhanced function of valve positioner. Plant of Maintenance Inspection Works 10-4 10. By acquisition and store of the valve information. and the history of start and finish is also managed and unified. These functions enable the system to present the information regarding the influence degree for plant operation when the device abnormality occurred. PRM provides following functions as support of record and report of maintenance inspection result. The improvement of valve accuracy contributes to improve the quality and output-rate. the statistical preventive maintenance of valve is available. and availability of the spare device. TI 33Q01E10-01E June 30. as the specific PLUG-IN application of device. By the environment. PRM provides the execution environment of diagnosis program by the tool prepared in each device. • Print the device information and maintenance inspection records in the unified format (self documentation function). the most suitable diagnosis to device is executed. and save the monitoring works at the plant-floor. the appropriate tuning based on storing information enhances the valve accuracy. the high accuracy diagnosis of valve has become available.3 Support of Maintenance Inspection Works Device Status Monitoring By using the device status monitoring function from a remote place.

Access Control Function (Personnel Authentication) • To protect systems and data from any break-ins • To control individual operations by authenticating an operator. FDA-related packages and responses in those package functions are shown in the table below: Table Optional Packages and Responses in Individual Group Functions HIS group. The LHS6510 Long-term Data Archive Package stores trend data. vary according to each user. no optional package is required because access control is included in the standard security function. However. recipe builder. and historical messages over a long term on the HIS in which the package is installed. and engineering group engineers (instrumentation engineers. for providing criteria of acceptance by FDA that electronic records and electronic signatures are equivalent to paper records and handwritten signatures executed on paper. What. and System Maintenance (When.2007-00 . FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Function (including option) This function is compliant with 21 CFR Part 11 (Electronic Records. refer to TI 33Q01A61-01E. FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compllant Function (including option) 11-1 11. access control/audit trail -(*1) x(*2) Engineering group (system builder. issued by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Part 11 specifically describes the “Security” and “Integrity” of electronic record. Where. Access control and the realization of audit trails. this package is not required. an instrumentation engineer. CENTUM CS 3000 provides Access Control Function and Audit Trail Management Function to be compliant with its requirements. Who. closing data.report builder) access control/audit trail x - Optional package Access Administrator Package (FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 compliant) Consolidated Historical Message Package (meeting FDA) (*3) *1: *2: *3: If access control is realized in an HIS. hereinafter referred to as Part 11). Why. How?) Users are classified into HIS group operators. and a recipe engineer Audit Trail Management Function • Automatically record the history of Operation. SEE ALSO For details on FDA: 21 CFR Part 11. as well as setting locations. Recipe Creation. If an Exaquantum/Batch is installed as a historical message management server for HIS audit trail management. Electronic Signatures.11. TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec 14. recipe engineers and operators with user rights of reporting). the LHS6510 does not cover such functions as the creation of reports retrieved from archived files and output as PDF files.

F110001. The summarized and excerpted regulations from Part 11 regarding Data “Security” and “Integrity”.2006-00 .11.ai Figure Example of a System Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compllant Function (including option) 11-2 The example of system configuration is provided in the below. individual solution in CENTUM CS 3000 system are provided in the following pages. A: Audit Operator Events (Operation Events) HIS Access Control Audit Trail Access Control Audit Trail Report B: Audit Operator Events (Report and Print Events) (*1) Audit Trails of the Whole System and All Events System Administrator Audit Trail Database of user groups (A to D) Audit Trail data server •Save Data •Search Data •Report Search Result Site HIS Access Control Audit Trail C: Audit Instrumentation Engineer Events System Builders Access Control Audit Trail Ethernet PC D: Audit Recipe Engineer Events Recipe Builders Access Control Audit Trail V net FCS HIS : Human Interface Station FCS : Field Control Station Note: Do not install engineering builder to HIS.

Only the solution for operators is available. (*2) Identify by user ID.10 (g) §11. we utilize 3rd party product. Also. CENTUM CS 3000 provides following functions to meet the regulations. Only password entry is required from second log in Electronic signatures that are not §11.300 (b) §11.300 (a) identification code and password §11. (*1).2006-00 . password. Table Clauses Regarding Data Security and Solution in CENTUM CS 3000 Solution in CENTUM CS 3000 Control by user ID and password. and/or fingerprint at operation (*1) Add classification of roles to users Add functional limitation to the object to be operated (Instrument.11. Control by user ID and fingerprint.1 Data security is assured with tight restrictions for access rights. FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compllant Function (including option) 11-3 11.200 (a) based upon biometrics §11. Signature and Electronic Records Automatic recording of Audit trail.200 (b) Electronic signatures based upon Identify by user ID and fingerprint. (*1). Window) Data Security Clauses Excerpted from Part 11 §11. The contents of “Data Security” in Part 11 is classified into three major parts as below: • Making sure users only have authorized access into the system • Making sure users have accessed are authorized to carry out their roles • Making sure only the actual person has authorized performs operation Excerpted clauses from Part 11 regarding Data Security are listed below. (*2) Uniqueness of each combined §11. (*2) biometrics Double registration check when user ID is registered Privilege is required for the registration of user ID Audit trail records automatically when user ID is registered. (*2) Automatically record audit trail of alarm For the fingerprint authentication device. code and password issuance Detection and report function for unauthorized access Alerting system alarm when wrong operations are performed continuously more than the number of times set previously. Identify by user ID and password.300 (d) *1: *2: Periodically check of identification Setting the validity of password.10 (d) Limiting system access (personnel authentication) Authority checks §11. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.50 Manifestation of Electronic Security builder and its print. The solution for engineers is in phased-plan.

what.2006-00 . Also. who. where.2 To assure the data integrity. why. personnel. Table Clauses Regarding Data Integrity and Solution in CENTUM CS 3000 Solution in CENTUM CS 3000 Data Integrity Clauses Excerpted from Part 11 §11.10 (c) §11. Audit trail automatically records log whenever a user changes electric records in the system. file translation information. and memory capacity used in a DCS system Audit trail Device checks Controls over system documentation for maintenance Audit trail (when. PDF. XML) • Retrieval of date and time. an appropriate measure must be prepared. communication capacity. fixes.10 (k-1) Audit trail over system TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Meta-data includes raw data. systems. according to specific retrieval conditions • Output retrieval results and retrieval conditions together as PDF files Archive and protection of records • Check functions of disk spare memory capacity in data archive function • Check functions of CPU load. electronic records include operational record and meta-data. messages. Moreover. To verify the operation result data has not been changed. In CENTUM CS 3000 systems. CENTUM CS 3000 provides following functions to meet the regulations.10 (e) §11. audit trail does not allow any changes.10 (h) §11. and deletions after the log is recorded. meta-data such as the audit trial with time-stamps or system-configuration modified record is demanded. • Plant operation performed by operators • System maintenance performed by system engineers • Recipe creation performed by recipe engineers • Report creation by operators with user rights of reporting §11. and the like. The data integrity verification includes providing log of not only the intentional data falsification and deletions but also accidental operations. batch ID.11.10 (b) Records in both human readable Retrieval function of historical message and electronic form Output in general file formats (CSV.10 (k-2) §11. Another integral part of data integrity verification by audit trial is accurate time data. and audit trail that are used for assuring its operational records. when following operation is performed. FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compllant Function (including option) 11-4 11. how) records automatically. Electronic Records Operation records • Operation result data • Alarm data • Trend data • Recipe data Meta-data • Raw data • Audit trail of operation • Audit trail of system maintenance Audit trail regarding system configuration file (application file) after validation • Audit trail of recipe management Excerpted clauses from Part 11 regarding Data Integrity are listed below.

Online Manual 12-1 12. Using whole-text search functions. Adobe PDF file format. The manual may be displayed and printed on demand. You can select (start from) “Read me”. 12. the de facto standard for distributing electronic documents on the Internet.2006-00 . “Engineering Basic Operation”. Online Manual All manuals are provided as electronic documents on CD-ROM. From Help Menu of Builder You can select an online manual from the Help Menu of any of the builder component programs. You can jump to related documents from the document map.12. You can select (start from) “Using Online Manual”.1 Running Online Manual Viewer From Windows Start Menu You can select the online manual and start the PDF viewer from the Windows Start Menu. “Reference Index” or “Using Online Manual”. or “Reference Index”. “Builder Definition Items List”. is used. “Document Map”.and electronic document save storage space. it is easier to find information in electronic documents than in paper documents . TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

Additional Search Functions Retrieval search: Search history: Search is made in the previously searched results. then a list of builder definition items for the current builder is displayed. Definition item search: Search is made for a builder definition item. List of Builder Definition Items If you select “List of Builder Definition Items” from the help menu of any builder program. Search is made in the page displayed. Click any item to jump to the corresponding page in the reference manual.12. Up to 20 latest searched results are saved. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.2 Here we explain some convenient (PDF-specific) ways of using the online manual. Convenient Ways to Use Online Manual Using Table of Contents and Index The table of contents and index contain clickable links that allow you to jump to the corresponding page. Search Functions The manual provides the following search functions available on its search window: Find all: Page search: Search is made in the entire online manual.2006-00 . Online Manual 12-2 12. Registered pages can be rearranged or de-registered as favorites in web browser. Favorites Frequently accessed pages can be registered for easy later retrieval.

and managed. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. and the SOE data is displayed on the SOE Viewer in chronological order. which captures the events at the fast speed of 1ms potentially resulting in a plant trip and allows the acquired event data to be stored. The SOE data is output as a trip report or can be output to an external historian through an OPC.2006-00 . The SEM applies trip signals from a device. This feature will be effective for analysis of trip causes and data management. thereby allowing SOE data to be acquired automatically at the specified trigger signal.13. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) The Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) provides the Sequence of Events (SOE) recording feature. compressor. displayed. A time-stamp synchronizing with an external master clock is added to SOE data acquired by the SOE input module. such as a turbine. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) 13-1 13. that has serious impact on the plant operation to the sequence of events (SOE) input modules. fan. or pump.

1 The basic system configuration of SEM is shown in the figure below. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) 13-2 13. SOE Viewer Screen OPC Client (Exaquantum) System Configuration Ethernet SOE Server & OPC Server SOE Viewer & HIS SOE Viewer & HIS SOE Server Configurator & ENG V net GPS Antenna Master Clock Ethernet FCS FCS FCS FCS IRIG-B pulse-width coded signal Process inputs/outputs (including SOE signals) F130101.13.2006-00 .ai Figure SEM Basic System Configuration TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.

trip detail display function.2006-00 . the SOE viewers that display stored data under specified conditions. The acquired SOE data can be displayed and output for any purpose in accordance with the event message display function. This feature allows the integrated management of SOE data by the Plant Information Management System (PIMS). and trip report function supported by the SOE viewer. and an SOE server configurator that defines SOE server system configuration. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) 13-3 13.ai Figure Functional configuration of the sequence of events manager (SEM) TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The SOE data can be output to an external OPC client. The SOE data is time-stamped in the SOE input module and sent to the SOE server via the SOE interface module (SB311) in the FCS. such as the Exaquantum historian. an SOE server that acquires SOE data from the FCS via Ethernet and stores them.13. The FCS performs a time synchronization with an external master clock using an IRIG-B time code format through an RS-422 signal. In addition. SOE Server Configurator SOE Viewer Functional Configuration User entry Setting Function Event readout Definition information settings Viewer Function Trip report Viewer Message readout Supervisory Computer HIS Microsoft SQL Server Definition information file Gathering file SEM OPC Interface Monitoring SOE Database Size Historical message file SOE Server alarm display Operating status display SOE Server Gathering Function Time settings FCS Event readout ENG FCS Properties SB311 Card Definitions IOM Builder Status Input (SOE) Time synchronization IRIG-B SB311 & ADV151-E Card supports Time Stamp Definition information downloading SOE signal F130201.2 The SEM consists basically of a sequence of events (SOE) input module that captures plant event signals. an FCS with an SOE interface module (SB311).

The SOE server operates when an SOE server package (LPC6900) is installed in an SQL server PC on which Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running. The SOE viewers provide the functions listed below: • Event mode display: Lists data source parameters set by the SOE viewer property and all messages matched with the date and time. connected to the SOE server via Ethernet. and the other for SOE data transmission to SOE viewers. The SOE viewers operate when the SOE Viewer Package (LPC6920) is installed on a PC running Windows 2000 or Windows XP. The SOE server uses two independent Ethernet networks: one for SOE data acquisition from FCSs. Basic SEM Configuration Equipment and Software Packages SOE Server The SOE server acquires and stores time-stamped SOE data from FCSs. The SOE server runs on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003.3 The SEM is comprised of the following basic equipment and software packages. • Trip detail display: Displays all trip detail records relating to trigger events selected on the trip trigger mode display screen. SOE Viewer The SOE viewers display SOE data stored by the SOE server in chronological order according to preset retrieval conditions. The number of SOE viewer clients that can be connected to one SOE server is determined by the number of Windows and SQL server client licenses.13. and has a server function that transfers the stored SOE data to multiple SOE viewers upon request. • Automatic trip report mode display: Automatically acquires newly generated trip triggers. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) 13-4 13. Configure the system with the number of client licenses needed for SOE viewers. • Trip report output: Outputs the trip reports acquired by trip triggers to a csv type file and/or a printer. • Trip trigger mode display: Lists trip trigger events in the range of dates set by the SOE viewer property.2006-00 . TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Up to 2000 SOE inputs can be acquired by one SOE server.

799 07/10/03 14:47:48.798 07/10/03 14:47:47.798 07/10/03 14:47:47. The SOE viewer can display data sources for up to eight SOE servers.798 07/10/03 14:47:47. Up to 16 FCS’s can be connected to an SOE server.799 Events 282 to 297 of 9520 Query Filter No Filt Clear Type SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H SOE SOE-H ID SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_RTN SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM SOE_ALM Resource SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD SOECARD Reference SOEDI0026 SOEDI0027 SOEDI0028 SOEDI0029 SOEDI0030 SOEDI0031 SOEDI0032 SOEDI0001 SOEDI0002 SOEDI0003 SOEDI0004 SOEDI0005 SOEDI0006 SOEDI0007 SOEDI0008 Message Plant DI0026 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0027 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0028 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0029 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0030 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0031 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0032 SOE Input Recover Plant DI0001 SOE Input Plant DI0002 SOE Input Plant DI0003 SOE Input Plant DI0004 SOE Input Plant DI0005 SOE Input Plant DI0006 SOE Input Plant DI0007 SOE Input Plant DI0008 SOE Input Tip Detail [SOEDI0006] F130301.799 07/10/03 14:47:48.798 T 07/10/03 14:47:48. The ADV151-E module specifications are the same as those of the ADV151-P module except for the SOE-specific functions. An Ethernet port is connected to the SOE server via an Ethernet hub.799 H 07/10/03 14:47:48.799 H 07/10/03 14:47:48. Up to 32-point SOE signals can be applied to one ADV151-E module.soe Action View Help Prev Next Up Trip Trip Setup Print Export File E T Event Trip Timestamp Quality 07/10/03 14:47:47. An RS-422 port is connected to an external master clock via an IRIG-B branch unit inside the FCS. and an YCB128 RIO bus terminator is attached at the end of the FCS.2006-00 . TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30.ai Sorted by Timestamp Query at 07/10/03 14:52:25 Figure Trip detail display The SOE viewer displays SOE data stored by the SOE server and can also access HIS message databases and Unified Operator Interface (UOI) servers to allow an integrated data display of SOE and other message data.798 07/10/03 14:47:47.799 H 07/10/03 14:47:48.13. These models incorporate two SOE interface modules (SB311) and one IRIG-B branch unit per FCS. Field Control Station (FCS) with SOE Interface Module The SEM provides the following four FCS models.798 07/10/03 14:47:47.798 07/10/03 14:47:47.D:\CS 3000\his\users\Soe\Viewer\SoeViewerProp. or 2000 or more SOE data items are used. Up to eight message data sources can be assigned. RS-422 cables are cascadeconnected to the IRIG-B branch units in each FCS. For each input terminal. • Models AFS30D-HE and AFG30D-HE 19-inch Rack Mountable.799 07/10/03 14:47:48. SOE Digital Input Module (ADV151-E) The SOE signals are connected to the SOE Digital Input Module (ADV151-E) installed on a local node in the FCS. the SOE signal input specifications can be set. use multiple SOE servers. The status of SOE signal can be used as FCS control and monitoring signals. If 16 or more FCS’s are used. Duplexed Field Control Units for FIO and 19-inch rack mountable • Models AFS40D-HE and AFG40D-HE Duplexed Field Control Units for FIO with Cabinet The SB311 module is installed in a dual-redundant configuration consisting of ESB-bus modules with an Ethernet port (for SOE server) and an RS-422 port (for time synchronization). Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) S 13-5 SOE Viewer .799 H 07/10/03 14:47:48.

performs time synchronization by a pulse-width modulated IRIG-B code signal using an external master clock that incorporates GPS and through an RS422-interface. to an OPC client. to assure 1-ms SOE data resolution and time. In addition.13. such as an engineering PC. Time synchronization for SOE viewers. 13. human interface stations (HIS’s). time synchronization by the SOE server is executed periodically with an FCS via Ethernet for SOE data acquisition. • Monitor the SOE server • Display operating status of the SB311 and ADV151-E • Monitor free disk space capacity of the SOE server • Backup and restore the SOE server database System Monitoring and Maintenance Functions TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. The SEM OPC interface function works when installing the SEM OPC Interface Package (LPC6930) on a PC running as an SOE server.4 The SEM provides the following functions for system monitoring and maintenance. The SOE Server Configurator (LPC6910) operates when installed on a PC running Windows 2000 or Windows XP connected to the SOE server via Ethernet. use a network time protocol (NTP) to separately set the SOE server. depends on the system configuration.2006-00 . SEM OPC Interface The SEM provides an OPC interface function for transferring SOE data stored in the SOE server. connected via Ethernet as an OPC alarm and events (A&E) server. and network equipment. External Master Clock The FCS. So. such as Exaquantum. Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) 13-6 SOE Server Configurator The SOE Server Configurator is a builder for the SOE server to define the configuration required for acquiring SOE data from the FCS.

Event Viewer Package provides graphs as bellow.ai Figure Event Viewer Window TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. Upon the occurrence of the most recent event. Event Viewer Package 14-1 14. • Category Sort Window (right top) Display sorted events with various conditions. These windows are allowing an intuitive and quantitative analysis of historical messages through mouse operations. find and print process alarms. etc. and the like. inclusive of the date upon which the event occurred. which provides an overview display of various historical messages as alarm message records. • Message Summary Window (lower left) Display all messages of daily (0:00 to 23:59) historical messages • Event Balance Trend (EBT) graph window (left top) Display the rate of event occurrences per minute. There are number of events that action required to operator (on the positive axis) and action by operator (on the negative axis). operator work records. Event type. operation records. etc.This package enables plant analysis for the purpose of improving operation efficiency by achieving upgraded controllability and further automation as well as reduce operator’s workload. Main objectives of the historical message report window are to display. tag name order. Event Viewer Package Event Viewer Package can search and analyze by filtering historical message from various viewpoints. Event Viewer Package allows visual analysis of historical messages with an event viewer window collaborating with the Standard Operation and Monitoring Function on HIS. days when no events occur are not included in this period.) • Point ID Window (lower right) Display event IDs such as tag names with sorted by frequency. (Alarm occur/recover.2006-00 . the data storage period is the past seven days. EBT (event balance trend) Graph Window Category Sort Window Message Summary Window Point ID Window F140001. and system and process related events. However. In addition. The HIS includes a historical message report window.14.

stores them over a long term. An Exaopc OPC Interface Package (for HIS) is required to acquire process data and alarm messages.2006-00 . providing plant analysis features. and displays them with a specific viewer function. Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH) 15-1 15.ai LTTH Server Function • Acquires tag items defined by the CENTUM CS 3000 trend acquisition pen assignment builder and event messages and stores them over a long term.15. • Runs on a PC separate from a human interface station (HIS) and acquires data via an OPC interface package incorporated in the HIS. LTTH Server Ethernet LTTH Client ENG HIS OPC HIS HIS HIS V net SFCS FFCS LFCS KFCS F150001. Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH) Long Term Trend Historian (LTTH) acquires process data and alarm messages. TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. LTTH consists of an LTTH server and LTTH clients.

15. and screen displaying tag names that most frequent of alarm occurrences within a specified period are displayed together. The LTTH data acquisition period is automatically determined in accordance with the data acquisition period specified by the HIS as given below: Data acquisition period specified on HIS One second Ten seconds One minute Two minutes Five minutes Ten minutes LTTH data acquisition period Ten seconds One minute One minute Two minutes Five minutes Ten minutes TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. alarms and messages can linked to each other screens for display. alarms and event messages. these data.2006-00 . Trend compare screen Two trend graphs are displayed side-by-side to compare current trend data with former trend data. The following screens are provided: Trend and alarm analysis screens Trend data. Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH) 15-2 LTTH Client Function • Runs on the HIS and displays trend data and event messages saved on an LTTH server. • Allows a simple analysis of alarms and event messages that occur during a specified period. Data to Be Saved Data Type Trend data Message Amount of Data Saved On a per-acquired-data basis All messages at a time Data Save Period For one year For one year Data Acquisition Period Data to be acquired are specified by Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment on the HIS.

Each function of Exapilot is provided based on the operational efficiency improvement cycle. and affect operational efficiency. Study. so that user can add support for plant changes or new operating methods – and improve operational efficiency – by repeating the Exapilot cycle to create new Exapilot applications. Exapilot Operation . CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages Yokogawa’s Exa-series software packages eliminate the information gap between business and control domains and allow Manufacturing Execution System (MES) technology to be applied to increasing plant safety and plant efficiency. Exapilot applications use Standard Operation Procedures (SOP) to display operation know-how in an intuitive format.2006-00 .Plant A Reactor Phase Exapilot: Operation Efficiency Increase Package File Operation Change View View Window Message Tools Help 100% Plant A Reactor Phase Heating Time Message 10:50:15 Start Heating Phase START Loading Heating 10:10:20 Start Loading Ingredients 10:02:13 Check Recipe Ingredients 09:23:10 Start Loading Solvent 09:03:33 Check Solvent Recipe 08:50:09 Start Plant A Reactor Phase Cure Drain Condense Confirm Message Crystallize 08:37:47 Check Phase Confirmed 99/06/30 10:50:27 Generated Message 99/06/30 10:50:15 Start Heating Phase Where OK Cancel Heating Phase End START TIC00.1 For non-steady-state operation – such as startup and shutdown. and maintain quality of operation at a consistently high level.16. Improve”. “Plan. CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages 16-1 16. and increasing product quality. or manual intervention during normal operation – variation in operator skills can cause process irregularities or product quality problems. Define. an experienced operator can incorporate his skills to automate operation and monitoring.ai Figure Exapilot Operation Efficiency Increase Package display example TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. With the Exapilot package. 16. Operate. emergency operation in response to process or device abnormalities. SV Set to 50 DEGC TIC001. reducing manpower. MODE Changed to AUT AND Heating Complete If Heating doesn't complete in Set Time Phase switches to Pause Mode Heating Time Monitoring Timer Loading Time Over F160101.

data sources range from instruments in the factory to the control room database. CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages 16-2 16. In the process industries. with its Exaopc OPC (OLE for Process Control) interface package.2 Recently there has been progress in sharing data between DCS and Manufacturing Execution System (MES) computer systems. Yokogawa. so MES computer access to operating data was not easy. Exaopc: OPC Interface Package MES Application Exaplog Exaquantum Exapilot Exasmoc Exarqe User Application Features of Exaopc OPC interface • Uses OPC standard interface • Can connect to many types of system • Can act as process data server for • Process data historian CENTUM CS. CS 1000. µXL PCS *2: Applies to CENTUM CS 1000/CS 3000 only. CS 3000 CENTUM-XL. MES applications In addition Yokogawa-specific functions Process data Other company PLCs • DCS message historian • Message output to HIS*2 • Notify taglist equalization • Security management functions*2 Other company DCSes F160201.2006-00 . offers an OPC Foundation (*1) standard interface which solves these problems. Until now. accessing DCS operating data from a supervisory computer has been rather difficult. *1: The OPC foundation is a non-profit foundation with over 300 corporate members. plant information is useful at the top level of the business. Yokogawa also offers proprietary functions which enhance this interface.ai Figure Exaopc OPC Interface Package TI 33Q01B10-01E June 30. and users are demanding information systems which provide timely information to support business activity.16.

2006-00 .Appendix Correspondence of Abbreviations and Product Models App.27.-1 Appendix Table Correspondence of Abbreviations and Product Models Abbreviation KFCS KFCS2 Product Name Standard Type Field Control Station for FIO Enhanced Type Field Control Station for FIO Standard Type Field Control Station for RIO Enhanced Type Field Control Station for RIO Compact Field Control Station for FIO Compact Field Control Station for RIO Safety Control Units (Rack Mountable Type) Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS Product Model AFS30 AFS40 AFG30 AFG40 AFS10 AFS20 AFG10 AFG20 AFF50 PFC-H SSC10 SSC50 LPCKIT YPCKIT Common PC ABC11- ACG10S Correspondence of Abbreviations and Product Models Category Field Control Stations LFCS LFCS2 FFCS SFCS Safety Control Station SCS Human Interface Stations Bus Converter Communication Gateway HIS BCV CGW Open Display Style Console Type HIS Desktop Type HIS Bus Converter Communication Gateway TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.

Blank Page .

.................................4-10 Analog I/O Module ..Ind-1 CENTUM CS 3000 Production Control System System Overview TI 33Q01B10-01E 12th Edition INDEX A Access to Relevant Builders ..........................4-17 Calculation Functions ........................................................4-10 Analog Faceplate Block ............................................. 8-6 APCS Function Specifications ................. 8-7 Applicable Data for Data Exchange ......................................................2-50 Choose the Type of Control Station Based on Plant Scale .........16-1 CENTUM Data Access Library ...................... 2-4 Bus Converter (BCV) ........................6-10...2-25 Application Standards .....................................................1-8 Achievement of High Availability by Redundancy .................. 8-1 Advanced Process Control Station (APCS) ..........3-63 Achievement of both Safety and High Availability ........ 9-1 BCV Settings ..........6-20 Application Capacity of Compact FCS for RIO ............................2007-00 ........ 2-4 Alarms & Events (A&E) Server Function .........................2-34 An Example of Window Hierarchies ......................3-58 Common Operation and Monitoring Functions ................................................................................3-15 Alarm Status Transfer up Window Hierarchy ............4-10 Calibration of Device .........................2-53 CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages ........... 8-4 APCS Engineering ............................3-40 Advanced Control Functions .......................12-2 Advanced Alarm Filter Function ................. 8-3 B Basic SEM Configuration Equipment and Software Packages ............................. 1-6 Breakpoint Functions .........................................3-41 “BEST2” Maintenance System .................2-30 Common Block Information .....................................................................2-50 Arithmetic Calculation Blocks ...............7-4 Achievement of Safety Rating SIL3 with Single Configuration ............................................................. 1-8 Additional Search Functions ... 2-4 Communications Input/Output .............. 3-4 A General Purpose Server Platform ............13-4 Batch Management Functions (Option)..........3-69 Acquisition of Certification Conforming to International Standard ...........................................3-58 Combination of I/O Modules and Terminal Blocks ......................................................................... 8-4 APCS Operation and Monitoring ......................................................................... 8-2 APCS Simulation Testing ........................................................................................................4-10 Auxiliary Blocks ..................................3-57 CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization ...................................... 1-6 CE Mark Compliance (Electrical and electronic equipment without CE mark approval can’t be sold in Europe) .....................2-55 Benefits .............................................. 3-8 APCS Control Functions ..................................................................................... 6-8 Business Information PCs and Supervisory Computers .......................................10-4 Cautions ................................................... 6-12 Builder .........3-14 Close Connection with FCS ................................................................. 8-3 Closing Data Information ...............14........................................................ 1-5 Circulate Functions ........................4-10 Auxiliary Windows ................3-15 Alarm Processing Functions . 3-9 Analog Calculation Blocks .. 2-3 C C-Tick Mark Compliance (Electrical and electronic equipment without C-Tick mark can’t be sold in Australia and New Zealand) ..............................................................................................................................4-21 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec.3-57 Alarm Priority Levels .................3-38 CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL Migration to CENTUM CS 3000 ................................ 7-4 Acquire a Wide Variety of Alarms and Events .... 3-3 Communications Gateway Unit (CGW) ........... 8-5 APCS Overview ....................3-57 Alarm & Event Information .................2-50 Calculation Blocks.........................

........ 2-6 Drastically Synchronize ......................................................................... 1-1 ER Bus Interface Module ..........................2-53 Dual-redundant SCS and Reliability of SCS....... 6-3 Engineering Data Exchange Function ................... 1-7 Easy Links to Information Systems (ERP........................... 7-18 CPU Failure........................ 5-1 Compact FCS for RIO (PFCh-H/-S/-E) ...................................... 4-3 Control Drawing Definitions ............................................2-38 Console Type HIS .............2-15 D Data Access (DA) Server Function ................. 2-47 ESB Buses ..................................................................6-1....2-16 ESB Bus ...........................................................................................12-2 Coordination with SmartPlant Instrumentation ..............3-63 Connecting an ITV Camera .....6-20 Engineering Environment .......... 5-5 Dedicated Cabinets ...2-45........................................... 2-8 Consolidated Alarm Management Software for Human Interface Station (CAMS for HIS) (Option) .......................2-25 Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring .............................3-57 Data Acquisition Period ..............3-64 Container Functions .........7-21 Disk Capacity ................................. 1-3 Easy Operation ........................................................... 4-2 Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions ........... Know-how) .........6-14 Domain .................. 6-5 Concurrent Engineering on a Network ....................................................................................2-25 Configuration of Engineering Functions ........................2-10 DevicePanel Functions ................3-69 Desktop Type HIS ...................................... 7-11 Define Alarms and Events Attribute .2-23 Dedicated Cable ....................................................................................................................3-13 E Easy Function Configuration ......... 6-3 Engineering Function for CENTUM CS 3000 Integration.. MES systems) ................ 6-5 Configuration and Mounting of Compact FCS for RIO .....................................7-17 Dynamic Window Set .......................... 1-6 Control Drawings (Option) ..........7-14 Configuration of Safety Node Units (SNB10D)..................................... 1-5 Control Objects .......................................... 5-1 Connection with Other Systems ...............................................................................6-15 Edit Table of Contents ........................................................ 2-3 Engineering Procedure ................................................14....................................15-2 Data Binding Functions .......2007-00 ...................................................... 2-45...10-4 Differences between Forcing and Override .........................................7-18 ESB Bus and ER Bus ....7-16 Configured Information Reference Function (Option) ... 6-6 Enhanced MC/Switch Instrument Blocks .........................................6-20 Correspondence of Abbreviations and Product Models ............. 1-6 Compliance with Various Standards ......................3-53 Distributed Engineering of FCS .......................... App............. 9-1 Edit Headers............ 6-2 Configuration of FCS Control Functions ..........................10-3 Device Status Monitoring ......6-20 Data Writing ......................3-54 Displaying Trends from Other Stations .....................................................................6-21 Device Navigation Function ...........................3-48 Convenient Ways to Use Online Manual ...................................................................2-49 Data Flow between Function Blocks and Subsystems ....................................................3-48 Control Functions Support a Wide Range of Applications .........................3-24 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec..... 6-1 Engineering Functions on dedicated PC .......................................15-2 Data Transfer Unit ..........................................................-1 CPU................. 4-4 Control Drawing Window (Option) ..................................................................................................6-15 Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS ............................................................7-26 Engineering PC (ENG) ........................3-19 Control Status Display Window ......... Software................2-50 Concurrent Engineering ............................ 5-4 Data Security.....4-19 Enhance and Integrate Existing Systems ................. 1-6 Enterprise Technology Solutions ..........3-37 Connecting Subsystems .............................................6-18 Control Drawing Examples .........2-36 Connector Type Multiplexer Module .................. 11-4 Data Reading ........3-69 Consolidated Historical Message Viewer Meeting FDA Regulations (Option) ................ 6-3 Engineering Functions ..................... 7-4 Connector Type Digital I/O Module ................3-24 Continue to Use Existing User Resources (Hardware............................................... 3-1 Engineering and Operation/Monitoring Functions on the same PC ......................... 11-3 Data to Be Saved .................................... Footers .............................................. 2-47................................................................................................................................ 3-2 Configuration of Safety Control Units .............Ind-2 Communications with Subsystems Through an FCS (Option) ............................................................ 5-4 Data Integrity ...............7-27 Compatible with Other Yokogawa Systems..............................................

................................... 2-8 Hybrid Faceplate Block .. 4-1 Free Signal Flow between Control Drawings .......................... 1-5 High-speed Data Update ....................................................................................3-58 Historical Message Reports .................................. 2-4 Exaopc: OPC Interface Package ...................................................................13-5 Field Control Station Control Functions ...................................................2-19 FCS Status Display Window .................... 11-1 Features ..........2-33 I/O Module Nests ..................2-19 Field Wiring Using KS Cable Interface Adapter ..................... FFCS) ................................................................ 2-41 Fieldbus Connection (FCS for FIO) ...............................2-27 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec........................ 4-3 From Help Menu of Builder ....................................................................................................12-2 FCS Data Setting/Acquisition Functions (PICOT) (Option) ....... 1-5 G General-Purpose Calculation Blocks................................................................................................................. 9-1 Historical Message Information ...6-17 Graphic Objects ....2-42 Fieldbus Connection (FCS for RIO.................................................................. 2-8 HIS Setting Window ....3-46 Human Interface Station (HIS)..................................................................... 7-4 Features of the APCS ......................................................2-43 Fieldnetwork I/O (FIO) ........................................... 8-4 Function Block Lists .......................................6-13 Expert Trend Viewer Function (Option) .......................................Ind-3 ESB Bus Slave Interface Module...........................4-18 Faceplate Block Functions...3-55 Flow of Process..................................2-19 FCS for RIO Application Capacity...........2-31 FIO Nodes ...........13-3 Functional Safety Standards............................................................................ Compact FCS for RIO) ......................................................................................2-5.... 5-5 Hardware Configuration Devices .... 1-6 Hardware Configuration ..........2-13 FCS for RIO (LFCS............................2-4 Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (Option)................................3-59 FCS for FIO (KFCS.......................................................2-14 FCU Configuration in KFCS and KFCS2 ........................3-31 HIS Function Specifications ...................................3-44 FCU Configuration in FFCS .............................................3-18 Graphic Windows ............................................ 7-9 Hardware Configuration of SCS ...3-18 H Hardware ......5-6 Graphic Definitions..........................2-32 I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules.....................................................2-5......................4-3..............................................................................13-6 External Recorder Output Functions (Option) .......................2007-00 .........2-45........................................2-13 FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Function (including option) .. Durable System that can be Optimized for Your Plant .....6-20 Extending the V net ................. 4-1 Field Control Unit (FCU) ......................................6-16 F Faceplate Blocks...........3-56 Export Function .......... for Flexible System Configuration .................2-50 Functions of CAMS for HIS ................................................ 8-3 Fieldbus.................4-10 I I/O Module.....................2-3......................................................................................................................7-21 Four Types of FCS to Choose from......2-13 Field Control Unit (FCU) for RIO ...........................3-47 High-Reliability Controllers to Safeguard Your Plant..........................3-59 Features of ProSafe-RS ................2-13 FCS for FIO Application Capacities ...................16-1 Expanded Test Functions .........................3-66 Function Blocks........... 2-47 Flexible..............................3-59 Forcing and Override ............ KFCS2........ 3-1 Higher Engineering Efficiency ....2-16 I/O Modules ...............12-1 Full-Screen Mode..........................16-2 Exapilot: Operation Efficiency Increase Package................2-3....14-1 Exaopc .4-10 Favorites ...............................................2-31 Field Wiring Using Pressure Clamp Terminals .......... 3-4 Functional Configuration ....................................................................... 2-40 Event Acquisition.......................................................................7-13 Hardware Implementation Requirements........................................................................4-21 Field Control Station (FCS) .................................................................................3-69 General of VTSPortal .....................................3-67 Generic Name ..... LFCS2) ...........................4-12 Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (GSGW)...........................2-16 Ethernet.. 7-8 Help Dialog Box .................................2-27 Field Bus Input/Output ........4-10 General of CAMS for HIS........................ 2-12 Field Control Station (FCS) with SOE Interface Module ......................................................................7-22 Event Viewer Package ........12-1 From Windows Start Menu .................................14...3-69 Functions of SIOS ..2-40 External Master Clock ...........................................................................

. 3-4 Management Cost Reduction ..6-4 Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module ........................................................................ 4-8 Logic Chart Window (Option)...........................................................4-10 Long-term Data Archive Functions (Option) ........ 6-12 One-touch Multi-window Display Functions ..........................................................15-1 LTTH Client Function ........ 1-8 Inter-SCS Safety Communication . 4-6 Migrated Field Control Station (RFCS2) .....................12-1 Opening Windows and Acknowledging Process Alarms................... 3-5 Multiple Project Connection Functions (Option) ......................... 3-1 Open Environment .........................2-37 N Navigator Function .................................................................................................................................... 7-8 Number of Stations ............................................................................ 1-7 Online Maintenance ........3-39 Multi-window Display ..................................... 7-8 Number of SENGs ............... 8-3 Online Maintenance Functions ........................7-10 Input and Output of APCS........................ 1-6 Modbus Communication Package...............................2-16 Normalize/Standardize Alarms and Events .........3-66 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec...........................6-20 Improved Security and Safety for Plants .3-16 Opening Windows and Acknowledging System Alarms........ 3-11 Networks ..................................................................................................................3-30 Methods of Representing Sequences ........... 6-6 Input/Output Modules .........................................3-17 Open Display Style Console Type HIS ...................................................3-24 Multi-monitor Function ................................................Ind-4 I/O Reports ...........3-10 Navigator Window .....7-4 Import Function ...........4-13 One-shot Execution Functions ................................................ 1-8 Integration with Control System .............................................................................2-17 Mounting of LFCS FCUs and Nodes ...............7-24 Operations at Minor Error Occurrence ..................................................................... 7-4 Integrated Safety Instrumented System for Processes ................7-24 Operations at Major Error Occurrence ......... Increase Profits................6-10..............................................................4-14 Logic Chart Blocks .....................2007-00 M Maintenance Information Managed by PRM ..................................... 1-8 Individual Test ...................3-69 Number of SCSs ........... 1-6 Main Functions of CS Batch 3000 Package ............................................. 1-3 Open Interfaces (Option) ............ 1-6 Marine Standards.......3-57 Operating Modes ............ 7-6 Interface with FCS ...............................7-20 Operating Same Virtual FCS from Multiple PCs.........................................................6-13 Operating Screen Mode.................7-6 Merging of Engineering Data ........3-19 Integrated Monitoring with CS 3000 ............6-19 Online Manual .....................................................2-23 Multi-function Graphics ..... 9-2 Main Window ...................7-23 Mounting of FCS for FIO .................4-20 Offsite Block Functions (Option) ............. 6-5 Message Functions...2-18 ......................................7-24 Operation and Monitoring ...2-21 Node Units (NU) for FIO........................................................................................................3-31 I/O Units (IOU) ........................... 2-4 Migration from CENTUM CS 1000 to CS 3000 ..................................................... 3-1 Online Documentation ...... 3-5 Multi-window Mode ......................12-2 List of Function Blocks ....................14................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-26 Modbus Slave Communication Function ....................................... 3-4 Operations ................................................................. 7-8 L Links to Factory Automation (FA) Systems......................... 8-5 Mounting of I/O Units ........ 9-1 Open Environment for Optimizing the Whole Enterprise .............2-21 Node Interface Units (NIU).......................................2-21 Implementation of Control System Technologies ........................................2-26 Mounting of KFCS and KFCS2 ............................ 1-8 Improvement of Plant Safety .................3-50 Logic Operation Blocks .......................4-12 Operations at Fatal Error Occurrence .....................2-17 Mounting of FFCS ....... 8-5 Instrument Faceplates .................................................................................................10-2 Maintenance Service ............ 3-1 Multi-monitor Functions ........ 2-7 Minimize Total Cost of Ownership............................................................2-39 Nodes .............................................2-51 Mechanism of Inter-SCS Safety Communication ....3-66 Message Monitoring Window ..3-54 Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH) .............................................................. 1-3 List of Builder Definition Items ...................15-1 O Offsite (Option) ....................................................15-2 LTTH Server Function ...

........2-51 Projects ...............3-45 Search Functions ...................3-57 Process Input/Output ....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-50 Saving Events ............2-32 Remote Maintenance (Option) ................................ 8-4 SCS Global Switch Communication .....................3-17 Process Alarm Window ...........4-5....................3-12 Plant Resource Manager (PRM) ........10-1 Potential Features of VTSPortal ..........................................................3-34 Report Printing from Other PC ...........................12-1 Run on General Purpose PC ...................................................................... 9-3 .............................3-32 Redundancy and Reliability ........................................ 6-7 ProSafe-RS Related Packages ........... 1-7 Pressure Clamp Terminal Blocks .....................3-67 Powerful Engineering Functions ......... 3-1 Operation and Monitoring Support Functions.............................. 4-5 Relation to Other Functions ................. 7-3 Scan Period................. 1-8 Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS) .... 4-9 SEBOL Window ............... 6-1 P Panel Set.........................................................................7-22 Saving to other Media ...................6-12 Programmable Controller Standards ..................2-45 Running Online Manual Viewer .......................................................... 7-11 Relay I/O Module ................................................2-45 RIO Nodes .2-44 Redundant Communication Functions ........2-46 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for RIO .................. 7-9...............7-21 Overview of Security Functions ....3-69 Receiving Communications from Other Stations .......................2-44 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for FIO ......................................................................................................................3-32 Security Levels .............................3-18 Operation at SCS Errors ...6-21 Relay Boards ... 6-6 Overview Objects ................... 2-4......................................................................... Hardware Upgradeable to the Latest Technology.................................................................. 7-1 Safety Life Cycle .....................................................12-2 SEBOL Functions .......................................................................................................3-54 Scales of Safety Evaluation .............................. 7-1 S Safety Control Station (SCS) . 7-11 Printout of Individual Items..................................................................2007-00 R Rack Mountable Node ............................................................................................................ 7-6 Overview of Override ...............2-38 Remote Desktop Function .......................................7-7 SCS Status Display Window.3-29 Optimal Operating Environment..............................................3-28 Process Data Access Function ........................................................... 7-13 Safety Engineering PC (SENG)......................... 9-1 Resource Usage Status Display ................................................................ 7-11 Profiler Display Functions ...............................3-66 Process Data Information ................................... 6-1 RIO Bus................................Ind-5 Operation and Monitoring Functions ...................3-15 Replacement System........................6-10 Recipe Information ...........2-24 Re-classify Alarms and Events ..............................14...........6-15 Reusable Engineering Data ............................................................................................... 1-6 Remote I/O (RIO) .......3-23 Overview of Forcing Function ......... 7-9 Safety Instrumented System .....................3-41 Remote I/O .........................................6-15 Print All Data..6-15 Print Screen Functions........4-20 Process Management Functions .................................................... 1-4 Overall Test ................. 7-7 SCS Link Transmission Safety Communication ...........3-58 Recipe Management Functions .................................... 1-4 Operation Keyboard....2-20 RIO Buses ........2-4.....2-48 Redundancy and Reliability of the FCS for FIO... 4-14 Regulatory Control Functions ..3-36 Requirements for a DCS for Batch Processes ......................................................................................3-51 Security Functions ........................7-26 Protection Layers of Plant and Safety Instrumented System ....................................... 5-4 Regulatory Control Blocks .........................................2-10 Operator Guide Window .............................................2-50 Programming Language Standard ............7-20 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec........ 7-7 SCS Link Transmission............. 1-6 Report Functions (Option) ...........................................7-24 Operation Environment Customizable to match Plant Configuration and Operating Procedures .......................................3-31 Operation and Monitoring Windows . FCS for RIO ....... 2-4............................ 9-4 Process Reports ...........................4-20 Process Input/Output and Software Input/Output ...... 7-2 Safety Standard Compliance .................3-31 Products Related to Input/Output Modules .7-21 Overview of Inter-SCS Safety Communication .............................................6-19 Repeating Alarms..................................................................................................................................................................................................

..................................... 5-1 Subsystem Connection (Modbus) ...............................................7-23 Subsystem Integration Functions .....................................................10-4 Support of Record and Report of Maintenance Inspection Result ...................................Ind-6 Security on a Per-Function-Block Basis ..............................................2-51 Smoothly Synchronize .......................... 1-5 Support for International Standards ... 5-6..................2007-00 ................. 1-3 Special Size ......13-4 SOE Viewer Package ......... 1-4 Time Adjustment ................................................................................................14..........................................................................................................................................13-5 SOE OPC Interface Package ................................................2-38 Test (EEMUA No............................6-10 SOER ...................... 13-2 System Configuration – CENTUM CS 3000 Equipment ..................6-15 SEM OPC Interface .................................3-33 Self Documentation (Option) .....6-15 Standards for Hazardous Location Equipment ...........5-2 Support for Intelligent Field Instruments ......... 6-7 Starting Printing................................13-6 Sequence Blocks .3-43 System Clock and VEHICLE Clock ..........13-4 SOE Server Configurator .......................................2-51 Standard Blocks ..................... 7-5 System Scale .......10-4 Suppress Unnecessary Alarms and Events Issuance ......................................................................................................................3-42 System View ......................................................................6-10 Test Multiple Virtual FCSes from Multiple PCs ..13-6 SOE Viewer.2-53 Snapshot Functions .2-6...........1-1.... 4-6 Sequence Element Blocks ....................2-54 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec......................................................................................3-70 Test Functions .................................. 9-1 Support for Next-generation Field Instruments with Open Fieldbus ..................3-69 Switch Instrument Blocks......... 7-8 System Scale and Hardware Implementation Requireme ...........................................................................7-25 Test Functions (Option) ..........7-26 SOE Server ............................................... 9-1 Support for Latest PC Hardware.........................................3-31 Target Tests ...............................191 Compliant) ....................................................... 4-7 Sequence Table Window ........3-33 Security on a Per-Window Basis ..3-49 Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function (Option) .................. 4-8 Synthesis of DCS and Personal Computers ......................................13-6 System Overview ............... 1-4 System Alarm Window ..................................................4-21 Software Input and Output .........................................................6-12 Terminal Boards ................................................6-10.................................................... 7-8 System Specifications..................................7-25 Target Test Functions .............................................3-70 System Generation ...................7-22 SOE Digital Input Module (ADV151-E) ..................................3-42 System Message Window .3-36 States and Operations of SCS..................... 6-6 System Integration OPC Station (SIOS) (Option) ..................................................2-53 Time Management ......................................5-7 Supervise Alarm and Event Messages ................ 4-9 SFC Window ..... 8-4 Standard Engineering Functions ........................................................................ 4-8 Sequence Faceplate Block ............ 2-3 System Configuration of ProSafe-RS ..............................2-52 Time Notification ............4-10 Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function (Option) ..4-16 Sequence Control Functions ............... 3-5...................3-61 SFC Block Functions ................. 1-2 System Configuration .......................................2-35 Terminal Type Multiplexer Module ................................................................................................................................................................................................3-4...............13-1 Sequence Table Block ... 2-1..............................................2-52 System Concepts ...... 3-7 Specify Type of Printing .................................. 2-6 System Status Overview Window...................3-57 Step Execution ..................3-10 SIL3 Certification Acquired from TÜV ...........................7-26 Software Input/Output ............3-51 Shortcut Functions ......................... 3-1 Support for Multiple Products .......................3-65 System Maintenance Functions ..................... 7-5 System Configuration Using CAMS for HIS ................7-23 Subsystem Communication Functions ..................................................................................7-19 Station Information ........................3-70 Supported Subsystem Communication Packages .................................................... 3-65................................. 6-7 T Tag Name Search .................................... 4-1 Support of Maintenance Inspection Works ...... 3-6 System Monitoring and Maintenance Functions ..........................................6-13 The Operating Environment can incorporate the Latest Technology.. 7-11 Terminal Type Digital I/O Module ................................................2-53 Time Discrepancy .......................6-15 Tag Report..... 6-12 Subsystem Communication Function ............................................... 4-1 Summary of Communications with Subsystems ..................... 8-5 Solutions Incorporating CENTUM CS 3000 ..

...............3-25 Types of Sequence Control ........................................................... 6-1 TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec................................................................................................. 3-7 Wiring check Adapters ...................................................................................................................3-26 Tuning Parameter Printout ........ 4-11 User Groups ...............................................7-22 W Web Monitoring Functions (Option) .............. 8-3 Unique Testing Environment ................................................2-52 Trends ................................................................................3-52 Trend Point Window ...........................14.............................15-2 Trend Data Information ..................3-38 VTSPortal System Architecture ...............................7-23 Time Synchronization Method of SCSs Connected to V net .........3-68 V net .......2007-00 ...........................................3-67 Viewing Events with SOE Viewer ..........6-10 Voice Messaging Functions ............................................................4-19 Unit Management Functions................................................2-54 Time Synchronization Function .......3-47 Time Synchronization Between Domains..7-22 Time Synchronization in Different Domains ................................................ 3-3 Window Hierarchy .....................................................................4-12 Unit Instruments and Operations .......................................... 4-6 Virtual Test Functions ................ 4-20 Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal (VTSPortal) ...................................................................................................7-22 Virtual Tests ..............................................................4-3 U Unified Operation Procedures ............................................. 6-12 Tuning Trend .........................................3-32 User Permissions ............7-22 Time Synchronization of the Stations Not Connected on V net .....................................................12-2 Utility Functions ..................................... 5-6 When GSGW is on a PC separate from the OPC server ......10-4 Valve Monitoring Blocks . 8-3 Unit for Optical Bus Repeater Module (Rack Mountable Type) (SNT10D) ...............................................................................................................Ind-7 Time Setting Dialog Box...........................................................7-16 Unit Instruments ........15-2 Trend compare screen ....3-53 Tuning Window ......................6-10..........................2-4........................................ 3-1 Window Call-up ......... 2-40 V net Time Master Method (Default) .....4-13.......................................................2-54 Time Synchronization Method of SCSs Connected to Vnet/IP ...................................3-27 Trend Window ...........................6-15 Tuning Parameter Save Functions .. 5-6 Wide-ranging Standard Function Blocks ......................7-25 “Virtual Test” Functions ...................................................................3-33 Using a Mouse or Similar Pointing Device to Call up Windows .................2-54 Time Synchronization Scheme ................................................................................................................................... 4-8 Valve Pattern Monitors (Option) ..6-15 V Valve Diagnosis........................ 8-3 Windows-Based Open Interface . 3-3 Using Operator Keyboard to Call up Windows .........3-62 When GSGW and the OPC server are on the same PC .... 3-8 Window Sizing .. 1-1 You can mix Continuous and Sequence Control ...............7-12 Y Yokogawa’s Enterprise Technology Solutions Concept .............................3-58 Trend Functions ................ 3-3 Using Table of Contents and Index ..3-52 Trend and alarm analysis screens ........3-32 User Name .........................

Blank Page .

11 Added Hard Copy Functions 3. SLPC.7 Added Generic Name 4.8 Added YS Instrument Blocks (SLCD.6.2. STLD) to Table of Regulatory Control Blocks In Table of Unit Instruments and Operations.5.7 Added Message Monitoring Window 3. SLCC.1.3 Solutions Incorporating CENTUM CS 3000” 1. SBSD.10 Added explanation of Alarm Processing Functions Added notes to figures explaining “Opening Process Alarm Window to Acknowledge Alarm” and “Opening System Alarm Window to Acknowledge Alarm” 3.4.2. due to addition of 3.4 Revised HIS Setting Window Added External Recorder Tab Sheet and ITV Tab Sheet on HIS Setting Tab Sheet Items 3.6.1 Revised description of V net cable and length 2.8 Added process I/O operation at CPU failure 2.9 Added FCS Data Setting/Acquisition function (PICOT) 4.4 Added CENTUM CS 3000 Related Software Packages 2. MELSEC-A Communication Package (for ACM71) Revised description associated with Communicating with Other Subsystems.1 Added ACM71 Ethernet Communication Module. ACM71 and ACP71 to I/O Modules 2.3 Console-type added 2. Fieldbus.2.4 SEBOL Window: Changed item no.4 Revised Logic Chart Block Diagram 4. and Prosafe “Safety Instrumented System” Revised description of Communications Gateway Unit (CGW) 2. added OPSFC1.4. AMM32CJ. Revised System Configuration Diagram 2.1 Revised figure showing Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions 3.6.3 Revised figure showing System Message Window 3. AMM22C.5. AMM25C. OPSFC5 4.2 Overview of Function” to “1.01. YS Communication Package (for ACM12).1999/3rd Edition 1.4. SMST-121.9 Graphic Web Display Function added 4.5 Added Connecting ITV Camera 3. and AAM11B.5.3 Logic Chart Window 3. ACF11 added 2. and figure showing “Communications I/O Data Flow” TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb. SLBC.2 Added AMN52 to I/O Module Nests.1 Added Engineering PC (ENG).3 Logic Chart Window 3. FCS-XL and FCS-V Control Station for Migration to CENTUM CS 3000.2.i Revision Information ● Title ● Manual No. OPSFC4.6. SLMC.6 Added Help Dialog 3.3 Separated “I/O Module Nests and I/O Modules” from item 2.2.2 Revised order and contents of Common Operation and Monitoring Functions 3. due to addition of 3. Business Information PCs and Supervisory Computers. SMRT.1 Added examples of Instrument Faceplates 3.5 Revised Window Hierarchy explanation 3.3.4 Logic Chart Blocks added 6.1.4.2001-00 .1. Unified Operation/Monitoring Station (UHMIS).6.1.6 Fieldbus added 3.7. : CENTUM CS 3000 Integrated Production Control System System Overview : TI 33Q01B10-01E May 1998/1st Edition Newly published Nov. AMM32C.5 Added External Recorder Output Functions 3.4. SMST-111.3. OPSFC3.3 Added Logic Chart Window 3. Batch Management Functions added Oct.4 Added “CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL Migration to CENTUM CS 3000” 1.3 Revised “1.1998/2nd Edition 2. AMM32TJ.2 AMM12C. AAM21J.3. AMM22TJ.9 Added C-Tick Mark description 3.5 SFC Window: Changed item no.6 Added CENTUM Desktop Environment Customization 3. OPSFC2.

1 Added description of KFCS. KFCS and APCS.” and description of the functions 5.2 Revised standard FCS (LFCS) of 3rd Edition to standard FCS for RIO (LFCS) 2.4 Added KFCS 2.1 Added this item.7.1 Added voice messaging functions.5. BCV constants. User-defined status character string.8 Added description of Remote Maintenance Functions Feb. CGW constants.3.3 Revised description of Exaopc and figure showing Exaopc OPC Interface Package 2.1 Added console type HIS.2 Revised description of Exapilot 1. deleted Nodes and RIO Bus revised UHMIS to Exaopc 2.4.4.6 Added Expert Trend Viewer Function (Option) 3.01. Windows NT is changed to Windows 2000 KFCS and APCS are added.4 Revised table of Typical Figures for Disk Capacity 3. so that some chapter. Status change command character string.4. KFCS and APCS to figure showing CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration (Basic) Added console type HIS. Switch position label. Report.7 Added KFCS system configuration with Fieldbus 2. State transition matrix. Alarm processing table. KFCS and APCS.8 Revised description of this section. section and item numbers of 3rd Edition are revised.2 In Table of “List of Builder Programs”.4 Added "Management Cost Reduction" 1.1 Added KFCS I/O modules 2.7 Added Voice Messaging Functions 3. and Train in batch functions 5.1 Revised description of Exaplog 1.2001-00 .1.3. Multi-monitor and Process Management Tab Sheet to table showing HIS Setting Tab Sheet Items 3.2 Deleted description of Increasing Engineering Productivity . Deleted redundant description of "Easy Hardware Upgrades" Added Console Type HIS and Multi-monitor Functions 3. added CENTUM Data Access Library and deleted DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) 3.Components and Models 4.10 Revised Graphic Web Display Function to Web Monitoring Functions Added trend window monitoring to Web Monitoring Functions 4.1 Added KFCS 2. Engineering unit symbol.8 Added new sequence table blocks to table "List of Sequence Blocks" TI 33Q01B10-01E Feb.7. added Multiple project connection. multi-monitor functions and expert trend viewer function to figure showing Configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions 3. deleted CENTUM V and revised UHMIS to Exaopc in figure showing CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration 2.8.4.8 Added Multi-monitor Functions 3.3 Added Security on Per-Window Basis 3.1.4. 2001/4th Edition For all sections.7 Revised “5.4.5 Added Expanded Test Functions 5. and description of the functions 5.7 Online Maintenance Functions.3 Added description of Engineering Procedure 5. 1.4 Revised figure showing HIS Setting Window Added OPC.6.5. Alarm priority level.5.ii 5.2 Revised “Multiple-project Configuration” to “Multiple Project Connection Functions”.4.4. ESB bus and FIO Node 3.2 Added "acquiring trend data for other stations" to description of Ethernet 2. revised description of Console-type HIS Added open style console type HIS 2.4 Online Maintenance Functions” to “5.4.2 Added description of I/O modules for LFCS and SFCS 2.2 Added KFCS and CENTUM-XL system to figure showing Example of Large System Configuration 2.4. Plant hierarchy.5 Revised description of Connecting ITV Camera 3. Added console type HIS.

global switch. 2002/6th Edition All sections Revised in line with system version upgrade to R3.4. “Windows NT-version” deleted from “Exapilot Windows NT-version” in the figure of Exaopc. Added Plant Resource Manager (PRM) Nov.3.2.5 Added display buttons for each alarm priority level.1 Added ISA S88. trend record. ASD533 modules with built-in barriers added.11 Page for the configured information reference function added. 1. 2.2 Added note 1 regarding master recipe creation to figure showing Flow of CS Batch 3000 Revised description of (4) Batch results acquisition of Process Management Functions 8.000. Added Advanced Control Functions 6.1 Description for the maximum number of node units per KFCS2 added.9 Added Advanced alarm Filter Function.10 Page for the remote desktop function added.4.5. Introduction “CRT” deleted.” 3.02. 3.1 Instrument faceplate of a timer block changed.2003-00 .5 Added Snapshot Functions 6. 3.3. Revised description of Plant Resource Management. 3.4 Voice messaging functions.1 “Remote Desktop Function.2 Deleted Exchanging Data with Windows Application (item 5. advanced alarm filter functions.5 Added AAP149 Pulse Input Module for Compatible PM1 and ALE111 Ethernet Communication Module. ASD143. 2.1 AI143 and AAI543 field-to-system isolated.10 “Alarm handling” changed to “Alarm processing. point-to-point non-isolated modules added. 8.15.4. 3 “LCD/” added to “CRT” for an enclosed display style console.2. and remote desktop function added to operation and monitoring support functions. 3. 3. SLC 500 and MELSEC. 2. 3.” 2. “Advanced Alarm Filter Functions” moved to a different position. 2.2. Descriptions for Windows XP support added.03. FA-M3. Added Enhanced FCS. AST143.5. 2.4 KFCS2 and LFCS2 added.4. PLC-5. 3.3 “Helper package” changed to “PLUG-IN application. trend display pen assignment and unit common block to List of Builder Program 6. 4. Trademark acknowledgments revised.4 Figure of the HIS setting window revised. ALR112 and ACM71).2.1 TI 33Q01B10-01E Oct.12 Page for Consolidated Historical Message Viewer added.3. 3.2 Added Search Functions and Favorites 9. Modbus Communication Package (for ALR111 and ALR112) and MELSEC Communication Package (for ALR111 and ALR112) 5. Figure of the graphic window showing overview objects changed.2 “V net” in the figure of a large system configuration changed to “HF-bus.2 Added subsystems supported by Ethernet communication.1.2 Added system-specific status character string viewer.6 Revised figure showing Self-Documentation for Function Block Detail Definitions 7. 2.2 “Alarm handling” changed to “Alarm processing. 3.5.2 of 3rd Edition) and Reusable Engineering Data (item 5.” and “Consolidated Historical Message Viewer” added to the figure of configuration of operation and monitoring functions.2 “RTS” changed to “RTD” (resistance temperature detector).01 requirement to description of Support for Multiple Product 7.” “Configured Information Reference Function.1 “18-inch LCD/” added to the figure of an enclosed display style console. 2. Sep.3 Number of OPC Foundation participants revised to 200. ASR133.10 Description for compliance to US standards deleted.8 A list of enhanced motor control and switch instrument blocks added.2 Added description that tags can be monitored up to 1. 9. 2001/5th Edition For all sections Corresponded to R3. 2. Added FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Function. 4. 10.iii Added ALR111 and ALR112 communication modules Added FA-M3 Communication Package (for ALR111.4.” 4.3 of 3rd Edition) 6.000. 2.” 3.

1 Figure Configuration of FCS Control Functions revised 4.1 Console Type HIS with 18-inch LCD changed to LCD 2.1 Figure Operation Keyboard revised 3.3.5.9 Offsite Block Functions added 4.2 Figure Example of Large System Configuration revised 2.3 Compact FCS changed to compact FCS for RIO and PFC-S/-E added 3.1 AAV144.6. AAV544.4 PFC-S/-E added to compact FCS for RIO 2.4 Figure HIS Setting Window revised 4.11.11.2 Subsystem Communication Functions revised and moved to Chapter 5 Generic Subsystem Gateway Package (GSGW) added 6. 2.1.04 1.4. 2003/7th Edition For all sections Corresponded to R3.8.3 Time adjustment of a PC with ENG function deleted 3.8.8 Function outline of List of Function Blocks added 4.iv Oct.2005-00 .1.11 Time Management added 3.9 Descriptions on CPU Failure revised 2.4.1 FCU Configuration in FFCS added Mounting of FFCS added 2.1 AAP849 Analog Input/Output Module added 2.8.3 Description on Migration from CENTUM CS 1000 to CS 3000 2. 2004/8th Edition For all sections Corresponded to R3.2 Accuracy of VEHICLE clock corrected 2.5 Descriptions on Receiving Communications from Other Stations revised 7 Moved from Chapter 5 8 Moved from Chapter 7 10 Table Optional Packages and Responses in Individual Group Functions added Figure Example of a System Configuration revised 10.1.1 Remote Operation and Monitoring Server Function added to configuration of Operation and Monitoring Functions 3.4 Moved to Chapter 15 1.4 Compact FCS for FIO added 2.8 Valve Pattern Monitors added 4.2 2.10 Fieldbus simplified universal block added to faceplate blocks 6.10 Moved from 4.2 Table Clauses Regarding Data Integrity and Solution in CENTUM CS 3000 revised 11 Moved from Chapter 8 12 Sequence of Events Manager (SEM) Function added 13 Event Viewer Package added 14 Long-term Trend Historian Package (LTTH) added Oct.7 Notes on Fieldbus Connection (FCS for FIO) added 2.1 Descriptions on Exaplog deleted 2 Figure CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration (Basic) and Figure CENTUM CS 3000 System Configuration revised 2.10 Benefits of Remote Desktop Function is Corrected 3.2 Redundancy and Reliability of the Compact FCS for FIO added 2.1.3.3 Moved from 2. and ALP111 added 2.4 Description on System Integration OPC Station added TI 33Q01B10-01E May 31.2.1.1 System Integration OPC Station added 3.1 Compact FCS for FIO added Generic Subsystem Gateway Package added 2.05 2.11 Process Input/Output and Software Input/Output added 5 4.1.4.8 Yokogawa Engineering Service replaced with our service section March.1 Descriptions on V net revised 2.4.2.5.2005/9th Edition For all sections Corresponded to R3.10 Remote Operation and Monitoring Server Function description added 4.5.1 Descriptions on Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS with 21-inch CRT and Open Display Style Console Type HIS with 15-inch LCD deleted 2.1.06 i Trademark added 2 “ProSafe” changed to “ProSafe-RS” in description of Safety instrumented system.

7 “Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS)” 7. 3.3 Model was added or changed.4 SCS Status Display Window Link Trans Lock added to the Figure in 3.6 Section 1.3 Security Levels The explanation of “Security Levels” was added.2007-00 .6 “Improved Security and Safety for Plants” was revised.6 Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring Table “Mapping Blocks and Elements” was revised. Dec. ESB bys (SNB10D) was added.2. 7. 1.10 Description of functional safety was added. For all sections corresponded to R3.4 Description of the SCS status display window was added.5 Description of the process alarm window was revised. 3.3.6 Comparison of HIS Operation and Monitoring Table Mapping Blocks and Elements Data Grouping Override added to Override from HIS Table Software Input and Output That Can Be Used with SCS Global switch supported by SCS TI 33Q01B10-01E Dec. 3.3. 3.16 “Consolidated Alarm Management Software for Human Interface Station (CAMS for HIS)” was newly added.02 support was revised.3.03 2. 2.5. Figure “Hardware Configuration of SCS” was revised.3 States and Operations of SCS Forcing and Override Grouping Override added to Table Differences between Forcing and Override 7.1 SCS and SENG were added to the system status list display window.3. 7. Introduction Descriptions of ProSafe-RS and safety instrumented system were added. 1.5.2.2.6. “Improved Security and Safety for Plants” was newly added.10 Description of functional safety was added.3 Description of a safety instrument system was added.08 1.16 SCS added and corrected in System Configuration of Consolidated Alarm Management 7.15 “Versatile Terminal Service Application Portal(VTSPortal)” was newly added 3.14.10 Description of the process alarm window of the alarm processing function was revised.2 Description of the system alarm window was revised. 3. 7. 2.9 Description on Coordination with SmartPlant Instrumentation added 6.5. Description of “ProSafe-RS” was revised.3.v 6. 2.1 System Overview SCS Link Transmission added Description in Products Related to Input/Output Modules revised AKB651 added to Dedicated Cable SED2D description added to Terminal Boards Relay Boards description revised Figure in Wiring Check Adapters changed 7.1 Hardware Configuration of SCS. 2007/12th Edition General for ProSafe-RS R1.10 Marine Standards added to various standards Error in Standards for Hazardous Location Equipment corrected 3. 7 “Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS)” was added in Chapter 7 and subsequent chapter numbers were changed.1 The position of ProSafe-RS was unified. December 2006/11th Edition Descriptions for ProSafe-RS R1.3.2.5. 3.10 Description on Device Panel Functions added June 2006/10th Edition General “Safety Instrumented System (ProSafe-RS)” was added in Chapter 7. Cover Page The logo of ProSafe-RS was added under the logo of CS 3000 R3 in the upper right corner.

JAPAN KOHOKU PUBLISHING & PRINTING INC. Tokyo 180-8750. Musashino-shi. . Printed by Subject to change without notice.Written by Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->